[gtkmm] Added Button and Table methods.
- From: Murray Cumming <murrayc src gnome org>
- To: commits-list gnome org
- Cc:
- Subject: [gtkmm] Added Button and Table methods.
- Date: Tue, 29 Jun 2010 20:53:33 +0000 (UTC)
commit 08c94c6603369fe5694f532d4d2b85e4a852559c
Author: Murray Cumming <murrayc murrayc com>
Date: Tue Jun 29 22:31:58 2010 +0200
Added Button and Table methods.
* gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml: Regenerated with docextract_to_xml.py.
* gtk/src/gtk_methods.defs: Regenerated with h2defs.py.
* gtk/src/button.hg: Added get_event_window().
* gtk/src/table.hg: Added get_size().
ChangeLog | 11 +
gtk/src/button.hg | 5 +-
gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml |26169 +++++++++++++++++++++-------------------------
gtk/src/gtk_methods.defs | 46 +-
gtk/src/table.hg | 2 +
5 files changed, 11842 insertions(+), 14391 deletions(-)
---
diff --git a/ChangeLog b/ChangeLog
index 98c4493..961be57 100644
--- a/ChangeLog
+++ b/ChangeLog
@@ -1,3 +1,14 @@
+2.90.4:
+
+2010-06-29 Murray Cumming <murrayc murrayc com>
+
+ Added Button and Table methods.
+
+ * gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml: Regenerated with docextract_to_xml.py.
+ * gtk/src/gtk_methods.defs: Regenerated with h2defs.py.
+ * gtk/src/button.hg: Added get_event_window().
+ * gtk/src/table.hg: Added get_size().
+
2010-06-28 Murray Cumming <murrayc murrayc com>
PrintOperation: const and refcount fixes.
diff --git a/gtk/src/button.hg b/gtk/src/button.hg
index a0c697f..707b0a2 100644
--- a/gtk/src/button.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/button.hg
@@ -98,7 +98,10 @@ public:
_WRAP_METHOD(void set_image_position(PositionType position), gtk_button_set_image_position)
_WRAP_METHOD(PositionType get_image_position() const, gtk_button_get_image_position)
-
+
+ _WRAP_METHOD(Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Window> get_event_window(), gtk_button_get_event_window, refreturn)
+ _WRAP_METHOD(Glib::RefPtr<const Gdk::Window> get_event_window() const, gtk_button_get_event_window, refreturn, constversion)
+
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void pressed(), "pressed")
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void released(), "released")
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void clicked(), "clicked")
diff --git a/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml b/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
index c543b9a..3fd1673 100644
--- a/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
+++ b/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
@@ -16,30 +16,25 @@ by typing in text.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_file">
<description>
-Returns the paper height in units of @unit.
-
-Note that this function takes orientation, but
-not margins into consideration.
-See gtk_page_setup_get_page_height().
+Makes @status_icon display the file @filename.
+See gtk_status_icon_new_from_file() for details.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> a filename
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the paper height.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row">
@@ -92,48 +87,6 @@ icon for @icon_name.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions">
-<description>
-This is a convenience routine to create a group of radio actions and
-add them to the action group.
-
-The "changed" signal of the first radio action is connected to the
- on_change callback and the accel paths of the actions are set to
-<literal><Actions>/<replaceable>group-name</replaceable>/<replaceable>action-name</replaceable></literal>.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of radio action descriptions
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> the number of entries
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> the value of the action to activate initially, or -1 if
-no action should be activated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="on_change">
-<parameter_description> the callback to connect to the changed signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to the action callbacks
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner">
<description>
Virtually sets the contents of the specified clipboard by providing
@@ -299,41 +252,24 @@ gtk_icon_info_free()
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_set_ref">
+<function name="gtk_font_button_set_use_size">
<description>
-Increments the reference count on @icon_set.
+If @use_size is %TRUE, the font name will be written using the selected size.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet.
+<parameter name="font_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> @icon_set.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkButton containing a label.
-If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
-If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
-underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
-accelerator called a mnemonic.
-Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> The text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
-mnemonic character
+<parameter name="use_size">
+<parameter_description> If %TRUE, font name will be written using the selected size.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkButton
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_label_get_text">
@@ -355,50 +291,6 @@ string used by the label, and must not be modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_slider">
-<description>
-Draws a slider in the given rectangle on @window using the
-given style and orientation.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
- @window: a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> a shadow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the orientation to be used
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_manager_lookup_item">
<description>
Searches for a URI inside the recently used resources list, and
@@ -459,6 +351,48 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions">
+<description>
+This is a convenience routine to create a group of radio actions and
+add them to the action group.
+
+The "changed" signal of the first radio action is connected to the
+ on_change callback and the accel paths of the actions are set to
+<literal><Actions>/<replaceable>group-name</replaceable>/<replaceable>action-name</replaceable></literal>.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> an array of radio action descriptions
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_entries">
+<parameter_description> the number of entries
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the value of the action to activate initially, or -1 if
+no action should be activated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="on_change">
+<parameter_description> the callback to connect to the changed signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to the action callbacks
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_dialog_set_default_response">
<description>
Sets the last widget in the dialog's action area with the given @response_id
@@ -505,37 +439,30 @@ Sets a child property for @child and @container.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_colormap">
-<description>
-Gets the colormap that will be used to render @widget. No reference will
-be added to the returned colormap; it should not be unreferenced.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the colormap used by @widget
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_color_button_get_color">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint">
<description>
-Sets @color to be the current color in the #GtkColorButton widget.
+This function tells GTK+ that the user interface for your
+application requires users to read across tree rows and associate
+cells with one another. By default, GTK+ will then render the tree
+with alternating row colors. Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> use it
+just because you prefer the appearance of the ruled tree; that's a
+question for the theme. Some themes will draw tree rows in
+alternating colors even when rules are turned off, and users who
+prefer that appearance all the time can choose those themes. You
+should call this function only as a <emphasis>semantic</emphasis>
+hint to the theme engine that your tree makes alternating colors
+useful from a functional standpoint (since it has lots of columns,
+generally).
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the current color.
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the tree requires reading across rows
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -587,85 +514,40 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_unmaximize">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_accepts_tab">
<description>
-Asks to unmaximize @window. Note that you shouldn't assume the
-window is definitely unmaximized afterward, because other entities
-(e.g. the user or <link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window
-manager</link>) could maximize it again, and not all window
-managers honor requests to unmaximize. But normally the window will
-end up unmaximized. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
-
-You can track maximization via the "window-state-event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
+Returns whether pressing the Tab key inserts a tab characters.
+gtk_text_view_set_accepts_tab().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if pressing the Tab key inserts a tab character,
+%FALSE if pressing the Tab key moves the keyboard focus.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_position">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_sort_indicator">
<description>
-This function returns the position you need to pass to
-gtk_window_move() to keep @window in its current position. This
-means that the meaning of the returned value varies with window
-gravity. See gtk_window_move() for more details.
-
-If you haven't changed the window gravity, its gravity will be
-#GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST. This means that gtk_window_get_position()
-gets the position of the top-left corner of the window manager
-frame for the window. gtk_window_move() sets the position of this
-same top-left corner.
-
-gtk_window_get_position() is not 100% reliable because the X Window System
-does not specify a way to obtain the geometry of the
-decorations placed on a window by the window manager.
-Thus GTK+ is using a "best guess" that works with most
-window managers.
-
-Moreover, nearly all window managers are historically broken with
-respect to their handling of window gravity. So moving a window to
-its current position as returned by gtk_window_get_position() tends
-to result in moving the window slightly. Window managers are
-slowly getting better over time.
-
-If a window has gravity #GDK_GRAVITY_STATIC the window manager
-frame is not relevant, and thus gtk_window_get_position() will
-always produce accurate results. However you can't use static
-gravity to do things like place a window in a corner of the screen,
-because static gravity ignores the window manager decorations.
-
-If you are saving and restoring your application's window
-positions, you should know that it's impossible for applications to
-do this without getting it somewhat wrong because applications do
-not have sufficient knowledge of window manager state. The Correct
-Mechanism is to support the session management protocol (see the
-"GnomeClient" object in the GNOME libraries for example) and allow
-the window manager to save your window sizes and positions.
+Gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="root_x">
-<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate of gravity-determined reference point
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="root_y">
-<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate of gravity-determined reference point
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether the sort indicator arrow is displayed
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_reorderable">
@@ -693,91 +575,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_default_size">
-<description>
-Sets the default size of a window. If the window's "natural" size
-(its size request) is larger than the default, the default will be
-ignored. More generally, if the default size does not obey the
-geometry hints for the window (gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can
-be used to set these explicitly), the default size will be clamped
-to the nearest permitted size.
-
-Unlike gtk_widget_set_size_request(), which sets a size request for
-a widget and thus would keep users from shrinking the window, this
-function only sets the initial size, just as if the user had
-resized the window themselves. Users can still shrink the window
-again as they normally would. Setting a default size of -1 means to
-use the "natural" default size (the size request of the window).
-
-For more control over a window's initial size and how resizing works,
-investigate gtk_window_set_geometry_hints().
-
-For some uses, gtk_window_resize() is a more appropriate function.
-gtk_window_resize() changes the current size of the window, rather
-than the size to be used on initial display. gtk_window_resize() always
-affects the window itself, not the geometry widget.
-
-The default size of a window only affects the first time a window is
-shown; if a window is hidden and re-shown, it will remember the size
-it had prior to hiding, rather than using the default size.
-
-Windows can't actually be 0x0 in size, they must be at least 1x1, but
-passing 0 for @width and @height is OK, resulting in a 1x1 default size.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width in pixels, or -1 to unset the default width
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height in pixels, or -1 to unset the default height
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_custom">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object with the
-given parameters.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> the paper name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="display_name">
-<parameter_description> the human-readable name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the paper width, in units of @unit
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the paper height, in units of @unit
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for @width and @height
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object, use gtk_paper_size_free()
-to free it
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_set_mark">
<description>
Move the mark to the given position, if not @should_exist,
@@ -813,63 +610,6 @@ immediately
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_dialog_run">
-<description>
-Blocks in a recursive main loop until the @dialog either emits the
-#GtkDialog::response signal, or is destroyed. If the dialog is
-destroyed during the call to gtk_dialog_run(), gtk_dialog_run() returns
-#GTK_RESPONSE_NONE. Otherwise, it returns the response ID from the
-::response signal emission.
-
-Before entering the recursive main loop, gtk_dialog_run() calls
-gtk_widget_show() on the dialog for you. Note that you still
-need to show any children of the dialog yourself.
-
-During gtk_dialog_run(), the default behavior of #GtkWidget::delete-event
-is disabled; if the dialog receives ::delete_event, it will not be
-destroyed as windows usually are, and gtk_dialog_run() will return
-#GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT. Also, during gtk_dialog_run() the dialog
-will be modal. You can force gtk_dialog_run() to return at any time by
-calling gtk_dialog_response() to emit the ::response signal. Destroying
-the dialog during gtk_dialog_run() is a very bad idea, because your
-post-run code won't know whether the dialog was destroyed or not.
-
-After gtk_dialog_run() returns, you are responsible for hiding or
-destroying the dialog if you wish to do so.
-
-Typical usage of this function might be:
-|[
-gint result = gtk_dialog_run (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
-switch (result)
-{
-case GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT:
-do_application_specific_something ();
-break;
-default:
-do_nothing_since_dialog_was_cancelled ();
-break;
-}
-gtk_widget_destroy (dialog);
-]|
-
-Note that even though the recursive main loop gives the effect of a
-modal dialog (it prevents the user from interacting with other
-windows in the same window group while the dialog is run), callbacks
-such as timeouts, IO channel watches, DND drops, etc, <emphasis>will</emphasis>
-be triggered during a gtk_dialog_run() call.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> response ID
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_accel_group_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkAccelGroup.
@@ -921,26 +661,83 @@ to the slider.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_items">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_clickable">
<description>
-Gets the list of recently used resources in form of #GtkRecentInfo objects.
+Sets the header to be active if @active is %TRUE. When the header is active,
+then it can take keyboard focus, and can be clicked.
-The return value of this function is affected by the "sort-type" and
-"limit" properties of @chooser.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="clickable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the header is active.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.10
+<function name="gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic">
+<description>
+Loads an icon, modifying it to match the system colours for the foreground,
+success, warning and error colors provided. If the icon is not a symbolic
+one, the function will return the result from gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
+
+This allows loading symbolic icons that will match the system theme.
+
+Unless you are implementing a widget, you will want to use
+g_themed_icon_new_with_default_fallbacks() to load the icon.
+
+As implementation details, the icon loaded needs to be of SVG type,
+contain the "symbolic" term as the last component of the icon name,
+and use the 'fg', 'success', 'warning' and 'error' CSS styles in the
+SVG file itself.
+
+See the <ulink url="http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/SymbolicIcons">Symbolic Icons spec</ulink>
+for more information about symbolic icons.
+
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="icon_info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fg">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor representing the foreground color of the icon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="success_color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor representing the warning color
+of the icon or %NULL to use the default color
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="warning_color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor representing the warning color
+of the icon or %NULL to use the default color
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error_color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor representing the error color
+of the icon or %NULL to use the default color (allow-none)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="was_symbolic">
+<parameter_description> a #gboolean, returns whether the loaded icon
+was a symbolic one and whether the @fg color was applied to it.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> location to store error information on failure,
+or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated
-list of #GtkRecentInfo objects. You should
-use gtk_recent_info_unref() on every item of the list, and then free
-the list itself using g_list_free().
+<return> a #GdkPixbuf representing the loaded icon
</return>
</function>
@@ -1022,26 +819,6 @@ The returned list must be freed with g_list_free ().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_select_multiple">
-<description>
-Sets whether @chooser can select multiple items.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="select_multiple">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if @chooser can select more than one item
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_select_range">
<description>
This function moves the "insert" and "selection_bound" marks
@@ -1180,23 +957,61 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_website_label">
+<function name="gtk_paint_expander">
<description>
-Returns the label used for the website link.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Draws an expander as used in #GtkTreeView. @x and @y specify the
+center the expander. The size of the expander is determined by the
+"expander-size" style property of @widget. (If widget is not
+specified or doesn't have an "expander-size" property, an
+unspecified default size will be used, since the caller doesn't
+have sufficient information to position the expander, this is
+likely not useful.) The expander is expander_size pixels tall
+in the collapsed position and expander_size pixels wide in the
+expanded position.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x position to draw the expander at
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y position to draw the expander at
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expander_style">
+<parameter_description> the style to draw the expander in; determines
+whether the expander is collapsed, expanded, or in an
+intermediate state.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The label used for the website link. The string is
-owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_inside_word">
@@ -1218,6 +1033,32 @@ correct fix would be to the Pango word break algorithms).
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_binding_entry_skip">
+<description>
+Install a binding on @binding_set which causes key lookups
+to be aborted, to prevent bindings from lower priority sets
+to be activated.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="binding_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to skip an entry of
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> key value of binding to skip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to skip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_complete">
<description>
Sets whether @page contents are complete. This will make
@@ -1263,30 +1104,23 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_child_get_property">
+<function name="gtk_button_get_event_window">
<description>
-Gets the value of a child property for @child and @container.
+Returns the button's event window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise.
+This function should be rarely needed.
+
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="property_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the property to get
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> a location to return the value
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> @button's event window.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_get_path">
@@ -1338,25 +1172,22 @@ inserted text.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_has_tooltip">
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_new">
<description>
-Sets the has-tooltip property on @status_icon to @has_tooltip.
-See #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip for more information.
+Creates a new #GtkMountOperation
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_tooltip">
-<parameter_description> whether or not @status_icon has a tooltip
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent of the window, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkMountOperation
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_offscreen_window_get_pixbuf">
@@ -1396,6 +1227,68 @@ Gets the line wrapping for the view.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup">
+<description>
+Creates a new message dialog, which is a simple dialog with an icon
+indicating the dialog type (error, warning, etc.) and some text which
+is marked up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
+When the user clicks a button a "response" signal is emitted with
+response IDs from #GtkResponseType. See #GtkDialog for more details.
+
+Special XML characters in the printf() arguments passed to this
+function will automatically be escaped as necessary.
+(See g_markup_printf_escaped() for how this is implemented.)
+Usually this is what you want, but if you have an existing
+Pango markup string that you want to use literally as the
+label, then you need to use gtk_message_dialog_set_markup()
+instead, since you can't pass the markup string either
+as the format (it might contain '%' characters) or as a string
+argument.
+|[
+GtkWidget *dialog;
+dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (main_application_window,
+GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
+GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
+GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
+NULL);
+gtk_message_dialog_set_markup (GTK_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog),
+markup);
+]|
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> flags
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> type of message
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buttons">
+<parameter_description> set of buttons to use
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="message_format">
+<parameter_description> printf()-style format string, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkMessageDialog
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_mnemonic_activate">
<description>
Activates the targets associated with the mnemonic.
@@ -1451,43 +1344,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_vline">
-<description>
-Draws a vertical line from (@x, @y1_) to (@x, @y2_) in @window
-using the given style and state.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_vline() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y1_">
-<parameter_description> the starting y coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y2_">
-<parameter_description> the ending y coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_font_button_get_use_size">
<description>
Returns whether the selected size is used in the label.
@@ -1524,41 +1380,71 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_offscreen_window_get_pixmap">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_remove_action_group">
<description>
-Retrieves a snapshot of the contained widget in the form of
-a #GdkPixmap. If you need to keep this around over window
-resizes then you should add a reference to it.
+Removes an action group from the list of action groups associated
+with @self.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="offscreen">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkOffscreenWindow contained widget.
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group to be removed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GdkPixmap pointer to the offscreen pixmap, or %NULL.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_get_width">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_before">
<description>
-Obtains the width of the #GtkPrintContext, in pixels.
+Inserts a new row before @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will
+be appended to the end of the list. @iter will be changed to point to this
+new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in
+values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="list_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sibling">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the width of @context
+<return></return>
+</function>
+<function name="gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkButton containing a label.
+If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
+If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
+underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
+accelerator called a mnemonic.
+Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> The text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
+mnemonic character
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkButton
</return>
</function>
@@ -1644,28 +1530,6 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_filter_set_name">
-<description>
-Sets the human-readable name of the filter; this is the string
-that will be displayed in the recently used resources selector
-user interface if there is a selectable list of filters.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> then human readable name of @filter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder">
<description>
Adds a folder to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file chooser.
@@ -1721,6 +1585,21 @@ otherwise %FALSE.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_hide">
+<description>
+Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
+hidden (invisible to the user).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_paper_size_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object by parsing a
@@ -1866,48 +1745,22 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_box">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_markup_column">
<description>
-Draws a box on @window with the given parameters.
+Returns the column with markup text for @icon_view.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_box() instead.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the box
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the markup column, or -1 if it's unset.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_image_get_icon_name">
@@ -1979,45 +1832,39 @@ Note that the file descriptor will not be closed by this function.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_is_visible">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_indent">
<description>
-Returns whether the action is effectively visible.
+Gets the default indentation of paragraphs in @text_view.
+Tags in the view's buffer may override the default.
+The indentation may be negative.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the action and its associated action group
-are both visible.
-
+<return> number of pixels of indentation
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_filter_get_needed">
+<function name="gtk_action_is_visible">
<description>
-Gets the fields that need to be filled in for the structure
-passed to gtk_file_filter_filter()
-
-This function will not typically be used by applications; it
-is intended principally for use in the implementation of
-#GtkFileChooser.
+Returns whether the action is effectively visible.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
-calling gtk_file_filter_filter()
+<return> %TRUE if the action and its associated action group
+are both visible.
</return>
</function>
@@ -2050,25 +1897,20 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_label">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_resizable">
<description>
-Sets the label of the tool item group. The label is displayed in the header
-of the group.
+Returns %TRUE if the @tree_column can be resized by the end user.
-Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the new human-readable label of of the group
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE, if the @tree_column can be resized.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_list_store_insert">
@@ -2098,66 +1940,52 @@ gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_info_bar_add_button">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_n_items">
<description>
-Adds a button with the given text (or a stock button, if button_text
-is a stock ID) and sets things up so that clicking the button will emit
-the "response" signal with the given response_id. The button is appended
-to the end of the info bars's action area. The button widget is
-returned, but usually you don't need it.
+Gets the number of tool items in @group.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info_bar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkInfoBar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="button_text">
-<parameter_description> text of button, or stock ID
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="response_id">
-<parameter_description> response ID for the button
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the button widget that was added
+<return> the number of tool items in @group
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_default_direction">
+<function name="gtk_test_find_widget">
<description>
-Sets the default reading direction for widgets where the
-direction has not been explicitly set by gtk_widget_set_direction().
+This function will search the descendants of @widget for a widget
+of type @widget_type that has a label matching @label_pattern next
+to it. This is most useful for automated GUI testing, e.g. to find
+the "OK" button in a dialog and synthesize clicks on it.
+However see gtk_test_find_label(), gtk_test_find_sibling() and
+gtk_test_widget_click() for possible caveats involving the search of
+such widgets and synthesizing widget events.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dir">
-<parameter_description> the new default direction. This cannot be
-%GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> Container widget, usually a GtkWindow.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_n_items">
-<description>
-Gets the number of tool items in @group.
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+<parameter name="label_pattern">
+<parameter_description> Shell-glob pattern to match a label string.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget_type">
+<parameter_description> Type of a aearched for label sibling widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of tool items in @group
+<return> a valid widget if any is found or %NULL.
</return>
</function>
@@ -2321,23 +2149,20 @@ output should not be clipped
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_filter">
+<function name="gtk_action_unblock_activate">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkRecentFilter object currently used by @chooser to affect
-the display of the recently used resources.
+Reenable activation signals from the action
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkRecentFilter object.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_deleted">
@@ -2359,25 +2184,41 @@ know that the model emitted the "row_deleted" signal.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_view_new_with_markup">
+<function name="gtk_binding_entry_add_signal">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCellView widget, adds a #GtkCellRendererText
-to it, and makes it show @markup. The text can be
-marked up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text
-markup language</link>.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Override or install a new key binding for @keyval with @modifiers on
+ binding_set When the binding is activated, @signal_name will be
+emitted on the target widget, with @n_args @Varargs used as
+arguments.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="markup">
-<parameter_description> the text to display in the cell view
+<parameter name="binding_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to install an entry for
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> key value of binding to install
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to install
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="signal_name">
+<parameter_description> signal to execute upon activation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_args">
+<parameter_description> number of arguments to @signal_name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments to @signal_name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_enable_search">
@@ -2506,46 +2347,6 @@ the model will sort using this function.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_usize">
-<description>
-Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget's size
-request will be @width by @height. You can use this function to
-force a widget to be either larger or smaller than it is. The
-strange "usize" name dates from the early days of GTK+, and derives
-from X Window System terminology. In many cases,
-gtk_window_set_default_size() is a better choice for toplevel
-windows than this function; setting the default size will still
-allow users to shrink the window. Setting the usize will force them
-to leave the window at least as large as the usize. When dealing
-with window sizes, gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can be a useful
-function as well.
-
-Note the inherent danger of setting any fixed size - themes,
-translations into other languages, different fonts, and user action
-can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's
-basically impossible to hardcode a size that will always be
-correct.
-
-Deprecated: 2.2: Use gtk_widget_set_size_request() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> minimum width, or -1 to unset
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> minimum height, or -1 to unset
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_menu_label">
<description>
Retrieves the menu label widget of the page containing @child.
@@ -2568,31 +2369,6 @@ than the default (the tab label).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_menu_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserMenu widget.
-
-This kind of widget shows the list of recently used resources as
-a menu, each item as a menu item. Each item inside the menu might
-have an icon, representing its MIME type, and a number, for mnemonic
-access.
-
-This widget implements the #GtkRecentChooser interface.
-
-This widget creates its own #GtkRecentManager object. See the
-gtk_recent_chooser_menu_new_for_manager() function to know how to create
-a #GtkRecentChooserMenu widget bound to another #GtkRecentManager object.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkRecentChooserMenu
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_image_targets">
<description>
Add the writable image targets supported by #GtkSelection to
@@ -2613,43 +2389,26 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_completion">
+<function name="gtk_expander_new_with_mnemonic">
<description>
-Sets @completion to be the auxiliary completion object to use with @entry.
-All further configuration of the completion mechanism is done on
- completion using the #GtkEntryCompletion API. Completion is disabled if
- completion is set to %NULL.
+Creates a new expander using @label as the text of the label.
+If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
+If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
+underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
+accelerator called a mnemonic.
+Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkEntryCompletion or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_range_get_show_fill_level">
-<description>
-Gets whether the range displays the fill level graphically.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkRange
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text of the label with an underscore in front of the
+mnemonic character
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @range shows the fill level.
+<return> a new #GtkExpander widget.
</return>
</function>
@@ -2672,30 +2431,6 @@ mnemonic character
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_label_widget">
-<description>
-Sets @label_widget as the widget that will be used as the label
-for @button. If @label_widget is %NULL the "label" property is used
-as label. If "label" is also %NULL, the label in the stock item
-determined by the "stock_id" property is used as label. If
-"stock_id" is also %NULL, @button does not have a label.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="label_widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget used as label, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_style_get_valist">
<description>
Non-vararg variant of gtk_style_get().
@@ -2769,33 +2504,23 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_create_item">
+<function name="gtk_container_get_focus_child">
<description>
-Creates an item for @entry.
+Returns the current focus child widget inside @container.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkItemFactoryEntry to create an item for
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_data">
-<parameter_description> data passed to the callback function of @entry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_type">
-<parameter_description> 1 if the callback function of @entry is of type
-#GtkItemFactoryCallback1, 2 if it is of type #GtkItemFactoryCallback2
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The child widget which has the focus
+inside @container, or %NULL if none is set.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_get_accel_path">
@@ -2841,126 +2566,55 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_geometry">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_completion">
<description>
-Obtains information about the location of the status icon
-on screen. This information can be used to e.g. position
-popups like notification bubbles.
-
-See gtk_status_icon_position_menu() for a more convenient
-alternative for positioning menus.
-
-Note that some platforms do not allow GTK+ to provide
-this information, and even on platforms that do allow it,
-the information is not reliable unless the status icon
-is embedded in a notification area, see
-gtk_status_icon_is_embedded().
+Returns the auxiliary completion object currently in use by @entry.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> return location for the screen, or %NULL if the
-information is not needed
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> return location for the area occupied by the status
-icon, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> return location for the orientation of the panel
-in which the status icon is embedded, or %NULL. A panel
-at the top or bottom of the screen is horizontal, a panel
-at the left or right is vertical.
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the location information has
-been filled in
+<return> The auxiliary completion object currently in use by @entry.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_child_iter_to_iter">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_vadjustment">
<description>
-Sets @sort_iter to point to the row in @tree_model_sort that corresponds to
-the row pointed at by @child_iter. If @sort_iter was not set, %FALSE
-is returned. Note: a boolean is only returned since 2.14.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="sort_iter">
-<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row on the child model
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @sort_iter was set, i.e. if @sort_iter is a
-valid iterator pointer to a visible row in the child model.
-</return>
-</function>
+Gets the #GtkAdjustment currently being used for the vertical aspect.
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_headers_clickable">
-<description>
-Allow the column title buttons to be clicked.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the columns are clickable.
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GtkAdjustment object, or %NULL if none is currently being
+used.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_current_alpha">
<description>
-This function tells GTK+ that the user interface for your
-application requires users to read across tree rows and associate
-cells with one another. By default, GTK+ will then render the tree
-with alternating row colors. Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> use it
-just because you prefer the appearance of the ruled tree; that's a
-question for the theme. Some themes will draw tree rows in
-alternating colors even when rules are turned off, and users who
-prefer that appearance all the time can choose those themes. You
-should call this function only as a <emphasis>semantic</emphasis>
-hint to the theme engine that your tree makes alternating colors
-useful from a functional standpoint (since it has lots of columns,
-generally).
+Returns the current alpha value.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the tree requires reading across rows
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> an integer between 0 and 65535.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_default_icon_list">
@@ -3071,6 +2725,33 @@ uneditable text).
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_int_with_default">
+<description>
+Returns the value of @key, interpreted as
+an integer, or the default value.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="def">
+<parameter_description> the default value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the integer value of @key
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_starts_word">
<description>
Determines whether @iter begins a natural-language word. Word
@@ -3090,6 +2771,23 @@ algorithms).
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_support_multidevice">
+<description>
+Returns %TRUE if @widget is multiple pointer aware. See
+gtk_widget_set_support_multidevice() for more information.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE is @widget is multidevice aware.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_sizing">
<description>
Sets the growth behavior of @tree_column to @type.
@@ -3138,87 +2836,72 @@ signal and destroy it yourself.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_filename">
+<function name="gtk_vruler_new">
<description>
-Gets the filename for the icon. If the
-%GTK_ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN flag was passed
-to gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon(), there may be
-no filename if a builtin icon is returned; in this
-case, you should use gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf().
+Creates a new vertical ruler
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the filename for the icon, or %NULL
-if gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf() should
-be used instead. The return value is owned by
-GTK+ and should not be modified or freed.
-
+<return> a new #GtkVRuler.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_entry_add">
+<function name="gtk_widget_mnemonic_activate">
<description>
-Adds a binding entry.
+Emits the #GtkWidget::mnemonic-activate signal.
+
+The default handler for this signal activates the @widget if
+ group_cycling is %FALSE, and just grabs the focus if @group_cycling
+is %TRUE.
-Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_binding_entry_add_signal() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> #a GtkBindingSet to clear an entry of
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> key value of binding to clear
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to clear
+<parameter name="group_cycling">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if there are other widgets with the same mnemonic
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the signal has been handled
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_get_hard_margins">
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_parse">
<description>
-Obtains the hardware printer margins of the #GtkPrintContext, in units.
+Parses a string representing an accelerator. The
+format looks like "<Control>a" or "<Shift><Alt>F1" or
+"<Release>z" (the last one is for key release).
+The parser is fairly liberal and allows lower or upper case,
+and also abbreviations such as "<Ctl>" and "<Ctrl>".
+Key names are parsed using gdk_keyval_from_name(). For character keys the
+name is not the symbol, but the lowercase name, e.g. one would use
+"<Ctrl>minus" instead of "<Ctrl>-".
-Since: 2.20
+If the parse fails, @accelerator_key and @accelerator_mods will
+be set to 0 (zero).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="top">
-<parameter_description> top hardware printer margin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bottom">
-<parameter_description> bottom hardware printer margin
+<parameter name="accelerator">
+<parameter_description> string representing an accelerator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="left">
-<parameter_description> left hardware printer margin
+<parameter name="accelerator_key">
+<parameter_description> return location for accelerator keyval
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="right">
-<parameter_description> right hardware printer margin
+<parameter name="accelerator_mods">
+<parameter_description> return location for accelerator modifier mask
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the hard margins were retrieved
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_set_has_tooltip">
@@ -3242,33 +2925,6 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tooltips_set_tip">
-<description>
-Adds a tooltip containing the message @tip_text to the specified #GtkWidget.
-Deprecated: 2.12:
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tooltips">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltips.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget you wish to associate the tip with.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tip_text">
-<parameter_description> a string containing the tip itself.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tip_private">
-<parameter_description> a string of any further information that may be useful if the user gets stuck.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_label">
<description>
Sets @text on the @menu_item label
@@ -3352,21 +3008,22 @@ g_intern_static_string().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_mount_operation_set_parent">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_set_screen">
<description>
-Sets the transient parent for windows shown by the
-#GtkMountOperation.
+Sets the screen for an icon theme; the screen is used
+to track the user's currently configured icon theme,
+which might be different for different screens.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> transient parent of the window, or %NULL
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -3483,6 +3140,24 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_hadjustment">
+<description>
+Gets the horizontal adjustment of the tool palette.
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the horizontal adjustment of @palette
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_state">
<description>
Sets the widget state this icon source is intended to be used
@@ -3597,24 +3272,27 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_accepts_tab">
+<function name="gtk_window_unmaximize">
<description>
-Returns whether pressing the Tab key inserts a tab characters.
-gtk_text_view_set_accepts_tab().
+Asks to unmaximize @window. Note that you shouldn't assume the
+window is definitely unmaximized afterward, because other entities
+(e.g. the user or <link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window
+manager</link>) could maximize it again, and not all window
+managers honor requests to unmaximize. But normally the window will
+end up unmaximized. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
+
+You can track maximization via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if pressing the Tab key inserts a tab character,
-%FALSE if pressing the Tab key moves the keyboard focus.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_select_iter">
@@ -3635,32 +3313,20 @@ Selects the specified iterator.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_set_size">
+<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_fraction">
<description>
-Changes the dimensions of a @size to @width x @height.
+Returns the current fraction of the task that's been completed.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a custom #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the new width in units of @unit
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the new height in units of @unit
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for @width and @height
+<parameter name="pbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_end_iter">
@@ -3709,25 +3375,20 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_enable_tree_lines">
+<function name="gtk_vscrollbar_new">
<description>
-Sets whether to draw lines interconnecting the expanders in @tree_view.
-This does not have any visible effects for lists.
+Creates a new vertical scrollbar.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="enabled">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable tree line drawing, %FALSE otherwise.
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment to use, or %NULL to create a new adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new #GtkVScrollbar
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_invisible_new_for_screen">
@@ -3770,23 +3431,37 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_has_window">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_bin_window_to_widget_coords">
<description>
-Determines whether @widget has a #GdkWindow of its own. See
-gtk_widget_set_has_window().
+Converts bin_window coordinates (see gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window())
+to widget relative coordinates.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bx">
+<parameter_description> bin_window X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="by">
+<parameter_description> bin_window Y coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wx">
+<parameter_description> return location for widget X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wy">
+<parameter_description> return location for widget Y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @widget has a window, %FALSE otherwise
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_format">
@@ -3807,32 +3482,6 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_set_inconsistent">
-<description>
-If the user has selected a range of elements (such as some text or
-spreadsheet cells) that are affected by a boolean setting, and the
-current values in that range are inconsistent, you may want to
-display the check in an "in between" state. This function turns on
-"in between" display. Normally you would turn off the inconsistent
-state again if the user explicitly selects a setting. This has to be
-done manually, gtk_check_menu_item_set_inconsistent() only affects
-visual appearance, it doesn't affect the semantics of the widget.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="check_menu_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCheckMenuItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to display an "inconsistent" third state check
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_adjustment_configure">
<description>
Sets all properties of the adjustment at once.
@@ -3907,38 +3556,20 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_add_with_viewport">
+<function name="gtk_icon_set_ref">
<description>
-Used to add children without native scrolling capabilities. This
-is simply a convenience function; it is equivalent to adding the
-unscrollable child to a viewport, then adding the viewport to the
-scrolled window. If a child has native scrolling, use
-gtk_container_add() instead of this function.
-
-The viewport scrolls the child by moving its #GdkWindow, and takes
-the size of the child to be the size of its toplevel #GdkWindow.
-This will be very wrong for most widgets that support native scrolling;
-for example, if you add a widget such as #GtkTreeView with a viewport,
-the whole widget will scroll, including the column headings. Thus,
-widgets with native scrolling support should not be used with the
-#GtkViewport proxy.
+Increments the reference count on @icon_set.
-A widget supports scrolling natively if the
-set_scroll_adjustments_signal field in #GtkWidgetClass is non-zero,
-i.e. has been filled in with a valid signal identifier.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the widget you want to scroll
+<parameter name="icon_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> @icon_set.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_drop_item">
@@ -4038,24 +3669,36 @@ indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_text">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_validate_yrange">
<description>
-Retrieves the text displayed superimposed on the progress bar,
-if any, otherwise %NULL. The return value is a reference
-to the text, not a copy of it, so will become invalid
-if you change the text in the progress bar.
-
+Ensure that a region of a #GtkTextLayout is valid. The ::changed
+signal will be emitted if any lines are validated.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="anchor">
+<parameter_description> iter pointing into a line that will be used as the
+coordinate origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y0_">
+<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
+which to begin validation. (The offset here is in pixels
+after validation.)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y1_">
+<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
+which to end validation. (The offset here is in pixels
+after validation.)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> text, or %NULL; this string is owned by the widget
-and should not be modified or freed.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_line_offset">
@@ -4101,6 +3744,24 @@ or %NULL
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_freeze_child_notify">
+<description>
+Stops emission of #GtkWidget::child-notify signals on @widget. The
+signals are queued until gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify() is called
+on @widget.
+
+This is the analogue of g_object_freeze_notify() for child properties.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_group_remove_action">
<description>
Removes an action object from the action group.
@@ -4121,35 +3782,112 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_reset_shapes">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_wrap_license">
<description>
-Recursively resets the shape on this widget and its descendants.
+Sets whether the license text in @about is
+automatically wrapped.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wrap_license">
+<parameter_description> whether to wrap the license
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_wrap_license">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_default_size">
<description>
-Sets whether the license text in @about is
-automatically wrapped.
+Sets the default size of a window. If the window's "natural" size
+(its size request) is larger than the default, the default will be
+ignored. More generally, if the default size does not obey the
+geometry hints for the window (gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can
+be used to set these explicitly), the default size will be clamped
+to the nearest permitted size.
-Since: 2.8
+Unlike gtk_widget_set_size_request(), which sets a size request for
+a widget and thus would keep users from shrinking the window, this
+function only sets the initial size, just as if the user had
+resized the window themselves. Users can still shrink the window
+again as they normally would. Setting a default size of -1 means to
+use the "natural" default size (the size request of the window).
+
+For more control over a window's initial size and how resizing works,
+investigate gtk_window_set_geometry_hints().
+
+For some uses, gtk_window_resize() is a more appropriate function.
+gtk_window_resize() changes the current size of the window, rather
+than the size to be used on initial display. gtk_window_resize() always
+affects the window itself, not the geometry widget.
+
+The default size of a window only affects the first time a window is
+shown; if a window is hidden and re-shown, it will remember the size
+it had prior to hiding, rather than using the default size.
+
+Windows can't actually be 0x0 in size, they must be at least 1x1, but
+passing 0 for @width and @height is OK, resulting in a 1x1 default size.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wrap_license">
-<parameter_description> whether to wrap the license
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width in pixels, or -1 to unset the default width
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> height in pixels, or -1 to unset the default height
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions_full">
+<description>
+This variant of gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions() adds a
+#GDestroyNotify callback for @user_data.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> an array of radio action descriptions
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_entries">
+<parameter_description> the number of entries
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the value of the action to activate initially, or -1 if
+no action should be activated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="on_change">
+<parameter_description> the callback to connect to the changed signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to the action callbacks
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> destroy notification callback for @user_data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -4209,43 +3947,58 @@ widget has not been set then %NULL is returned.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_is_embedded">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_custom">
<description>
-Returns whether the status icon is embedded in a notification
-area.
+Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object with the
+given parameters.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> the paper name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="display_name">
+<parameter_description> the human-readable name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the paper width, in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the paper height, in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for @width and @height
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the status icon is embedded in
-a notification area.
+<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object, use gtk_paper_size_free()
+to free it
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_stock">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_is_embedded">
<description>
-Creates a status icon displaying a stock icon. Sample stock icon
-names are #GTK_STOCK_OPEN, #GTK_STOCK_QUIT. You can register your
-own stock icon names, see gtk_icon_factory_add_default() and
-gtk_icon_factory_add().
+Returns whether the status icon is embedded in a notification
+area.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> a stock icon id
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+<return> %TRUE if the status icon is embedded in
+a notification area.
</return>
</function>
@@ -4323,6 +4076,63 @@ Sets whether the entry has a beveled frame around it.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_dialog_run">
+<description>
+Blocks in a recursive main loop until the @dialog either emits the
+#GtkDialog::response signal, or is destroyed. If the dialog is
+destroyed during the call to gtk_dialog_run(), gtk_dialog_run() returns
+#GTK_RESPONSE_NONE. Otherwise, it returns the response ID from the
+::response signal emission.
+
+Before entering the recursive main loop, gtk_dialog_run() calls
+gtk_widget_show() on the dialog for you. Note that you still
+need to show any children of the dialog yourself.
+
+During gtk_dialog_run(), the default behavior of #GtkWidget::delete-event
+is disabled; if the dialog receives ::delete_event, it will not be
+destroyed as windows usually are, and gtk_dialog_run() will return
+#GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT. Also, during gtk_dialog_run() the dialog
+will be modal. You can force gtk_dialog_run() to return at any time by
+calling gtk_dialog_response() to emit the ::response signal. Destroying
+the dialog during gtk_dialog_run() is a very bad idea, because your
+post-run code won't know whether the dialog was destroyed or not.
+
+After gtk_dialog_run() returns, you are responsible for hiding or
+destroying the dialog if you wish to do so.
+
+Typical usage of this function might be:
+|[
+gint result = gtk_dialog_run (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
+switch (result)
+{
+case GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT:
+do_application_specific_something ();
+break;
+default:
+do_nothing_since_dialog_was_cancelled ();
+break;
+}
+gtk_widget_destroy (dialog);
+]|
+
+Note that even though the recursive main loop gives the effect of a
+modal dialog (it prevents the user from interacting with other
+windows in the same window group while the dialog is run), callbacks
+such as timeouts, IO channel watches, DND drops, etc, <emphasis>will</emphasis>
+be triggered during a gtk_dialog_run() call.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> response ID
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_refilter">
<description>
Emits ::row_changed for each row in the child model, which causes
@@ -4340,22 +4150,49 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_resolution">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_adjustment">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Replaces the #GtkAdjustment associated with @spin_button.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment to replace the existing adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the resolution in dpi
+<return></return>
+</function>
-</return>
+<function name="gtk_container_forall">
+<description>
+Invokes @callback on each child of @container, including children
+that are considered "internal" (implementation details of the
+container). "Internal" children generally weren't added by the user
+of the container, but were added by the container implementation
+itself. Most applications should use gtk_container_foreach(),
+rather than gtk_container_forall().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> a callback
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback_data">
+<parameter_description> callback user data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_slice">
@@ -4419,6 +4256,26 @@ in #GtkEntry, or 0 if there is no maximum.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_set_visible_horizontal">
+<description>
+Sets whether @action is visible when horizontal
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="visible_horizontal">
+<parameter_description> whether the action is visible horizontally
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_set_text_column">
<description>
Sets the model column which @entry_box should use to get strings from
@@ -4440,24 +4297,28 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_top_margin">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_drop_item">
<description>
-Gets the default top margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
+Gets the tool item at position (x, y).
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default top margin
+<return> the #GtkToolItem at position (x, y)
</return>
</function>
@@ -4547,51 +4408,53 @@ copy the array.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_title">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_palette">
<description>
-Sets the menu's title in tearoff mode.
+Shows and hides the palette based upon the value of @has_palette.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> a title for the menu in tearoff mode
+<parameter name="has_palette">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if palette is to be visible, %FALSE otherwise.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_widget_new_with_backend">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_role">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkFileChooserWidget with a specified backend. This is
-especially useful if you use gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only() to allow
-non-local files. This is a file chooser widget that can be embedded in
-custom windows and it is the same widget that is used by
-#GtkFileChooserDialog.
+This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
+
+In combination with the window title, the window role allows a
+<link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> to identify "the
+same" window when an application is restarted. So for example you
+might set the "toolbox" role on your app's toolbox window, so that
+when the user restarts their session, the window manager can put
+the toolbox back in the same place.
+
+If a window already has a unique title, you don't need to set the
+role, since the WM can use the title to identify the window when
+restoring the session.
-Since: 2.4
-Deprecated: 2.14: Use gtk_file_chooser_widget_new() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> Open or save mode for the widget
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="backend">
-<parameter_description> The name of the specific filesystem backend to use.
+<parameter name="role">
+<parameter_description> unique identifier for the window to be used when restoring a session
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkFileChooserWidget
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_output_bin">
@@ -4612,43 +4475,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_focus">
-<description>
-Draws a focus indicator around the given rectangle on @window using the
-given style.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_focus() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_settings_get_for_screen">
<description>
Gets the #GtkSettings object for @screen, creating it if necessary.
@@ -4689,91 +4515,48 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_attributes">
<description>
-Sets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
-for the scrolled window.
-
-The default is %GTK_CORNER_TOP_LEFT, meaning the child is
-in the top left, with the scrollbars underneath and to the right.
-Other values in #GtkCornerType are %GTK_CORNER_TOP_RIGHT,
-%GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT, and %GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT.
+Sets a #PangoAttrList; the attributes in the list are applied to the
+label text.
-See also gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement() and
-gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement().
+<note><para>The attributes set with this function will be applied
+and merged with any other attributes previously effected by way
+of the #GtkLabel:use-underline or #GtkLabel:use-markup properties.
+While it is not recommended to mix markup strings with manually set
+attributes, if you must; know that the attributes will be applied
+to the label after the markup string is parsed.</para></note>
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="window_placement">
-<parameter_description> position of the child window
+<parameter name="attrs">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoAttrList
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_slider">
+<function name="gtk_get_event_widget">
<description>
-Draws a slider in the given rectangle on @window using the
-given style and orientation.
+If @event is %NULL or the event was not associated with any widget,
+returns %NULL, otherwise returns the widget that received the event
+originally.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> a shadow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the orientation to be used
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the widget that originally received @event, or %NULL
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_rc_get_default_files">
@@ -4793,9 +4576,9 @@ If you want to store this information, you should make a copy.
<function name="gtk_box_new">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkHBox.
+Creates a new #GtkBox.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4812,36 +4595,42 @@ Since: 2.16
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkHBox.
+<return> a new #GtkBox.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_child_set_valist">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_load_key_file">
<description>
-Sets one or more child properties for @child and @container.
+Reads the print settings from the group @group_name in @key_file. If the
+file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
+#GKeyFileError.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the settings from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_property_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the first property to set
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the group to use, or %NULL to use the default
+"Print Settings"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="var_args">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated list of property names and values, starting
-with @first_prop_name
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE on success
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_pos">
@@ -4884,6 +4673,30 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_to_key_file">
+<description>
+This function adds the paper size from @size to @key_file.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to save the paper size to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the group to add the settings to in @key_file
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_set_app_paintable">
<description>
Sets whether the application intends to draw on the widget in
@@ -4942,30 +4755,44 @@ See gtk_text_buffer_move_mark() for details.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_set_title">
<description>
-Moves @iter within a line, to a new <emphasis>character</emphasis>
-(not byte) offset. The given character offset must be less than or
-equal to the number of characters in the line; if equal, @iter
-moves to the start of the next line. See
-gtk_text_iter_set_line_index() if you have a byte index rather than
-a character offset.
+Modifies the @title of the browse dialog used by @button.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the button widget to modify.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="char_on_line">
-<parameter_description> a character offset relative to the start of @iter's current line
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the new browse dialog title.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new icon theme object. Icon theme objects are used
+to lookup up an icon by name in a particular icon theme.
+Usually, you'll want to use gtk_icon_theme_get_default()
+or gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen() rather than creating
+a new icon theme object for scratch.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> the newly created #GtkIconTheme object.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_style_get">
<description>
Gets the values of a multiple style properties for @widget_type
@@ -5026,40 +4853,22 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_calendar_thaw">
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_is_showing">
<description>
-Does nothing. Previously defrosted a calendar; all the changes made
-since the last gtk_calendar_freeze() were displayed.
+Returns whether the #GtkMountOperation is currently displaying
+a window.
-Deprecated: 2.8:
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_word_starts">
-<description>
-Calls gtk_text_iter_backward_word_start() up to @count times.
-
+<return> %TRUE if @op is currently displaying a window
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of times to move
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
</return>
</function>
@@ -5086,24 +4895,27 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_get_font">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_items">
<description>
-Gets the #GdkFont to use for the given style. This is
-meant only as a replacement for direct access to @style->font
-and should not be used in new code. New code should
-use @style->font_desc instead.
+Gets the list of recently used resources in form of #GtkRecentInfo objects.
+
+The return value of this function is affected by the "sort-type" and
+"limit" properties of @chooser.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkFont for the style. This font is owned
-by the style; if you want to keep around a copy, you must
-call gdk_font_ref().
+<return> A newly allocated
+list of #GtkRecentInfo objects. You should
+use gtk_recent_info_unref() on every item of the list, and then free
+the list itself using g_list_free().
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -5194,28 +5006,23 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_label">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_ui">
<description>
-Changes the tab label for @child. If %NULL is specified
-for @tab_label, then the page will have the label 'page N'.
+Creates a <link linkend="XML-UI">UI definition</link> of the merged UI.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the page
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description> the tab label widget to use, or %NULL for default tab
-label.
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A newly allocated string containing an XML representation of
+the merged UI.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_get_text_length">
@@ -5390,6 +5197,32 @@ and position to their child widgets.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_prepend">
+<description>
+Prepends a new row to @tree_store. If @parent is non-%NULL, then it will prepend
+the new row before the first child of @parent, otherwise it will prepend a row
+to the top level. @iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row
+will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to
+call gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the prepended row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_toggle_action_set_draw_as_radio">
<description>
Sets whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
@@ -5494,133 +5327,98 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_lines">
-<description>
-Moves @count lines backward, if possible (if @count would move
-past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
-the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
-onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
-moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
-the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
-moves forward by 0 - @count lines.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of lines to move backward
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_ellipsize">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_icon_list">
<description>
-Gets the ellipsization mode of @group.
+Retrieves the list of icons set by gtk_window_set_icon_list().
+The list is copied, but the reference count on each
+member won't be incremented.
-Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #PangoEllipsizeMode of @group
-
+<return> copy of window's icon list
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_load_key_file">
+<function name="gtk_show_about_dialog">
<description>
-Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
- key_file
+This is a convenience function for showing an application's about box.
+The constructed dialog is associated with the parent window and
+reused for future invocations of this function.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
-to use the default name "Page Setup"
+<parameter name="first_property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the first property
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> value of first property, followed by more properties, %NULL-terminated
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_send_expose">
+<function name="gtk_tree_selection_unselect_range">
<description>
-Very rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
-an expose event signals on a widget. This function is not
-normally used directly. The only time it is used is when
-propagating an expose event to a child %NO_WINDOW widget, and
-that is normally done using gtk_container_propagate_expose().
-
-If you want to force an area of a window to be redrawn,
-use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() or gdk_window_invalidate_region().
-To cause the redraw to be done immediately, follow that call
-with a call to gdk_window_process_updates().
+Unselects a range of nodes, determined by @start_path and @end_path
+inclusive.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a expose #GdkEvent
+<parameter name="start_path">
+<parameter_description> The initial node of the range.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end_path">
+<parameter_description> The initial node of the range.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> return from the event signal emission (%TRUE if
-the event was handled)
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_set_image">
+<function name="gtk_rc_parse_color">
<description>
-Set the image of @button to the given widget. Note that
-it depends on the #GtkSettings:gtk-button-images setting whether the
-image will be displayed or not, you don't have to call
-gtk_widget_show() on @image yourself.
+Parses a color in the <link linkend="color=format">format</link> expected
+in a RC file.
+
+Note that theme engines should use gtk_rc_parse_color_full() in
+order to support symbolic colors.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+<parameter name="scanner">
+<parameter_description> a #GScanner
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a widget to set as the image for the button
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GdkColor structure in which to store the result
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %G_TOKEN_NONE if parsing succeeded, otherwise the token
+that was expected but not found
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_grid_lines">
@@ -5681,21 +5479,25 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_handle_position">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_embed_page_setup">
<description>
-Gets the handle position of the handle box. See
-gtk_handle_box_set_handle_position().
+Embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.
+Selected page setup is stored as default page setup in #GtkPrintOperation.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="handle_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="embed">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to embed page setup selection in the #GtkPrintDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current handle position.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_store_insert_after">
@@ -5874,36 +5676,23 @@ GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF);</literal> will create a new #GtkTreeStore with three col
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ruler_get_range">
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_get_owner">
<description>
-Retrieves values indicating the range and current position of a #GtkRuler.
-See gtk_ruler_set_range().
+If the clipboard contents callbacks were set with
+gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner(), and the gtk_clipboard_set_with_data() or
+gtk_clipboard_clear() has not subsequently called, returns the owner set
+by gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ruler">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRuler
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="lower">
-<parameter_description> location to store lower limit of the ruler, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="upper">
-<parameter_description> location to store upper limit of the ruler, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> location to store the current position of the mark on the ruler, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max_size">
-<parameter_description> location to store the maximum size of the ruler used when calculating
-the space to leave for the text, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the owner of the clipboard, if any; otherwise %NULL.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_begin_move_drag">
@@ -6161,41 +5950,75 @@ warning message, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_unset_style">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_spacing">
<description>
-Unsets a toolbar style set with gtk_tool_palette_set_style(),
-so that user preferences will be used to determine the toolbar style.
+Returns the value of the ::spacing property.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the space between cells
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_is_important">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_load_file">
<description>
-Checks whether @action is important or not
+Reads the page setup from the file @file_name.
+See gtk_page_setup_to_file().
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="file_name">
+<parameter_description> the filename to read the page setup from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @action is important
+<return> %TRUE on success
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_alignment">
+<description>
+Sets the renderer's alignment within its available space.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> the x alignment of the cell renderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> the y alignment of the cell renderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_screen">
<description>
Returns the #GdkScreen associated with @status_icon.
@@ -6214,33 +6037,72 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_new_from_key_file">
+<function name="gtk_paint_box_gap">
<description>
-Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
- key_file Returns a new #GtkPageSetup object with the restored
-page setup, or %NULL if an error occurred.
-
-Since: 2.12
+Draws a box in @window using the given style and state and shadow type,
+leaving a gap in one side.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
-to use the default name "Page Setup"
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gap_side">
+<parameter_description> side in which to leave the gap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gap_x">
+<parameter_description> starting position of the gap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gap_width">
+<parameter_description> width of the gap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the restored #GtkPageSetup
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_drag_dest_add_text_targets">
@@ -6311,21 +6173,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_unset_style">
-<description>
-Unsets a toolbar style set with gtk_toolbar_set_style(), so that
-user preferences will be used to determine the toolbar style.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_model">
<description>
Sets the model for a #GtkIconView.
@@ -6368,6 +6215,51 @@ the @assistant, if the @assistant has no pages, -1 will be returned
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_send_focus_change">
+<description>
+Sends the focus change @event to @widget
+
+This function is not meant to be used by applications. The only time it
+should be used is when it is necessary for a #GtkWidget to assign focus
+to a widget that is semantically owned by the first widget even though
+it's not a direct child - for instance, a search entry in a floating
+window similar to the quick search in #GtkTreeView.
+
+An example of its usage is:
+
+|[
+GdkEvent *fevent = gdk_event_new (GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE);
+
+fevent->focus_change.type = GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE;
+fevent->focus_change.in = TRUE;
+fevent->focus_change.window = gtk_widget_get_window (widget);
+if (fevent->focus_change.window != NULL)
+g_object_ref (fevent->focus_change.window);
+
+gtk_widget_send_focus_change (widget, fevent);
+
+gdk_event_free (event);
+]|
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent of type GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the return value from the event signal emission: %TRUE
+if the event was handled, and %FALSE otherwise
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_combo_box_append_text">
<description>
Appends @string to the list of strings stored in @combo_box. Note that
@@ -6411,32 +6303,51 @@ free the list itself using g_list_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_text">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_radio">
<description>
-Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format
-(with printf()-style).
-
-Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
-bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
+Returns whether we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="message_dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
+<parameter name="toggle">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="message_format">
-<parameter_description> printf()-style format string, or %NULL
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_style_attach">
+<description>
+Attaches a style to a window; this process allocates the
+colors and creates the GC's for the style - it specializes
+it to a particular visual and colormap. The process may
+involve the creation of a new style if the style has already
+been attached to a window with a different style and colormap.
+
+Since this function may return a new object, you have to use it
+in the following way:
+<literal>style = gtk_style_attach (style, window)</literal>
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> Either @style, or a newly-created #GtkStyle.
+If the style is newly created, the style parameter
+will be unref'ed, and the new style will have
+a reference count belonging to the caller.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_new">
@@ -6462,6 +6373,26 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_printer_is_paused">
+<description>
+Returns whether the printer is currently paused.
+A paused printer still accepts jobs, but it is not
+printing them.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @printer is paused
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_test_text_set">
<description>
Set the text string of @widget to @string if it is a GtkLabel,
@@ -6483,28 +6414,35 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_focus_on_click">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_insert_page">
<description>
-Sets whether the combo box will grab focus when it is clicked with
-the mouse. Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places
-like toolbars where you don't want the keyboard focus removed from
-the main area of the application.
+Insert a page into @notebook at the given position.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="focus_on_click">
-<parameter_description> whether the combo box grabs focus when clicked
-with the mouse
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tab_label">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
+or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the index (starting at 0) at which to insert the page,
+or -1 to append the page after all other pages.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the index (starting from 0) of the inserted
+page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_style_get_property">
@@ -6592,6 +6530,24 @@ clipboard could not be converted into text form.)
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_overwrite_mode">
+<description>
+Sets overwrite mode
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="overwrite">
+<parameter_description> overwrite mode
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_operation_preview_render_page">
<description>
Renders a page to the preview, using the print context that
@@ -6718,74 +6674,36 @@ gtk_binding_entry_add_signal() on @binding_set.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_stick">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_drag_target_group">
<description>
-Asks to stick @window, which means that it will appear on all user
-desktops. Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely
-stuck afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could unstick it
-again, and some window managers do not support sticking
-windows. But normally the window will end up stuck. Just don't
-write code that crashes if not.
-
-It's permitted to call this function before showing a window.
-
-You can track stickiness via the "window-state-event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
+Get the target entry for a dragged #GtkToolItemGroup.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the #GtkTargetEntry for a dragged group
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_view_set_model">
+<function name="gtk_viewport_get_view_window">
<description>
-Sets the model for @cell_view. If @cell_view already has a model
-set, it will remove it before setting the new model. If @model is
-%NULL, then it will unset the old model.
+Gets the view window of the #GtkViewport.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModel
+<parameter name="viewport">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkViewport
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_menu_label">
-<description>
-Changes the menu label for the page containing @child.
+<return> a #GdkWindow
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the child widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="menu_label">
-<parameter_description> the menu label, or NULL for default
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset">
@@ -6827,40 +6745,77 @@ format's mime-type.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_remove_filter">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_proxies">
<description>
-Removes @filter from the list of #GtkRecentFilter objects held by @chooser.
+Returns the proxy widgets for an action.
+See also gtk_activatable_get_related_action().
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GSList of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+
+and must not be modified.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_size_request_get_size">
+<description>
+Retrieves the minimum and natural size of a widget taking
+into account the widget's preference for height-for-width management.
+
+This is used to retrieve a suitable size by container widgets which do
+not impose any restrictions on the child placement.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeRequest instance
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="minimum_size">
+<parameter_description> location for storing the minimum size, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="natural_size">
+<parameter_description> location for storing the natural size, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_set_short_label">
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_policy">
<description>
-Sets a shorter label text on @action.
+Sets the scrollbar policy for the horizontal and vertical scrollbars.
-Since: 2.16
+The policy determines when the scrollbar should appear; it is a value
+from the #GtkPolicyType enumeration. If %GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS, the
+scrollbar is always present; if %GTK_POLICY_NEVER, the scrollbar is
+never present; if %GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC, the scrollbar is present only
+if needed (that is, if the slider part of the bar would be smaller
+than the trough - the display is larger than the page size).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="short_label">
-<parameter_description> the label text to set
+<parameter name="hscrollbar_policy">
+<parameter_description> policy for horizontal bar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="vscrollbar_policy">
+<parameter_description> policy for vertical bar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -6910,6 +6865,31 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_filename">
+<description>
+Gets the filename for the icon. If the
+%GTK_ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN flag was passed
+to gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon(), there may be
+no filename if a builtin icon is returned; in this
+case, you should use gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the filename for the icon, or %NULL
+if gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf() should
+be used instead. The return value is owned by
+GTK+ and should not be modified or freed.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_class_find_style_property">
<description>
Finds a style property of a widget class by name.
@@ -6958,23 +6938,23 @@ or %NULL.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_track_visited_links">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_popup">
<description>
-Returns whether the label is currently keeping track
-of clicked links.
+Pops up the menu or dropdown list of @combo_box.
-Since: 2.18
+This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
+applications should have little use for it.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if clicked links are remembered
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_mark_get_deleted">
@@ -6995,28 +6975,6 @@ for a way to add it to a buffer again.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_editing_canceled">
-<description>
-Causes the cell renderer to emit the #GtkCellRenderer::editing-canceled
-signal.
-
-This function is for use only by implementations of cell renderers that
-need to notify the client program that an editing process was canceled
-and the changes were not committed.
-
-Since: 2.4
-Deprecated: 2.6: Use gtk_cell_renderer_stop_editing() instead
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_label_get_line_wrap">
<description>
Returns whether lines in the label are automatically wrapped.
@@ -7034,51 +6992,6 @@ See gtk_label_set_line_wrap().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_prepend_item">
-<description>
-Adds a new button to the beginning (top or left edges) of the given toolbar.
-
- callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> give your toolbar button a label.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> a string that appears when the user holds the mouse over this item.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> use with #GtkTipsQuery.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> the function to be executed when the button is pressed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to any data you wish to be passed to the callback.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new toolbar item as a #GtkWidget.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_statusbar_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkStatusbar ready for messages.
@@ -7091,61 +7004,23 @@ Creates a new #GtkStatusbar ready for messages.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_expander">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_website_label">
<description>
-Draws an expander as used in #GtkTreeView. @x and @y specify the
-center the expander. The size of the expander is determined by the
-"expander-size" style property of @widget. (If widget is not
-specified or doesn't have an "expander-size" property, an
-unspecified default size will be used, since the caller doesn't
-have sufficient information to position the expander, this is
-likely not useful.) The expander is expander_size pixels tall
-in the collapsed position and expander_size pixels wide in the
-expanded position.
+Returns the label used for the website link.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x position to draw the expander at
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y position to draw the expander at
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expander_style">
-<parameter_description> the style to draw the expander in; determines
-whether the expander is collapsed, expanded, or in an
-intermediate state.
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The label used for the website link. The string is
+owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_buffer_to_window_coords">
@@ -7175,17 +7050,40 @@ gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()).
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="window_x">
-<parameter_description> window x coordinate return location
+<parameter_description> window x coordinate return location or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="window_y">
-<parameter_description> window y coordinate return location
+<parameter_description> window y coordinate return location or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_height">
+<description>
+Gets the paper height of the #GtkPaperSize, in
+units of @unit.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the paper height
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_set_title">
<description>
Sets the title of the #GtkWindow. The title of a window will be
@@ -7337,39 +7235,6 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_show_hidden">
-<description>
-Gets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
-See gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden().
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if hidden files and folders are displayed.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_layout_thaw">
-<description>
-This is a deprecated function, it doesn't do anything useful.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_clear_cache">
<description>
This function should almost never be called. It clears the @tree_model_sort
@@ -7463,30 +7328,6 @@ to remove any existing name.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_socket_steal">
-<description>
-Reparents a pre-existing toplevel window into a #GtkSocket. This is
-meant to embed clients that do not know about embedding into a
-#GtkSocket, however doing so is inherently unreliable, and using
-this function is not recommended.
-
-The #GtkSocket must have already be added into a toplevel window
-before you can make this call.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="socket_">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSocket
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wid">
-<parameter_description> the window ID of an existing toplevel window.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_allow_async">
<description>
Sets whether the gtk_print_operation_run() may return
@@ -7528,24 +7369,48 @@ and a suitable target for text is included, otherwise %FALSE.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_get_title">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_vertical">
<description>
-Gets the title of the color selection dialog.
+Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> An internal string, do not free the return value
+<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_chain">
+<description>
+Sets a focus chain, overriding the one computed automatically by GTK+.
+
+In principle each widget in the chain should be a descendant of the
+container, but this is not enforced by this method, since it's allowed
+to set the focus chain before you pack the widgets, or have a widget
+in the chain that isn't always packed. The necessary checks are done
+when the focus chain is actually traversed.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="focusable_widgets">
+<parameter_description> the new focus chain
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_homogeneous">
<description>
Sets whether @tool_item is to be allocated the same size as other
@@ -7603,69 +7468,29 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_border">
-<description>
-Sets the width the border around the tab labels
-in a notebook. This is equivalent to calling
-gtk_notebook_set_tab_hborder (@notebook, @border_width) followed
-by gtk_notebook_set_tab_vborder (@notebook, @border_width).
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="border_width">
-<parameter_description> width of the border around the tab labels.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_new_from_stock">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkToolButton containing the image and text from a
-stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
-and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-
-It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkToolButton
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_link_button_new_with_label">
+<function name="gtk_toggle_button_set_mode">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkLinkButton containing a label.
+Sets whether the button is displayed as a separate indicator and label.
+You can call this function on a checkbutton or a radiobutton with
+ draw_indicator = %FALSE to make the button look like a normal button
-Since: 2.10
+This function only affects instances of classes like #GtkCheckButton
+and #GtkRadioButton that derive from #GtkToggleButton,
+not instances of #GtkToggleButton itself.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> a valid URI
+<parameter name="toggle_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToggleButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the text of the button
+<parameter name="draw_indicator">
+<parameter_description> if %TRUE, draw the button as a separate indicator
+and label; if %FALSE, draw the button like a normal button
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new link button widget.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_modify_base">
@@ -7743,37 +7568,6 @@ if no transient parent has been set.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_has_frame">
-<description>
-(Note: this is a special-purpose function for the framebuffer port,
-that causes GTK+ to draw its own window border. For most applications,
-you want gtk_window_set_decorated() instead, which tells the window
-manager whether to draw the window border.)
-
-If this function is called on a window with setting of %TRUE, before
-it is realized or showed, it will have a "frame" window around
- window->window, accessible in @window->frame. Using the signal
-frame_event you can receive all events targeted at the frame.
-
-This function is used by the linux-fb port to implement managed
-windows, but it could conceivably be used by X-programs that
-want to do their own window decorations.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> a boolean
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords">
<description>
Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the bin_window
@@ -7807,6 +7601,49 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_radio_button_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkRadioButton. To be of any practical value, a widget should
+then be packed into the radio button.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> an existing radio button group, or %NULL if you are creating a new group.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new radio button.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_printer_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkPrinter.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the printer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="backend">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintBackend
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="virtual_">
+<parameter_description> whether the printer is virtual
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkPrinter
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_group_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkWindowGroup object. Grabs added with
@@ -7843,6 +7680,33 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_markup">
+<description>
+Sets @markup as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
+the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
+
+This function will take care of setting #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip to %TRUE
+and of the default handler for the #GtkStatusIcon::query-tooltip signal.
+
+See also the #GtkStatusIcon:tooltip-markup property and
+gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="markup">
+<parameter_description> the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_new_with_attributes">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn with a number of default values. This is
@@ -7965,6 +7829,22 @@ and toggle focus between the colliding widgets otherwise.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_size_group_new">
+<description>
+Create a new #GtkSizeGroup.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="mode">
+<parameter_description> the mode for the new size group.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly created #GtkSizeGroup
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_button_get_image">
<description>
Gets the widget that is currenty set as the image of @button.
@@ -8074,39 +7954,23 @@ g_free (markup);
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_icon">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_default_page_setup">
<description>
-Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. This icon is used when
-the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
-managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
-frame, or display it in other contexts.
-
-The icon should be provided in whatever size it was naturally
-drawn; that is, don't scale the image before passing it to
-GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute, when the desired
-final size is known, to allow best quality.
-
-If you have your icon hand-drawn in multiple sizes, use
-gtk_window_set_icon_list(). Then the best size will be used.
-
-This function is equivalent to calling gtk_window_set_icon_list()
-with a 1-element list.
+Returns the default page setup, see
+gtk_print_operation_set_default_page_setup().
-See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
-for all windows in your application in one go.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> icon image, or %NULL
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the default page setup
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_width">
@@ -8214,47 +8078,62 @@ Creates a copy of @source; mostly useful for language bindings.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_item">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_paper_size">
<description>
-Sets the tip area of @tooltip to be the area covered by the item at @path.
-See also gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.
-See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT,
+converted to a #GtkPaperSize.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the paper size
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_default_source">
+<function name="gtk_widget_render_icon">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE.
+A convenience function that uses the theme engine and RC file
+settings for @widget to look up @stock_id and render it to
+a pixbuf. @stock_id should be a stock icon ID such as
+#GTK_STOCK_OPEN or #GTK_STOCK_OK. @size should be a size
+such as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU. @detail should be a string that
+identifies the widget or code doing the rendering, so that
+theme engines can special-case rendering for that widget or code.
+
+The pixels in the returned #GdkPixbuf are shared with the rest of
+the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be freed
+after use with g_object_unref().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> a stock ID
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> (type int) a stock size. A size of (GtkIconSize)-1 means
+render at the size of the source and don't scale (if there are
+multiple source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> render detail to pass to theme engine
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default source
-
+<return> a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the stock ID wasn't known
</return>
</function>
@@ -8343,6 +8222,36 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_from_file">
+<description>
+Sets the icon for @window.
+Warns on failure if @err is %NULL.
+
+This function is equivalent to calling gtk_window_set_icon()
+with a pixbuf created by loading the image from @filename.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> location of icon file
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="err">
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if setting the icon succeeded.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_cursor_visible">
<description>
Sets whether the insertion cursor should be shown. Generally,
@@ -8389,21 +8298,25 @@ or a method on the #GtkTreeModel interface is called.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_title">
+<function name="gtk_scale_new">
<description>
-Retrieves the title of the browse dialog used by @button. The returned value
-should not be modified or freed.
+Creates a new #GtkScale.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> the button widget to examine.
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the scale's orientation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment which sets the range of the scale, or
+%NULL to create a new adjustment.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a pointer to the browse dialog's title.
+<return> a new #GtkScale
</return>
</function>
@@ -8440,22 +8353,34 @@ this widget).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_name">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_reorderable">
<description>
-Gets the name of the #GtkPaperSize.
+This function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder
+models that support the #GtkDragSourceIface and the
+#GtkDragDestIface. Both #GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore support
+these. If @reorderable is %TRUE, then the user can reorder the
+model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to
+these changes by connecting to the model's row_inserted and
+row_deleted signals. The reordering is implemented by setting up
+the tree view as a drag source and destination. Therefore, drag and
+drop can not be used in a reorderable view for any other purpose.
-Since: 2.10
+This function does not give you any degree of control over the order -- any
+reordering is allowed. If more control is needed, you should probably
+handle drag and drop manually.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="reorderable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the tree can be reordered.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the name of @size
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_to_file">
@@ -8506,24 +8431,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_get_storage_type">
-<description>
-Gets the type of representation being used by the #GtkImage
-to store image data. If the #GtkImage has no image data,
-the return value will be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> image representation being used
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_set_scroll_adjustments">
<description>
For widgets that support scrolling, sets the scroll adjustments and
@@ -8552,25 +8459,6 @@ support scrolling.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new_merge_id">
-<description>
-Returns an unused merge id, suitable for use with
-gtk_ui_manager_add_ui().
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an unused merge id.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_unregister_serialize_format">
<description>
This function unregisters a rich text format that was previously
@@ -8611,25 +8499,41 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_position">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_list">
<description>
-Sets the cursor position in an entry to the given value.
+Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. The icon is used when
+the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
+managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
+frame, or display it in other contexts.
+
+gtk_window_set_icon_list() allows you to pass in the same icon in
+several hand-drawn sizes. The list should contain the natural sizes
+your icon is available in; that is, don't scale the image before
+passing it to GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute,
+when the desired final size is known, to allow best quality.
+
+By passing several sizes, you may improve the final image quality
+of the icon, by reducing or eliminating automatic image scaling.
+
+Recommended sizes to provide: 16x16, 32x32, 48x48 at minimum, and
+larger images (64x64, 128x128) if you have them.
+
+See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
+for all windows in your application in one go.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_set_position() instead.
+Note that transient windows (those who have been set transient for another
+window using gtk_window_set_transient_for()) will inherit their
+icon from their transient parent. So there's no need to explicitly
+set the icon on transient windows.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the position of the cursor. The cursor is displayed
-before the character with the given (base 0) index in the widget.
-The value must be less than or equal to the number of characters
-in the widget. A value of -1 indicates that the position should
-be set after the last character in the entry. Note that this
-position is in characters, not in bytes.
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> list of #GdkPixbuf
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -8673,51 +8577,20 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_query">
-<description>
-Queries an accelerator group for all entries matching @accel_key and
- accel_mods
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator group to query
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> location to return the number of entries found, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an array of @n_entries #GtkAccelGroupEntry elements, or %NULL. The array is owned by GTK+ and must not be freed.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_orientation">
+<function name="gtk_scale_get_draw_value">
<description>
-Gets the orientation of the #GtkScaleButton's popup window.
-
-Since: 2.14
+Returns whether the current value is displayed as a string
+next to the slider.
-Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_orientable_get_orientation() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkScaleButton's orientation.
-
+<return> whether the current value is displayed as a string
</return>
</function>
@@ -8802,106 +8675,95 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_editable_delete_text">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_active_iter">
<description>
-Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
-those characters at positions from @start_pos up to, but not including
- end_pos If @end_pos is negative, then the the characters deleted
-are those from @start_pos to the end of the text.
+Sets @iter to point to the current active item, if it exists.
-Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_pos">
-<parameter_description> start position
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end_pos">
-<parameter_description> end position
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_layout_clear">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_new_with_model">
<description>
-Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on @cell_layout and
-removes all renderers from @cell_layout.
+Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget with the model initialized to @model.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_layout">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> the model.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_get_bin_window">
+<function name="gtk_accessible_get_widget">
<description>
-Retrieve the bin window of the layout used for drawing operations.
+Gets the #GtkWidget corresponding to the #GtkAccessible. The returned widget
+does not have a reference added, so you do not need to unref it.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+<parameter name="accessible">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccessible
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GdkWindow
+<return> pointer to the #GtkWidget corresponding to
+the #GtkAccessible, or %NULL.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_exists">
+<function name="gtk_cell_layout_clear">
<description>
-Checks whether the resource pointed by @info still exists. At
-the moment this check is done only on resources pointing to local files.
+Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on @cell_layout and
+removes all renderers from @cell_layout.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="cell_layout">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the resource exists
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_drag_item">
+<function name="gtk_layout_get_bin_window">
<description>
-Get the dragged item from the selection.
-This could be a #GtkToolItem or a #GtkToolItemGroup.
+Retrieve the bin window of the layout used for drawing operations.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the dragged item in selection
+<return> a #GdkWindow
</return>
</function>
@@ -8935,51 +8797,6 @@ of source images that match exactly.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_tab">
-<description>
-Draws an option menu tab (i.e. the up and down pointing arrows)
-in the given rectangle on @window using the given parameters.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_tab() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the tab in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the tab in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle to draw the tab in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle to draw the tab in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_info_bar_set_message_type">
<description>
Sets the message type of the message area.
@@ -9002,31 +8819,19 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_action_widget">
+<function name="gtk_widget_ensure_style">
<description>
-Sets @widget as one of the action widgets. Depending on the pack type
-the widget will be placed before or after the tabs. You can use
-a #GtkBox if you need to pack more than one widget on the same side.
-
-Note that action widgets are "internal" children of the notebook and thus
-not included in the list returned from gtk_container_foreach().
-
-Since: 2.20
+Ensures that @widget has a style (@widget->style). Not a very useful
+function; most of the time, if you want the style, the widget is
+realized, and realized widgets are guaranteed to have a style
+already.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pack_type">
-<parameter_description> pack type of the action widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -9103,16 +8908,23 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_vseparator_new">
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_animation">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkVSeparator.
-
+Causes the #GtkImage to display the given animation (or display
+nothing, if you set the animation to %NULL).
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbufAnimation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkVSeparator.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_get_parent_window">
@@ -9153,6 +8965,33 @@ this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_size_request_get_width">
+<description>
+Retrieves a widget's initial minimum and natural width.
+
+<note><para>This call is specific to height-for-width
+requests.</para></note>
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeRequest instance
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="minimum_width">
+<parameter_description> location to store the minimum width, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="natural_width">
+<parameter_description> location to store the natural width, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_move">
<description>
Asks the <link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> to move
@@ -9265,57 +9104,61 @@ anchor is returned (with no new reference count added). Otherwise,
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_unblock_activate_from">
+<function name="gtk_binding_set_new">
<description>
-Re-enables calls to the gtk_action_activate()
-function by signals on the given proxy widget. This undoes the
-blocking done by gtk_action_block_activate_from().
+GTK+ maintains a global list of binding sets. Each binding set has
+a unique name which needs to be specified upon creation.
-This function is intended for use by action implementations.
-Since: 2.4
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="set_name">
+<parameter_description> unique name of this binding set
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> new binding set
+</return>
+</function>
-Deprecated: 2.16: activatables are now responsible for activating the
-action directly so this doesnt apply anymore.
+<function name="gtk_icon_size_register_alias">
+<description>
+Registers @alias as another name for @target.
+So calling gtk_icon_size_from_name() with @alias as argument
+will return @target.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="alias">
+<parameter_description> an alias for @target
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> a proxy widget
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> an existing icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_stop_editing">
+<function name="gtk_offscreen_window_get_pixmap">
<description>
-Informs the cell renderer that the editing is stopped.
-If @canceled is %TRUE, the cell renderer will emit the
-#GtkCellRenderer::editing-canceled signal.
-
-This function should be called by cell renderer implementations
-in response to the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal of
-#GtkCellEditable.
+Retrieves a snapshot of the contained widget in the form of
+a #GdkPixmap. If you need to keep this around over window
+resizes then you should add a reference to it.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="canceled">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the editing has been canceled
+<parameter name="offscreen">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkOffscreenWindow contained widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GdkPixmap pointer to the offscreen pixmap, or %NULL.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_button_new_with_mnemonic">
@@ -9404,44 +9247,6 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new file-selecting button widget.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> the title of the browse dialog.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the open mode for the widget.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new button widget.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_get_size">
-<description>
-Returns the size of the table (number of tags)
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> number of tags in @table
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_color_button_new">
<description>
Creates a new color button. This returns a widget in the form of
@@ -9644,39 +9449,6 @@ Determines whether the color selector has a color palette.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_translator_credits">
-<description>
-Sets the translator credits string which is displayed in
-the translators tab of the secondary credits dialog.
-
-The intended use for this string is to display the translator
-of the language which is currently used in the user interface.
-Using gettext(), a simple way to achieve that is to mark the
-string for translation:
-|[
-gtk_about_dialog_set_translator_credits (about, _("translator-credits"));
-]|
-It is a good idea to use the customary msgid "translator-credits" for this
-purpose, since translators will already know the purpose of that msgid, and
-since #GtkAboutDialog will detect if "translator-credits" is untranslated
-and hide the tab.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="translator_credits">
-<parameter_description> the translator credits
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_rc_get_im_module_path">
<description>
Obtains the path in which to look for IM modules. See the documentation
@@ -9779,6 +9551,53 @@ gtk_spin_button_set_update_policy().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_geometry">
+<description>
+Obtains information about the location of the status icon
+on screen. This information can be used to e.g. position
+popups like notification bubbles.
+
+See gtk_status_icon_position_menu() for a more convenient
+alternative for positioning menus.
+
+Note that some platforms do not allow GTK+ to provide
+this information, and even on platforms that do allow it,
+the information is not reliable unless the status icon
+is embedded in a notification area, see
+gtk_status_icon_is_embedded().
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> return location for the screen, or %NULL if the
+information is not needed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> return location for the area occupied by the status
+icon, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> return location for the orientation of the panel
+in which the status icon is embedded, or %NULL. A panel
+at the top or bottom of the screen is horizontal, a panel
+at the left or right is vertical.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the location information has
+been filled in
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_get_pixel_size">
<description>
Gets the pixel size used for named icons.
@@ -9797,6 +9616,32 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_item">
+<description>
+Sets the tip area of @tooltip to be the area covered by the item at @path.
+See also gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.
+See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_border_window_size">
<description>
Gets the width of the specified border window. See
@@ -9853,20 +9698,20 @@ such as a title bar via gtk_window_set_decorated().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_prepend_text">
+<function name="gtk_widget_modify_font">
<description>
-Prepends the given text to the contents of the widget.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_insert_text() instead.
+Sets the font to use for a widget. All other style values are left
+untouched. See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the text to prepend
+<parameter name="font_desc">
+<parameter_description> the font description to use, or %NULL to undo
+the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_modify_font().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -9899,7 +9744,7 @@ The exact @context_id and @message_id must be specified.
<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_set_arrow_tooltip_text">
<description>
Sets the tooltip text to be used as tooltip for the arrow button which
-pops up the menu. See gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip() for setting a tooltip
+pops up the menu. See gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip_text() for setting a tooltip
on the whole #GtkMenuToolButton.
Since: 2.12
@@ -9974,21 +9819,23 @@ user can't interact with them. Insensitive widgets are known as
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_show_progress">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_increments">
<description>
-If @show_progress is %TRUE, the print operation will show a
-progress dialog during the print operation.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Sets the step and page increments for spin_button. This affects how
+quickly the value changes when the spin button's arrows are activated.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_progress">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to show a progress dialog
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> increment applied for a button 1 press.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> increment applied for a button 2 press.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -10099,7 +9946,7 @@ Since: 2.10
<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_set_arrow_tooltip_markup">
<description>
Sets the tooltip markup text to be used as tooltip for the arrow button
-which pops up the menu. See gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip() for setting a
+which pops up the menu. See gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip_text() for setting a
tooltip on the whole #GtkMenuToolButton.
Since: 2.12
@@ -10238,6 +10085,77 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_filter_set_name">
+<description>
+Sets the human-readable name of the filter; this is the string
+that will be displayed in the recently used resources selector
+user interface if there is a selectable list of filters.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> then human readable name of @filter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_window_set_has_frame">
+<description>
+(Note: this is a special-purpose function for the framebuffer port,
+that causes GTK+ to draw its own window border. For most applications,
+you want gtk_window_set_decorated() instead, which tells the window
+manager whether to draw the window border.)
+
+If this function is called on a window with setting of %TRUE, before
+it is realized or showed, it will have a "frame" window around
+ window->window, accessible in @window->frame. Using the signal
+frame_event you can receive all events targeted at the frame.
+
+This function is used by the linux-fb port to implement managed
+windows, but it could conceivably be used by X-programs that
+want to do their own window decorations.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> a boolean
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_toolbar_reconfigured">
+<description>
+Emits the signal #GtkToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured on @tool_item.
+#GtkToolbar and other #GtkToolShell implementations use this function
+to notify children, when some aspect of their configuration changes.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order">
<description>
Changes the appearance of the sort indicator.
@@ -10449,25 +10367,27 @@ older one.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_artists">
+<function name="gtk_widget_common_ancestor">
<description>
-Sets the strings which are displayed in the artists tab
-of the secondary credits dialog.
+Find the common ancestor of @widget_a and @widget_b that
+is closest to the two widgets.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="widget_a">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="artists">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
+<parameter name="widget_b">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the closest common ancestor of @widget_a and
+ widget_b or %NULL if @widget_a and @widget_b do not
+share a common ancestor.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_page_set">
@@ -10641,64 +10561,6 @@ to any windows anymore, it is unrealized. See gtk_style_attach().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_shadow_gap">
-<description>
-Draws a shadow around the given rectangle in @window
-using the given style and state and shadow type, leaving a
-gap in one side.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_shadow_gap() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_side">
-<parameter_description> side in which to leave the gap
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_x">
-<parameter_description> starting position of the gap
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_width">
-<parameter_description> width of the gap
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_unfullscreen">
<description>
Asks to toggle off the fullscreen state for @window. Note that you
@@ -10724,81 +10586,19 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_size_request">
-<description>
-Gets the size request that was explicitly set for the widget using
-gtk_widget_set_size_request(). A value of -1 stored in @width or
- height indicates that that dimension has not been set explicitly
-and the natural requisition of the widget will be used intead. See
-gtk_widget_set_size_request(). To get the size a widget will
-actually use, call gtk_widget_size_request() instead of
-this function.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> return location for width, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> return location for height, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_index">
-<description>
-Same as gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset(), but works with a
-<emphasis>byte</emphasis> index. The given byte index must be at
-the start of a character, it can't be in the middle of a UTF-8
-encoded character.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="byte_on_line">
-<parameter_description> a byte index relative to the start of @iter's current line
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_lines">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_is_valid">
<description>
-Moves @count visible lines forward, if possible (if @count would move
-past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
-the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
-onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
-moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
-the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
-moves backward by 0 - @count lines.
+Check if there are any invalid regions in a #GtkTextLayout's buffer
-Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of lines to move forward
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
-
+<return> %TRUE if any invalid regions were found
</return>
</function>
@@ -10919,82 +10719,129 @@ returned, but usually you don't need it.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_embed_page_setup">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_level_indentation">
<description>
-Embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.
-Selected page setup is stored as default page setup in #GtkPrintOperation.
+Sets the amount of extra indentation for child levels to use in @tree_view
+in addition to the default indentation. The value should be specified in
+pixels, a value of 0 disables this feature and in this case only the default
+indentation will be used.
+This does not have any visible effects for lists.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="embed">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to embed page setup selection in the #GtkPrintDialog
+<parameter name="indentation">
+<parameter_description> the amount, in pixels, of extra indentation in @tree_view.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_level_indentation">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_unselect_path">
<description>
-Sets the amount of extra indentation for child levels to use in @tree_view
-in addition to the default indentation. The value should be specified in
-pixels, a value of 0 disables this feature and in this case only the default
-indentation will be used.
-This does not have any visible effects for lists.
+Unselects the row at @path.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="indentation">
-<parameter_description> the amount, in pixels, of extra indentation in @tree_view.
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath to be unselected.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_get_row_drag_data">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_line">
<description>
-Obtains a @tree_model and @path from selection data of target type
-%GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW. Normally called from a drag_data_received handler.
-This function can only be used if @selection_data originates from the same
-process that's calling this function, because a pointer to the tree model
-is being passed around. If you aren't in the same process, then you'll
-get memory corruption. In the #GtkTreeDragDest drag_data_received handler,
-you can assume that selection data of type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW is
-in from the current process. The returned path must be freed with
-gtk_tree_path_free().
+Returns %TRUE if @iter points to the start of the paragraph
+delimiter characters for a line (delimiters will be either a
+newline, a carriage return, a carriage return followed by a
+newline, or a Unicode paragraph separator character). Note that an
+iterator pointing to the \n of a \r\n pair will not be counted as
+the end of a line, the line ends before the \r. The end iterator is
+considered to be at the end of a line, even though there are no
+paragraph delimiter chars there.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModel
+</parameters>
+<return> whether @iter is at the end of a line
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_from_accel_closure">
+<description>
+Finds the #GtkAccelGroup to which @closure is connected;
+see gtk_accel_group_connect().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="closure">
+<parameter_description> a #GClosure
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> row in @tree_model
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GtkAccelGroup to which @closure is connected, or %NULL.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_set_add_source">
+<description>
+Icon sets have a list of #GtkIconSource, which they use as base
+icons for rendering icons in different states and sizes. Icons are
+scaled, made to look insensitive, etc. in
+gtk_icon_set_render_icon(), but #GtkIconSet needs base images to
+work with. The base images and when to use them are described by
+a #GtkIconSource.
+
+This function copies @source, so you can reuse the same source immediately
+without affecting the icon set.
+
+An example of when you'd use this function: a web browser's "Back
+to Previous Page" icon might point in a different direction in
+Hebrew and in English; it might look different when insensitive;
+and it might change size depending on toolbar mode (small/large
+icons). So a single icon set would contain all those variants of
+the icon, and you might add a separate source for each one.
+
+You should nearly always add a "default" icon source with all
+fields wildcarded, which will be used as a fallback if no more
+specific source matches. #GtkIconSet always prefers more specific
+icon sources to more generic icon sources. The order in which you
+add the sources to the icon set does not matter.
+
+gtk_icon_set_new_from_pixbuf() creates a new icon set with a
+default icon source based on the given pixbuf.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @selection_data had target type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW and
-is otherwise valid
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_row_spacing">
@@ -11065,7 +10912,7 @@ used for @tool_item
<description>
Creates a new scrollbar with the given orientation.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11083,29 +10930,6 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_add_filter">
-<description>
-Adds @filter to the list of #GtkRecentFilter objects held by @chooser.
-
-If no previous filter objects were defined, this function will call
-gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter().
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position">
<description>
Moves @iter forward by a single cursor position. Cursor positions
@@ -11214,38 +11038,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert_widget">
-<description>
-Inserts a widget in the toolbar at the given position.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget to add to the toolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> used for context-sensitive help about this toolbar element.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the number of widgets to insert this widget after.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_filter">
<description>
Gets the current filter; see gtk_file_chooser_set_filter().
@@ -11293,26 +11085,19 @@ array of targets, otherwise %FALSE.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_current_icon_drag_source">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_direction_wildcarded">
<description>
-Returns the index of the icon which is the source of the current
-DND operation, or -1.
-
-This function is meant to be used in a #GtkWidget::drag-data-get
-callback.
+Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded().
-Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconEntry
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> index of the icon which is the source of the current
-DND operation, or -1.
-
+<return> %TRUE if this icon source is a base for any text direction variant
</return>
</function>
@@ -11398,27 +11183,6 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_label_set_selectable().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_get_animation">
-<description>
-Gets the #GdkPixbufAnimation being displayed by the #GtkImage.
-The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
-%GTK_IMAGE_ANIMATION (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
-The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
-returned animation.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the displayed animation, or %NULL if
-the image is empty
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_activate_default">
<description>
Activates the default widget for the window, unless the current
@@ -11438,34 +11202,35 @@ focused widget is activated.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_n_pages">
+<function name="gtk_selection_owner_set_for_display">
<description>
-Sets the number of pages in the document.
-
-This <emphasis>must</emphasis> be set to a positive number
-before the rendering starts. It may be set in a
-#GtkPrintOperation::begin-print signal hander.
-
-Note that the page numbers passed to the
-#GtkPrintOperation::request-page-setup
-and #GtkPrintOperation::draw-page signals are 0-based, i.e. if
-the user chooses to print all pages, the last ::draw-page signal
-will be for page @n_pages - 1.
+Claim ownership of a given selection for a particular widget, or,
+if @widget is %NULL, release ownership of the selection.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the #Gdkdisplay where the selection is set
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_pages">
-<parameter_description> the number of pages
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> new selection owner (a #GdkWidget), or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> an interned atom representing the selection to claim.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="time_">
+<parameter_description> timestamp with which to claim the selection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> TRUE if the operation succeeded
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_set_modified">
@@ -11490,34 +11255,6 @@ bit flips, the buffer emits a "modified-changed" signal.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_preedit_string">
-<description>
-Set the preedit string and attributes. The preedit string is a
-string showing text that is currently being edited and not
-yet committed into the buffer.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="preedit_string">
-<parameter_description> a string to display at the insertion point
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="preedit_attrs">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoAttrList of attributes that apply to @preedit_string
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cursor_pos">
-<parameter_description> position of cursor within preedit string in chars
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_attributes_copy_values">
<description>
Copies the values from @src to @dest so that @dest has the same values
@@ -11537,31 +11274,6 @@ as @src. Frees existing values in @dest.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_stock">
-<description>
-Retrieves the stock id used for the icon, or %NULL if there is
-no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
-pixbuf, icon name or gicon).
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A stock id, or %NULL if no icon is set or if the icon
-wasn't set from a stock id
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_from_ppd">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object by using
@@ -11598,24 +11310,34 @@ to free it
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_right_margin">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_clipboard">
<description>
-Gets the default right margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
+Returns the clipboard object for the given selection to
+be used with @widget. @widget must have a #GdkDisplay
+associated with it, so must be attached to a toplevel
+window.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkAtom which identifies the clipboard
+to use. %GDK_SELECTION_CLIPBOARD gives the
+default clipboard. Another common value
+is %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY, which gives
+the primary X selection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default right margin
+<return> the appropriate clipboard object. If no
+clipboard already exists, a new one will
+be created. Once a clipboard object has
+been created, it is persistent for all time.
</return>
</function>
@@ -11710,24 +11432,24 @@ called by models after the child state of a node changes.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_action_groups">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard">
<description>
-Returns the list of action groups associated with @self.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Adds @clipboard to the list of clipboards in which the selection
+contents of @buffer are available. In most cases, @clipboard will be
+the #GtkClipboard of type %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY for a view of @buffer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GList of
-action groups. The list is owned by GTK+
-and should not be modified.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_bytes_in_line">
@@ -11757,23 +11479,39 @@ including the paragraph delimiters.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_relief_style">
+<function name="gtk_im_context_simple_add_table">
<description>
-Returns the relief style of buttons on @toolbar. See
-gtk_button_set_relief().
+Adds an additional table to search to the input context.
+Each row of the table consists of @max_seq_len key symbols
+followed by two #guint16 interpreted as the high and low
+words of a #gunicode value. Tables are searched starting
+from the last added.
-Since: 2.4
+The table must be sorted in dictionary order on the
+numeric value of the key symbol fields. (Values beyond
+the length of the sequence should be zero.)
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
+<parameter name="context_simple">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIMContextSimple
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> the table
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max_seq_len">
+<parameter_description> Maximum length of a sequence in the table
+(cannot be greater than #GTK_MAX_COMPOSE_LEN)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_seqs">
+<parameter_description> number of sequences in the table
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The relief style of buttons on @toolbar.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_size">
@@ -11794,24 +11532,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_previous_color">
-<description>
-Fills @color in with the original color value.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the original color value.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_sensitive">
<description>
Returns the cell renderer's sensitivity.
@@ -11851,33 +11571,6 @@ on the bottom or left.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_cursor_hadjustment">
-<description>
-Hooks up an adjustment to the cursor position in an entry, so that when
-the cursor is moved, the adjustment is scrolled to show that position.
-See gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
-the adjustment.
-
-The adjustment has to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system
-as the entry.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the cursor
-is moved, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_n_pages">
<description>
Returns the number of pages in the @assistant
@@ -11907,7 +11600,7 @@ Causes the given @text to appear superimposed on the progress bar.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> a UTF-8 string, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a UTF-8 string, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -11934,45 +11627,29 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_set">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_focus_on_map">
<description>
-Stores new data into a #GtkSelectionData object. Should
-<emphasis>only</emphasis> be called from a selection handler callback.
-Zero-terminates the stored data.
+Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_focus_on_map().
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> the type of selection data
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> format (number of bits in a unit)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> pointer to the data (will be copied)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="length">
-<parameter_description> length of the data
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if window should receive the input focus when
+mapped.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_action">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_select_multiple">
<description>
-Sets the type of operation that the chooser is performing; the
-user interface is adapted to suit the selected action. For example,
-an option to create a new folder might be shown if the action is
-%GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE but not if the action is
-%GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN.
+Gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
+selector. See gtk_file_chooser_set_select_multiple().
Since: 2.4
@@ -11982,86 +11659,10 @@ Since: 2.4
<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action that the file selector is performing
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_assistant_set_current_page">
-<description>
-Switches the page to @page_num. Note that this will only be necessary
-in custom buttons, as the @assistant flow can be set with
-gtk_assistant_set_forward_page_func().
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_num">
-<parameter_description> index of the page to switch to, starting from 0.
-If negative, the last page will be used. If greater
-than the number of pages in the @assistant, nothing
-will be done.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_box_pack_start_defaults">
-<description>
-Adds @widget to @box, packed with reference to the start of @box.
-The child is packed after any other child packed with reference
-to the start of @box.
-
-Parameters for how to pack the child @widget, #GtkBox:expand,
-#GtkBox:fill and #GtkBox:padding, are given their default
-values, %TRUE, %TRUE, and 0, respectively.
-
-Deprecated: 2.14: Use gtk_box_pack_start()
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be added to @box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_action_disconnect_proxy">
-<description>
-Disconnects a proxy widget from an action.
-Does <emphasis>not</emphasis> destroy the widget, however.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_set_related_action() instead.
+<return> %TRUE if multiple files can be selected.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> the proxy widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_style_apply_default_background">
@@ -12109,37 +11710,6 @@ Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_set_related_action() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_insert_page">
-<description>
-Insert a page into @notebook at the given position.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
-or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the index (starting at 0) at which to insert the page,
-or -1 to append the page after all other pages.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the index (starting from 0) of the inserted
-page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_focus_on_click">
<description>
Returns whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
@@ -12177,25 +11747,6 @@ gtk_container_set_resize_mode ().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_clickable">
-<description>
-Sets the header to be active if @active is %TRUE. When the header is active,
-then it can take keyboard focus, and can be clicked.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="clickable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the header is active.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_store_insert_with_values">
<description>
Creates a new row at @position. @iter will be changed to point to this
@@ -12245,23 +11796,25 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_width_chars">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_copyright">
<description>
-Retrieves the desired width of @label, in characters. See
-gtk_label_set_width_chars().
+Sets the copyright string to display in the about dialog.
+This should be a short string of one or two lines.
Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="copyright">
+<parameter_description> (allow-none) the copyright string
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the width of the label in characters.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_im_context_focus_in">
@@ -12323,6 +11876,31 @@ Creates a new label and sets it as the menu label of @child.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_fullscreen">
+<description>
+Asks to place @window in the fullscreen state. Note that you
+shouldn't assume the window is definitely full screen afterward,
+because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could unfullscreen it
+again, and not all window managers honor requests to fullscreen
+windows. But normally the window will end up fullscreen. Just
+don't write code that crashes if not.
+
+You can track the fullscreen state via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_get_screen">
<description>
Get the #GdkScreen from the toplevel window associated with
@@ -12418,37 +11996,53 @@ will then disallow lowering the dialog below the parent.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_size_register_alias">
+<function name="gtk_style_set_background">
<description>
-Registers @alias as another name for @target.
-So calling gtk_icon_size_from_name() with @alias as argument
-will return @target.
+Sets the background of @window to the background color or pixmap
+specified by @style for the given state.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="alias">
-<parameter_description> an alias for @target
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description> an existing icon size
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_pixmap_new">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_height">
<description>
+Returns the page height in units of @unit.
+
+Note that this function takes orientation and
+margins into consideration.
+See gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height().
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the page height.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_select_path">
@@ -12469,41 +12063,24 @@ Select the row at @path.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_entry_add_signal">
+<function name="gtk_printer_is_virtual">
<description>
-Override or install a new key binding for @keyval with @modifiers on
- binding_set When the binding is activated, @signal_name will be
-emitted on the target widget, with @n_args @Varargs used as
-arguments.
+Returns whether the printer is virtual (i.e. does not
+represent actual printer hardware, but something like
+a CUPS class).
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to install an entry for
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> key value of binding to install
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to install
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="signal_name">
-<parameter_description> signal to execute upon activation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_args">
-<parameter_description> number of arguments to @signal_name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments to @signal_name
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @printer is virtual
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_test_list_all_types">
@@ -12524,67 +12101,36 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_expander_new_with_mnemonic">
+<function name="gtk_range_get_show_fill_level">
<description>
-Creates a new expander using @label as the text of the label.
-If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
-If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
-underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
-accelerator called a mnemonic.
-Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
+Gets whether the range displays the fill level graphically.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the text of the label with an underscore in front of the
-mnemonic character
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkExpander widget.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_indent">
-<description>
-Gets the default indentation of paragraphs in @text_view.
-Tags in the view's buffer may override the default.
-The indentation may be negative.
-
+<return> %TRUE if @range shows the fill level.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> number of pixels of indentation
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_add">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_headers_clickable">
<description>
-Adds @widget to @container. Typically used for simple containers
-such as #GtkWindow, #GtkFrame, or #GtkButton; for more complicated
-layout containers such as #GtkBox or #GtkTable, this function will
-pick default packing parameters that may not be correct. So
-consider functions such as gtk_box_pack_start() and
-gtk_table_attach() as an alternative to gtk_container_add() in
-those cases. A widget may be added to only one container at a time;
-you can't place the same widget inside two different containers.
+Allow the column title buttons to be clicked.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget to be placed inside @container
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the columns are clickable.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -12610,33 +12156,38 @@ the current label is removed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accelerator_parse">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_get_hard_margins">
<description>
-Parses a string representing an accelerator. The
-format looks like "<Control>a" or "<Shift><Alt>F1" or
-"<Release>z" (the last one is for key release).
-The parser is fairly liberal and allows lower or upper case,
-and also abbreviations such as "<Ctl>" and "<Ctrl>".
+Obtains the hardware printer margins of the #GtkPrintContext, in units.
-If the parse fails, @accelerator_key and @accelerator_mods will
-be set to 0 (zero).
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accelerator">
-<parameter_description> string representing an accelerator
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accelerator_key">
-<parameter_description> return location for accelerator keyval
+<parameter name="top">
+<parameter_description> top hardware printer margin
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accelerator_mods">
-<parameter_description> return location for accelerator modifier mask
+<parameter name="bottom">
+<parameter_description> bottom hardware printer margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="left">
+<parameter_description> left hardware printer margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="right">
+<parameter_description> right hardware printer margin
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the hard margins were retrieved
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_adjustment">
@@ -12658,47 +12209,64 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_status_string">
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_set_value">
<description>
-Returns a string representation of the status of the
-print operation. The string is translated and suitable
-for displaying the print status e.g. in a #GtkStatusbar.
-
-Use gtk_print_operation_get_status() to obtain a status
-value that is suitable for programmatic use.
+Sets the data in the cell specified by @iter and @column.
+The type of @value must be convertible to the type of the
+column.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter for the row being modified
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> column number to modify
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> new value for the cell
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a string representation of the status
-of the print operation
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_license">
+<function name="gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order_from_array">
<description>
-Returns the license information.
+Sets an alternative button order. If the
+#GtkSettings:gtk-alternative-button-order setting is set to %TRUE,
+the dialog buttons are reordered according to the order of the
+response ids in @new_order.
+
+See gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order() for more information.
+
+This function is for use by language bindings.
Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_params">
+<parameter_description> the number of response ids in @new_order
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_order">
+<parameter_description> an array of response ids of @dialog's buttons
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The license information. The string is owned by the about
-dialog and must not be modified.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_size">
@@ -12725,29 +12293,24 @@ in addition to calling this function.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_title">
+<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_label">
<description>
-Sets a title for @page. The title is displayed in the header
-area of the assistant when @page is the current page.
+Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem whose child is a simple #GtkLabel.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> the new title for @page
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text for the label
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A new #GtkRadioMenuItem
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_binding_set_activate">
@@ -12779,6 +12342,26 @@ Find a key binding matching @keyval and @modifiers within
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_is_toplevel">
+<description>
+Determines whether @widget is a toplevel widget. Currently only
+#GtkWindow and #GtkInvisible are toplevel widgets. Toplevel
+widgets have no parent widget.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @widget is a toplevel, %FALSE otherwise
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkFileChooserDialog. This function is analogous to
@@ -12814,84 +12397,31 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_draw">
-<description>
-In GTK+ 1.2, this function would immediately render the
-region @area of a widget, by invoking the virtual draw method of a
-widget. In GTK+ 2.0, the draw method is gone, and instead
-gtk_widget_draw() simply invalidates the specified region of the
-widget, then updates the invalid region of the widget immediately.
-Usually you don't want to update the region immediately for
-performance reasons, so in general gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() is
-a better choice if you want to draw a region of a widget.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> area to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_load_key_file">
+<function name="gtk_container_child_set_valist">
<description>
-Reads the print settings from the group @group_name in @key_file. If the
-file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
-#GKeyFileError.
-
-Since: 2.14
+Sets one or more child properties for @child and @container.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the settings from
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the group to use, or %NULL to use the default
-"Print Settings"
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem containing a label. The label
-will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
-in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> group the radio menu item is inside
+<parameter name="first_property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the first property to set
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
-mnemonic character
+<parameter name="var_args">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated list of property names and values, starting
+with @first_prop_name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkRadioMenuItem
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_stock_list_ids">
@@ -12908,54 +12438,6 @@ and each string in the list must be freed with g_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels">
-<description>
-Returns a newly allocated list of the widgets, normally labels, for
-which this widget is a the target of a mnemonic (see for example,
-gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget()).
-
-The widgets in the list are not individually referenced. If you
-want to iterate through the list and perform actions involving
-callbacks that might destroy the widgets, you
-<emphasis>must</emphasis> call <literal>g_list_foreach (result,
-(GFunc)g_object_ref, NULL)</literal> first, and then unref all the
-widgets afterwards.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the list of
-mnemonic labels; free this list
-with g_list_free() when you are done with it.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_widget_grab_focus">
-<description>
-Causes @widget to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
-inside. @widget must be a focusable widget, such as a #GtkEntry;
-something like #GtkFrame won't work.
-
-More precisely, it must have the %GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set. Use
-gtk_widget_set_can_focus() to modify that flag.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_set_always_show_image">
<description>
If %TRUE, the menu item will ignore the #GtkSettings:gtk-menu-images
@@ -12998,49 +12480,30 @@ a class used in gtk_binding_set_by_class().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ctree_set_node_info">
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_gicon">
<description>
+See gtk_image_new_from_gicon() for details.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixmap_closed">
-<parameter_description>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask_closed">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixmap_opened">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> an icon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask_opened">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> an icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_width_chars">
-<description>
-Retrieves the width in characters of the @button widget's entry and/or label.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> the button widget to examine.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an integer width (in characters) that the button will use to size itself.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_show_expanders">
<description>
Sets whether to draw and enable expanders and indent child rows in
@@ -13067,72 +12530,33 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_box_gap">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_new_from_key_file">
<description>
-Draws a box in @window using the given style and state and shadow type,
-leaving a gap in one side.
+Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
+ key_file Returns a new #GtkPageSetup object with the restored
+page setup, or %NULL if an error occurred.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_side">
-<parameter_description> side in which to leave the gap
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_x">
-<parameter_description> starting position of the gap
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
+to use the default name "Page Setup"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_width">
-<parameter_description> width of the gap
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the restored #GtkPageSetup
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_scrollable">
@@ -13176,23 +12600,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_numeric">
-<description>
-Returns whether non-numeric text can be typed into the spin button.
-See gtk_spin_button_set_numeric().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if only numeric text can be entered
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_has_grab">
<description>
Determines whether the widget is currently grabbing events, so it
@@ -13214,18 +12621,26 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_drag_target_group">
+<function name="gtk_cell_view_set_model">
<description>
-Get the target entry for a dragged #GtkToolItemGroup.
+Sets the model for @cell_view. If @cell_view already has a model
+set, it will remove it before setting the new model. If @model is
+%NULL, then it will unset the old model.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkTargetEntry for a dragged group
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_add_ui">
@@ -13277,26 +12692,6 @@ is added after its siblings.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_label">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem whose child is a simple #GtkLabel.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the text for the label
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkRadioMenuItem
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_button_set_focus_on_click">
<description>
Sets whether the button will grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
@@ -13470,38 +12865,6 @@ Unselects the specified iterator.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_test_find_widget">
-<description>
-This function will search the descendants of @widget for a widget
-of type @widget_type that has a label matching @label_pattern next
-to it. This is most useful for automated GUI testing, e.g. to find
-the "OK" button in a dialog and synthesize clicks on it.
-However see gtk_test_find_label(), gtk_test_find_sibling() and
-gtk_test_widget_click() for possible caveats involving the search of
-such widgets and synthesizing widget events.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> Container widget, usually a GtkWindow.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="label_pattern">
-<parameter_description> Shell-glob pattern to match a label string.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget_type">
-<parameter_description> Type of a aearched for label sibling widget.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a valid widget if any is found or %NULL.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_label_text">
<description>
Creates a new label and sets it as the tab label for the page
@@ -13525,6 +12888,23 @@ containing @child.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_unset_style">
+<description>
+Unsets a toolbar style set with gtk_tool_palette_set_style(),
+so that user preferences will be used to determine the toolbar style.
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_calendar_new">
<description>
Creates a new calendar, with the current date being selected.
@@ -13589,43 +12969,42 @@ algorithms).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_margin">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_exists">
<description>
-Sets the ::margin property which specifies the space
-which is inserted at the top, bottom, left and right
-of the icon view.
+Checks whether the resource pointed by @info still exists. At
+the moment this check is done only on resources pointing to local files.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="margin">
-<parameter_description> the margin
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the resource exists
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_set_new">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_opacity_control">
<description>
-GTK+ maintains a global list of binding sets. Each binding set has
-a unique name which needs to be specified upon creation.
+Sets the @colorsel to use or not use opacity.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="set_name">
-<parameter_description> unique name of this binding set
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="has_opacity">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if @colorsel can set the opacity, %FALSE otherwise.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> new binding set
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_expander_get_use_markup">
@@ -13648,42 +13027,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_expander">
-<description>
-Draws an expander as used in #GtkTreeView.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_expander() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x position to draw the expander at
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y position to draw the expander at
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expander_style">
-<parameter_description> the style to draw the expander in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkIconView widget
@@ -13716,6 +13059,41 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_aspect_frame_set">
+<description>
+Set parameters for an existing #GtkAspectFrame.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="aspect_frame">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAspectFrame
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> Horizontal alignment of the child within the allocation of
+the #GtkAspectFrame. This ranges from 0.0 (left aligned)
+to 1.0 (right aligned)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> Vertical alignment of the child within the allocation of
+the #GtkAspectFrame. This ranges from 0.0 (left aligned)
+to 1.0 (right aligned)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ratio">
+<parameter_description> The desired aspect ratio.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="obey_child">
+<parameter_description> If %TRUE, @ratio is ignored, and the aspect
+ratio is taken from the requistion of the child.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_add_with_properties">
<description>
Adds @widget to @container, setting child properties at the same time.
@@ -13744,32 +13122,6 @@ with @first_prop_name
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_height">
-<description>
-Returns the page height in units of @unit.
-
-Note that this function takes orientation and
-margins into consideration.
-See gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height().
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the page height.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_accel_map_change_entry">
<description>
Changes the @accel_key and @accel_mods currently associated with @accel_path.
@@ -13806,23 +13158,26 @@ g_intern_static_string().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_max_width_chars">
+<function name="gtk_container_set_resize_mode">
<description>
-Retrieves the desired maximum width of @label, in characters. See
-gtk_label_set_width_chars().
+Sets the resize mode for the container.
-Since: 2.6
+The resize mode of a container determines whether a resize request
+will be passed to the container's parent, queued for later execution
+or executed immediately.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="resize_mode">
+<parameter_description> the new resize mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the maximum width of the label in characters.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_has_frame">
@@ -13897,87 +13252,12 @@ on #GtkWidget.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_rules_hint">
-<description>
-Gets the setting set by gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if rules are useful for the user of this tree
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_range_set_lower_stepper_sensitivity">
-<description>
-Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
-'lower' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="sensitivity">
-<parameter_description> the lower stepper's sensitivity policy.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_draw_extension">
+<function name="gtk_widget_pop_colormap">
<description>
-Draws an extension, i.e. a notebook tab.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_extension() instead.
+Removes a colormap pushed with gtk_widget_push_colormap().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the extension
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the extension
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of the extension
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> width of the extension
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_side">
-<parameter_description> the side on to which the extension is attached
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -14171,25 +13451,6 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_group_id">
-<description>
-Gets the current group identificator for @notebook.
-
-Since: 2.10
-Deprecated: 2.12: use gtk_notebook_get_group() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the group identificator, or -1 if none is set.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_tree_view">
<description>
Returns the tree view associated with @selection.
@@ -14242,27 +13503,25 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_slider_range">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_title">
<description>
-This function returns sliders range along the long dimension,
-in widget->window coordinates.
-
-This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
+Sets a title for @page. The title is displayed in the header
+area of the assistant when @page is the current page.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="slider_start">
-<parameter_description> return location for the slider's start, or %NULL
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="slider_end">
-<parameter_description> return location for the slider's end, or %NULL
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the new title for @page
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -14313,30 +13572,69 @@ visual appearance, it doesn't affect the semantics of the button.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_width_chars">
<description>
-See gtk_image_new_from_gicon() for details.
+Retrieves the width in characters of the @button widget's entry and/or label.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the button widget to examine.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> an icon
+</parameters>
+<return> an integer width (in characters) that the button will use to size itself.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_padding">
+<description>
+Sets the renderer's padding.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> an icon size
+<parameter name="xpad">
+<parameter_description> the x padding of the cell renderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ypad">
+<parameter_description> the y padding of the cell renderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_view_new_with_markup">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkCellView widget, adds a #GtkCellRendererText
+to it, and makes it show @markup. The text can be
+marked up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text
+markup language</link>.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="markup">
+<parameter_description> the text to display in the cell view
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_select_all">
<description>
Selects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
@@ -14373,33 +13671,6 @@ to it, you have to call g_object_ref() on it.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_load_file">
-<description>
-Reads the page setup from the file @file_name.
-See gtk_page_setup_to_file().
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="file_name">
-<parameter_description> the filename to read the page setup from
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_set_extension_events">
<description>
Sets the extension events mask to @mode. See #GdkExtensionMode
@@ -14568,45 +13839,21 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser">
+<function name="gtk_window_has_group">
<description>
-Installs a style property on a widget class.
+Returns whether @window has an explicit window group.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="klass">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidgetClass
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pspec">
-<parameter_description> the #GParamSpec for the style property
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parser">
-<parameter_description> the parser for the style property
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_printer_is_virtual">
-<description>
-Returns whether the printer is virtual (i.e. does not
-represent actual printer hardware, but something like
-a CUPS class).
-
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @printer is virtual
+<return> %TRUE if @window has an explicit window group.
+Since 2.22
</return>
</function>
@@ -14851,38 +14098,18 @@ g_intern_static_string().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_filter_add_custom">
+<function name="gtk_progress_bar_pulse">
<description>
-Adds rule to a filter that allows files based on a custom callback
-function. The bitfield @needed which is passed in provides information
-about what sorts of information that the filter function needs;
-this allows GTK+ to avoid retrieving expensive information when
-it isn't needed by the filter.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Indicates that some progress is made, but you don't know how much.
+Causes the progress bar to enter "activity mode," where a block
+bounces back and forth. Each call to gtk_progress_bar_pulse()
+causes the block to move by a little bit (the amount of movement
+per pulse is determined by gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step()).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="needed">
-<parameter_description> bitfield of flags indicating the information that the custom
-filter function needs.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> callback function; if the function returns %TRUE, then
-the file will be displayed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @func
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="notify">
-<parameter_description> function to call to free @data when it is no longer needed.
+<parameter name="pbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -14932,26 +14159,6 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_lookup">
-<description>
-Look up a named tag.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> name of a tag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The tag, or %NULL if none by that name is in the table.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_get_progress_pulse_step">
<description>
Retrieves the pulse step set with gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step().
@@ -15014,45 +14221,79 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_type">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_is_equal">
<description>
-Gets the page type of @page.
+Compares two #GtkPaperSize objects.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+<parameter name="size1">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+<parameter name="size2">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page type of @page.
+<return> %TRUE, if @size1 and @size2
+represent the same paper size
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_from_path">
+<function name="gtk_widget_can_activate_accel">
<description>
-Finds an item factory which has been constructed using the
-<literal>"<name>"</literal> prefix of @path as the @path argument
-for gtk_item_factory_new().
+Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal
+identified by @signal_id can currently be activated.
+This is done by emitting the #GtkWidget::can-activate-accel
+signal on @widget; if the signal isn't overridden by a
+handler or in a derived widget, then the default check is
+that the widget must be sensitive, and the widget and all
+its ancestors mapped.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a string starting with a factory path of the form
-<literal>"<name>"</literal>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="signal_id">
+<parameter_description> the ID of a signal installed on @widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkItemFactory created for the given factory path, or %NULL
+<return> %TRUE if the accelerator can be activated.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_menu_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserMenu widget.
+
+This kind of widget shows the list of recently used resources as
+a menu, each item as a menu item. Each item inside the menu might
+have an icon, representing its MIME type, and a number, for mnemonic
+access.
+
+This widget implements the #GtkRecentChooser interface.
+
+This widget creates its own #GtkRecentManager object. See the
+gtk_recent_chooser_menu_new_for_manager() function to know how to create
+a #GtkRecentChooserMenu widget bound to another #GtkRecentManager object.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkRecentChooserMenu
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -15081,28 +14322,6 @@ realized.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_button_set_orientation">
-<description>
-Sets the orientation of the #GtkScaleButton's popup window.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_orientable_set_orientation() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the new orientation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_button_get_use_stock">
<description>
Returns whether the button label is a stock item.
@@ -15121,45 +14340,46 @@ used directly as the label text.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_has_default_sort_func">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_right_margin">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if the model has a default sort function. This is used
-primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can
-go back to the default state, or not.
+Gets the right margin in units of @unit.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="sortable">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSortable
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if the model has a default sort function
+<return> the right margin
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_bounds">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_icon_name">
<description>
-Retrieves the first and last iterators in the buffer, i.e. the
-entire buffer lies within the range [ start,@end).
+Creates a status icon displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
+If the current icon theme is changed, the icon will be updated
+appropriately.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with first position in the buffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with the end iterator
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_job_set_track_print_status">
@@ -15225,6 +14445,27 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_filter_add_pattern">
+<description>
+Adds a rule that allows resources based on a pattern matching their
+display name.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pattern">
+<parameter_description> a file pattern
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_int">
<description>
Returns the integer value of @key, or 0.
@@ -15264,38 +14505,66 @@ gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_column">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCheckMenuItem containing a label. The label
-will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
-in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
+Returns the column of @tree_view's model which is being used for
+displaying tooltips on @tree_view's rows.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> The text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
-mnemonic character
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkCheckMenuItem
+<return> the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
+used, or -1 if this is disabled.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_set_alpha">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_set_hard_margins">
<description>
-Sets the current opacity to be @alpha.
-
-Since: 2.4
+set the hard margins in pixel coordinates
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="alpha">
-<parameter_description> an integer between 0 and 65535.
+<parameter name="top">
+<parameter_description> top hardware printer margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bottom">
+<parameter_description> bottom hardware printer margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="left">
+<parameter_description> left hardware printer margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="right">
+<parameter_description> right hardware printer margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_unselect_all">
+<description>
+Unselects all the items inside @chooser.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -15350,6 +14619,36 @@ pairs, ending with %NULL
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_geometry_hints">
+<description>
+This function sets up hints about how a window can be resized by
+the user. You can set a minimum and maximum size; allowed resize
+increments (e.g. for xterm, you can only resize by the size of a
+character); aspect ratios; and more. See the #GdkGeometry struct.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="geometry_widget">
+<parameter_description> widget the geometry hints will be applied to or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="geometry">
+<parameter_description> struct containing geometry information or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="geom_mask">
+<parameter_description> mask indicating which struct fields should be paid attention to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_spacing">
<description>
Sets the spacing field of @tree_column, which is the number of pixels to
@@ -15413,27 +14712,42 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_path_is_selected">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_connect">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if the icon pointed to by @path is currently
-selected. If @path does not point to a valid location, %FALSE is returned.
+Installs an accelerator in this group. When @accel_group is being activated
+in response to a call to gtk_accel_groups_activate(), @closure will be
+invoked if the @accel_key and @accel_mods from gtk_accel_groups_activate()
+match those of this connection.
-Since: 2.6
+The signature used for the @closure is that of #GtkAccelGroupActivate.
+
+Note that, due to implementation details, a single closure can only be
+connected to one accelerator group.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to check selection on.
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_flags">
+<parameter_description> a flag mask to configure this accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="closure">
+<parameter_description> closure to be executed upon accelerator activation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @path is selected.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_activate">
@@ -15506,6 +14820,24 @@ i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_binding_set_by_class">
+<description>
+This function returns the binding set named after the type name of
+the passed in class structure. New binding sets are created on
+demand by this function.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="object_class">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkObject class
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the binding set corresponding to @object_class
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_lines">
<description>
Moves @count lines forward, if possible (if @count would move
@@ -15661,45 +14993,63 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_set_markup">
+<function name="gtk_aspect_frame_new">
<description>
-Sets the text of the message dialog to be @str, which is marked
-up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup
-language</link>.
+Create a new #GtkAspectFrame.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="message_dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> Label text.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="str">
-<parameter_description> markup string (see <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>)
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> Horizontal alignment of the child within the allocation of
+the #GtkAspectFrame. This ranges from 0.0 (left aligned)
+to 1.0 (right aligned)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> Vertical alignment of the child within the allocation of
+the #GtkAspectFrame. This ranges from 0.0 (left aligned)
+to 1.0 (right aligned)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ratio">
+<parameter_description> The desired aspect ratio.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="obey_child">
+<parameter_description> If %TRUE, @ratio is ignored, and the aspect
+ratio is taken from the requistion of the child.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new #GtkAspectFrame.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_get_focus_child">
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_set_markup">
<description>
-Returns the current focus child widget inside @container.
+Sets the text of the message dialog to be @str, which is marked
+up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup
+language</link>.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="message_dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="str">
+<parameter_description> markup string (see <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The child widget which has the focus
-inside @container, or %NULL if none is set.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_scale_new_with_range">
@@ -15714,7 +15064,7 @@ Note that the way in which the precision is derived works best if @step
is a power of ten. If the resulting precision is not suitable for your
needs, use gtk_scale_set_digits() to correct it.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -15791,175 +15141,126 @@ Gets the visual that will be used to render @widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_hline">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_tooltip_text">
<description>
-Draws a horizontal line from (@x1, @y) to (@x2, @y) in @window
-using the given style and state.
+Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified
+position in @entry.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x1">
-<parameter_description> the starting x coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x2">
-<parameter_description> the ending x coordinate
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y coordinate
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> the icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_is_adjusting">
-<description>
-Gets the current state of the @colorsel.
-
+<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. Free the returned string
+with g_free() when done.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the user is currently dragging a color around, and %FALSE
-if the selection has stopped.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_vbox_new">
+<function name="gtk_file_filter_add_custom">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkVBox.
+Adds rule to a filter that allows files based on a custom callback
+function. The bitfield @needed which is passed in provides information
+about what sorts of information that the filter function needs;
+this allows GTK+ to avoid retrieving expensive information when
+it isn't needed by the filter.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="homogeneous">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if all children are to be given equal space allotments.
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="spacing">
-<parameter_description> the number of pixels to place by default between children.
+<parameter name="needed">
+<parameter_description> bitfield of flags indicating the information that the custom
+filter function needs.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkVBox.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_n_copies">
-<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> callback function; if the function returns %TRUE, then
+the file will be displayed.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="num_copies">
-<parameter_description> the number of copies
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @func
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_vadjustment">
-<description>
-Gets the #GtkAdjustment currently being used for the vertical aspect.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="notify">
+<parameter_description> function to call to free @data when it is no longer needed.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkAdjustment object, or %NULL if none is currently being
-used.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_create_items_ac">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_device_events">
<description>
-Creates the menu items from the @entries.
+Sets the device event mask (see #GdkEventMask) for a widget. The event
+mask determines which events a widget will receive from @device. Keep
+in mind that different widgets have different default event masks, and by
+changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget's functionality,
+so be careful. This function must be called while a widget is
+unrealized. Consider gtk_widget_add_device_events() for widgets that are
+already realized, or if you want to preserve the existing event
+mask. This function can't be used with #GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets;
+to get events on those widgets, place them inside a #GtkEventBox
+and receive events on the event box.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> the length of @entries
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry<!-- -->s
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_data">
-<parameter_description> data passed to the callback functions of all entries
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_type">
-<parameter_description> 1 if the callback functions in @entries are of type
-#GtkItemFactoryCallback1, 2 if they are of type #GtkItemFactoryCallback2
+<parameter name="events">
+<parameter_description> event mask
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_unref">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_child_iter_to_iter">
<description>
-Inverse of gtk_widget_ref(). Equivalent to g_object_unref().
+Sets @sort_iter to point to the row in @tree_model_sort that corresponds to
+the row pointed at by @child_iter. If @sort_iter was not set, %FALSE
+is returned. Note: a boolean is only returned since 2.14.
-Deprecated: 2.12: Use g_object_unref() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sort_iter">
+<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child_iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row on the child model
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE, if @sort_iter was set, i.e. if @sort_iter is a
+valid iterator pointer to a visible row in the child model.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_destroyed">
@@ -15986,65 +15287,6 @@ of the same dialog.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert_space">
-<description>
-Inserts a new space in the toolbar at the specified position.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the number of widgets after which a space should be inserted.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_activatable">
-<description>
-Returns whether the icon is activatable.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the icon is activatable.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_window_get_modal">
-<description>
-Returns whether the window is modal. See gtk_window_set_modal().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the window is set to be modal and
-establishes a grab when shown
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_from_gicon">
<description>
Sets the icon shown in the entry at the specified position
@@ -16113,96 +15355,85 @@ mode is changed to #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_GROW_ONLY.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_file">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_model">
<description>
-Gets the #GFile that should be previewed in a custom preview
-Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri().
+Returns the model the #GtkIconView is based on. Returns %NULL if the
+model is unset.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GFile for the file to preview, or %NULL if no file
-is selected. Free with g_object_unref().
+<return> A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is currently being used.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_begin">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_file">
<description>
-Initiates a drag on the source side. The function
-only needs to be used when the application is
-starting drags itself, and is not needed when
-gtk_drag_source_set() is used.
+Gets the #GFile that should be previewed in a custom preview
+Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri().
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the source widget.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> The targets (data formats) in which the
-source can provide the data.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="actions">
-<parameter_description> A bitmask of the allowed drag actions for this drag.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> The button the user clicked to start the drag.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> The event that triggered the start of the drag.
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the context for this drag.
+<return> the #GFile for the file to preview, or %NULL if no file
+is selected. Free with g_object_unref().
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_progress_bar_pulse">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_support_selection">
<description>
-Indicates that some progress is made, but you don't know how much.
-Causes the progress bar to enter "activity mode," where a block
-bounces back and forth. Each call to gtk_progress_bar_pulse()
-causes the block to move by a little bit (the amount of movement
-per pulse is determined by gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step()).
+Sets whether selection is supported by #GtkPrintOperation.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="support_selection">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to support selection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_events">
+<function name="gtk_application_quit">
<description>
-Returns the event mask for the widget (a bitfield containing flags
-from the #GdkEventMask enumeration). These are the events that the widget
-will receive.
+Request the application exit. This function invokes
+g_application_quit_with_data(), which normally will
+in turn cause @app to emit #GtkApplication::quit.
+
+To control an application's quit behavior (for example, to ask for
+files to be saved), connect to the #GtkApplication::quit signal
+handler.
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="app">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkApplication
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> event mask for @widget
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_test_find_sibling">
@@ -16351,6 +15582,29 @@ correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary algorithms).
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_compare">
+<description>
+A qsort()-style function that returns negative if @lhs is less than
+ rhs, positive if @lhs is greater than @rhs, and 0 if they're equal.
+Ordering is in character offset order, i.e. the first character in the buffer
+is less than the second character in the buffer.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="lhs">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="rhs">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> -1 if @lhs is less than @rhs, 1 if @lhs is greater, 0 if they are equal
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_printer_accepts_pdf">
<description>
Returns whether the printer accepts input in
@@ -16430,6 +15684,44 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_page_set">
+<description>
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSet value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_from_widget">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem adding it to the same group as @group.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> An existing #GtkRadioMenuItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The new #GtkRadioMenuItem
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size">
<description>
Retrieves the icon size for the toolbar. See gtk_toolbar_set_icon_size().
@@ -16467,32 +15759,6 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_search_column">
-<description>
-Sets @column as the column where the interactive search code should
-search in for the current model.
-
-If the search column is set, users can use the "start-interactive-search"
-key binding to bring up search popup. The enable-search property controls
-whether simply typing text will also start an interactive search.
-
-Note that @column refers to a column of the current model. The search
-column is reset to -1 when the model is changed.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> the column of the model to search in, or -1 to disable searching
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn.
@@ -16577,22 +15843,21 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_item_remove_submenu">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_modal">
<description>
-Removes the widget's submenu.
+Returns whether the window is modal. See gtk_window_set_modal().
-Deprecated: 2.12: gtk_menu_item_remove_submenu() is deprecated and
-should not be used in newly written code. Use
-gtk_menu_item_set_submenu() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuItem
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the window is set to be modal and
+establishes a grab when shown
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_text">
@@ -16622,26 +15887,6 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_selection_set_select_multiple">
-<description>
-Sets whether the user is allowed to select multiple files in the file list.
-Use gtk_file_selection_get_selections () to get the list of selected files.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filesel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSelection
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="select_multiple">
-<parameter_description> whether or not the user is allowed to select multiple
-files in the file list.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon">
<description>
Looks up a named icon and returns a structure containing
@@ -16759,46 +16004,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_polygon">
-<description>
-Draws a polygon on @window with the given parameters.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_polygon() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="points">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GdkPoint<!-- -->s
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="npoints">
-<parameter_description> length of @points
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fill">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the polygon should be filled
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_text_size_group">
<description>
Returns the size group used for labels in @tool_item. Custom subclasses of
@@ -17064,27 +16269,28 @@ aligned with the menu popup position (only useful for GtkOptionMenu).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_window_is_active">
<description>
-Sets the alignment for the contents of the entry. This controls
-the horizontal positioning of the contents when the displayed
-text is shorter than the width of the entry.
+Returns whether the window is part of the current active toplevel.
+(That is, the toplevel window receiving keystrokes.)
+The return value is %TRUE if the window is active toplevel
+itself, but also if it is, say, a #GtkPlug embedded in the active toplevel.
+You might use this function if you wanted to draw a widget
+differently in an active window from a widget in an inactive window.
+See gtk_window_has_toplevel_focus()
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> The horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).
-Reversed for RTL layouts
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the window part of the current active window.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_line_end">
@@ -17155,20 +16361,6 @@ padding on the sides)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_separator_tool_item_new">
-<description>
-Create a new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action">
<description>
This is a utility function for #GtkActivatable implementors.
@@ -17445,72 +16637,81 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_item_width">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_can_focus">
<description>
-Sets the ::item-width property which specifies the width
-to use for each item. If it is set to -1, the icon view will
-automatically determine a suitable item size.
+Determines whether @widget can own the input focus. See
+gtk_widget_set_can_focus().
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="item_width">
-<parameter_description> the width for each item
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @widget can own the input focus, %FALSE otherwise
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_do_overwrite_confirmation">
+<function name="gtk_layout_get_hadjustment">
<description>
-Sets whether a file chooser in %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode will present
-a confirmation dialog if the user types a file name that already exists. This
-is %FALSE by default.
+This function should only be called after the layout has been
+placed in a #GtkScrolledWindow or otherwise configured for
+scrolling. It returns the #GtkAdjustment used for communication
+between the horizontal scrollbar and @layout.
-Regardless of this setting, the @chooser will emit the
-#GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite signal when appropriate.
+See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
-If all you need is the stock confirmation dialog, set this property to %TRUE.
-You can override the way confirmation is done by actually handling the
-#GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite signal; please refer to its documentation
-for the details.
-Since: 2.8
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> horizontal scroll adjustment
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_radio_button_new_with_label">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkRadioButton with a text label.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> an existing radio button group, or %NULL if you are creating a new
+group.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="do_overwrite_confirmation">
-<parameter_description> whether to confirm overwriting in save mode
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text label to display next to the radio button.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new radio button.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_value">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all">
<description>
-Gets the current value of the range.
+Unselects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> current value of the range.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_get_text">
@@ -17600,30 +16801,6 @@ toggled on.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_mnemonic_activate">
-<description>
-Emits the #GtkWidget::mnemonic-activate signal.
-
-The default handler for this signal activates the @widget if
- group_cycling is %FALSE, and just grabs the focus if @group_cycling
-is %TRUE.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_cycling">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if there are other widgets with the same mnemonic
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the signal has been handled
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_search_path">
<description>
Gets the current search path. See gtk_icon_theme_set_search_path().
@@ -17650,66 +16827,57 @@ in @path, or %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_add_builtin_icon">
<description>
-Creates a new message dialog, which is a simple dialog with an icon
-indicating the dialog type (error, warning, etc.) and some text which
-is marked up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
-When the user clicks a button a "response" signal is emitted with
-response IDs from #GtkResponseType. See #GtkDialog for more details.
+Registers a built-in icon for icon theme lookups. The idea
+of built-in icons is to allow an application or library
+that uses themed icons to function requiring files to
+be present in the file system. For instance, the default
+images for all of GTK+'s stock icons are registered
+as built-icons.
-Special XML characters in the printf() arguments passed to this
-function will automatically be escaped as necessary.
-(See g_markup_printf_escaped() for how this is implemented.)
-Usually this is what you want, but if you have an existing
-Pango markup string that you want to use literally as the
-label, then you need to use gtk_message_dialog_set_markup()
-instead, since you can't pass the markup string either
-as the format (it might contain '%' characters) or as a string
-argument.
-|[
-GtkWidget *dialog;
-dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (main_application_window,
-GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
-GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
-GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
-NULL);
-gtk_message_dialog_set_markup (GTK_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog),
-markup);
-]|
+In general, if you use gtk_icon_theme_add_builtin_icon()
+you should also install the icon in the icon theme, so
+that the icon is generally available.
+
+This function will generally be used with pixbufs loaded
+via gdk_pixbuf_new_from_inline().
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> flags
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> type of message
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the icon to register
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="buttons">
-<parameter_description> set of buttons to use
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> the size at which to register the icon (different
+images can be registered for the same icon name
+at different sizes.)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="message_format">
-<parameter_description> printf()-style format string, or %NULL
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> #GdkPixbuf that contains the image to use
+for @icon_name.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_cell_editable_editing_done">
+<description>
+Emits the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell_editable">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkMessageDialog
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_set_visible_column">
@@ -17976,6 +17144,24 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_color_button_get_title">
+<description>
+Gets the title of the color selection dialog.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> An internal string, do not free the return value
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_class_find_child_property">
<description>
Finds a child property of a container class by name.
@@ -18057,46 +17243,33 @@ g_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_get_size">
+<function name="gtk_size_request_get_width_for_height">
<description>
-Gets the size that has been set on the layout, and that determines
-the total extents of the layout's scrollbar area. See
-gtk_layout_set_size ().
+Retrieves a widget's desired width if it would be given
+the specified @height.
+
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeRequest instance
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> location to store the width set on @layout, or %NULL
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height which is available for allocation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> location to store the height set on @layout, or %NULL
+<parameter name="minimum_width">
+<parameter_description> location for storing the minimum width, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_expand">
-<description>
-Return %TRUE if the column expands to take any available space.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="natural_width">
+<parameter_description> location for storing the natural width, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if the column expands
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_combo_new">
@@ -18173,73 +17346,70 @@ UTF-8 may encode one character as multiple bytes.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_construct">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_position">
<description>
-Initializes an item factory.
+Like gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position(), but moves backward.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="container_type">
-<parameter_description> the kind of menu to create; can be
-#GTK_TYPE_MENU_BAR, #GTK_TYPE_MENU or #GTK_TYPE_OPTION_MENU
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> the factory path of @ifactory, a string of the form
-<literal>"<name>"</literal>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup to which the accelerators for the
-menu items will be added, or %NULL to create a new one
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if we moved
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_position">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_bounds">
<description>
-Like gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position(), but moves backward.
-
+Retrieves the first and last iterators in the buffer, i.e. the
+entire buffer lies within the range [ start,@end).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with first position in the buffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with the end iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if we moved
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_right_margin">
+<function name="gtk_drag_set_icon_pixbuf">
<description>
-Gets the right margin in units of @unit.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Sets @pixbuf as the icon for a given drag.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the context for a drag. (This must be called
+with a context for the source side of a drag)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbuf to use as the drag icon.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="hot_x">
+<parameter_description> the X offset within @widget of the hotspot.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="hot_y">
+<parameter_description> the Y offset within @widget of the hotspot.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the right margin
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_context_get_height">
@@ -18331,23 +17501,21 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_set_context_id">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_add_tearoffs">
<description>
-Sets the context id for @context.
-
-This causes the currently active slave of @context to be
-replaced by the slave corresponding to the new context id.
+Sets whether the popup menu should have a tearoff
+menu item.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="context_id">
-<parameter_description> the id to use
+<parameter name="add_tearoffs">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to add tearoff menu items
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -18423,22 +17591,25 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_set_screen">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_to_key_file">
<description>
-Sets the screen for an icon theme; the screen is used
-to track the user's currently configured icon theme,
-which might be different for different screens.
+This function adds the page setup from @setup to @key_file.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to save the page setup to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the group to add the settings to in @key_file,
+or %NULL to use the default name "Page Setup"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -18564,6 +17735,19 @@ if none has been set.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_get_current_event_device">
+<description>
+If there is a current event and it has a device, return that
+device, otherwise return %NULL.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GdkDevice, or %NULL
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_path">
<description>
Returns a newly-created #GtkTreePath referenced by @iter. This path should
@@ -18585,22 +17769,20 @@ be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_column">
+<function name="gtk_entry_new_with_buffer">
<description>
-Returns the column of @tree_view's model which is being used for
-displaying tooltips on @tree_view's rows.
+Creates a new entry with the specified text buffer.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> The buffer to use for the new #GtkEntry.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
-used, or -1 if this is disabled.
+<return> a new #GtkEntry
</return>
</function>
@@ -18672,6 +17854,38 @@ Sets whether the statusbar has a resize grip.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_application_set_action_group">
+<description>
+Set @group as this application's global action group.
+This will ensure the operating system interface uses
+these actions as follows:
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>In GNOME 2 this exposes the actions for scripting.</listitem>
+<listitem>In GNOME 3, this function populates the application menu.</listitem>
+<listitem>In Windows prior to version 7, this function does nothing.</listitem>
+<listitem>In Windows 7, this function adds "Tasks" to the Jump List.</listitem>
+<listitem>In Mac OS X, this function extends the Dock menu.</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+It is an error to call this function more than once.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="app">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkApplication
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkActionGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_assistant_remove_action_widget">
<description>
Removes a widget from the action area of a #GtkAssistant.
@@ -18705,7 +17919,7 @@ number of digits, so the retrieved value matches the value the user saw.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="digits">
-<parameter_description> the number of decimal places to display,
+<parameter_description> the number of decimal places to display,
e.g. use 1 to display 1.0, 2 to display 1.00, etc
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -18713,20 +17927,20 @@ e.g. use 1 to display 1.0, 2 to display 1.00, etc
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_has_selection">
+<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_text_targets">
<description>
-Sets whether a selection exists.
+Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
+the target list of the drag source. The targets
+are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
+use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
+gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_selection">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE indicates that a selection exists
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -18779,27 +17993,6 @@ selection and what its bounds are.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_set_tooltips">
-<description>
-Sets if the tooltips of a toolbar should be active or not.
-
-Deprecated: 2.14: The toolkit-wide #GtkSettings:gtk-enable-tooltips property
-is now used instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="enable">
-<parameter_description> set to %FALSE to disable the tooltips, or %TRUE to enable them.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_copy">
<description>
Creates a dynamically-allocated copy of an iterator. This function
@@ -18866,26 +18059,30 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_path_from_widget">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_current_page">
<description>
-If @widget has been created by an item factory, returns the full path
-to it. (The full path of a widget is the concatenation of the factory
-path specified in gtk_item_factory_new() with the path specified in the
-#GtkItemFactoryEntry from which the widget was created.)
+Switches to the page number @page_num.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+Note that due to historical reasons, GtkNotebook refuses
+to switch to a page unless the child widget is visible.
+Therefore, it is recommended to show child widgets before
+adding them to a notebook.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_num">
+<parameter_description> index of the page to switch to, starting from 0.
+If negative, the last page will be used. If greater
+than the number of pages in the notebook, nothing
+will be done.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the full path to @widget if it has been created by an item
-factory, %NULL otherwise. This value is owned by GTK+ and must not be
-modified or freed.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_stock_id">
@@ -18926,100 +18123,76 @@ by default.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_set_hard_margins">
+<function name="gtk_color_button_set_alpha">
<description>
-set the hard margins in pixel coordinates
+Sets the current opacity to be @alpha.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="top">
-<parameter_description> top hardware printer margin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bottom">
-<parameter_description> bottom hardware printer margin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="left">
-<parameter_description> left hardware printer margin
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="right">
-<parameter_description> right hardware printer margin
+<parameter name="alpha">
+<parameter_description> an integer between 0 and 65535.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_size">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_context">
<description>
-Obtains the current size of @window. If @window is not onscreen,
-it returns the size GTK+ will suggest to the <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> for the initial window
-size (but this is not reliably the same as the size the window
-manager will actually select). The size obtained by
-gtk_window_get_size() is the last size received in a
-#GdkEventConfigure, that is, GTK+ uses its locally-stored size,
-rather than querying the X server for the size. As a result, if you
-call gtk_window_resize() then immediately call
-gtk_window_get_size(), the size won't have taken effect yet. After
-the window manager processes the resize request, GTK+ receives
-notification that the size has changed via a configure event, and
-the size of the window gets updated.
-
-Note 1: Nearly any use of this function creates a race condition,
-because the size of the window may change between the time that you
-get the size and the time that you perform some action assuming
-that size is the current size. To avoid race conditions, connect to
-"configure-event" on the window and adjust your size-dependent
-state to match the size delivered in the #GdkEventConfigure.
-
-Note 2: The returned size does <emphasis>not</emphasis> include the
-size of the window manager decorations (aka the window frame or
-border). Those are not drawn by GTK+ and GTK+ has no reliable
-method of determining their size.
-
-Note 3: If you are getting a window size in order to position
-the window onscreen, there may be a better way. The preferred
-way is to simply set the window's semantic type with
-gtk_window_set_type_hint(), which allows the window manager to
-e.g. center dialogs. Also, if you set the transient parent of
-dialogs with gtk_window_set_transient_for() window managers
-will often center the dialog over its parent window. It's
-much preferred to let the window manager handle these
-things rather than doing it yourself, because all apps will
-behave consistently and according to user prefs if the window
-manager handles it. Also, the window manager can take the size
-of the window decorations/border into account, while your
-application cannot.
+This function is supposed to be used in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip
+signal handler for #GtkTreeView. The @x, @y and @keyboard_tip values
+which are received in the signal handler, should be passed to this
+function without modification.
-In any case, if you insist on application-specified window
-positioning, there's <emphasis>still</emphasis> a better way than
-doing it yourself - gtk_window_set_position() will frequently
-handle the details for you.
+The return value indicates whether there is a tree view row at the given
+coordinates (%TRUE) or not (%FALSE) for mouse tooltips. For keyboard
+tooltips the row returned will be the cursor row. When %TRUE, then any of
+ model, @path and @iter which have been provided will be set to point to
+that row and the corresponding model. @x and @y will always be converted
+to be relative to @tree_view's bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> return location for width, or %NULL
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> return location for height, or %NULL
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyboard_tip">
+<parameter_description> whether this is a keyboard tooltip or not
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeModel or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreePath or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeIter or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether or not the given tooltip context points to a row.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_defer_drawing">
@@ -19079,6 +18252,24 @@ method to clear the preedit state.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_horizontal">
+<description>
+Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_font_button_get_use_font">
<description>
Returns whether the selected font is used in the label.
@@ -19169,48 +18360,31 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_new">
+<function name="gtk_application_add_window">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkLayout. Unless you have a specific adjustment
-you'd like the layout to use for scrolling, pass %NULL for
- hadjustment and @vadjustment.
-
+Adds a window to the #GtkApplication.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="hadjustment">
-<parameter_description> horizontal scroll adjustment, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="vadjustment">
-<parameter_description> vertical scroll adjustment, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkLayout
-</return>
-</function>
+If the user closes all of the windows added to @app, the default
+behaviour is to call gtk_application_quit().
-<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_before">
-<description>
-Inserts a new row before @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will
-be appended to the end of the list. @iter will be changed to point to this
-new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in
-values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
+If your application uses only a single toplevel window, you can
+use gtk_application_get_window(). If you are using a sub-class
+of #GtkApplication you should call gtk_application_create_window()
+to let the #GtkApplication instance create a #GtkWindow and add
+it to the list of toplevels of the application. You should call
+this function only to add #GtkWindow<!-- -->s that you created
+directly using gtk_window_new().
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row
+<parameter name="app">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkApplication
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="sibling">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a toplevel window to add to @app
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -19247,31 +18421,6 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_to_key_file">
-<description>
-This function adds the page setup from @setup to @key_file.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to save the page setup to
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the group to add the settings to in @key_file,
-or %NULL to use the default name "Page Setup"
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_info_copy">
<description>
Make a copy of a #GtkIconInfo.
@@ -19290,28 +18439,25 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_foreach">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment">
<description>
-Calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.
-If @func returns %TRUE, then the tree ceases to be walked, and
-gtk_tree_model_foreach() returns.
+Returns the text alignment used for @tool_item. Custom subclasses of
+#GtkToolItem should call this function to find out how text should
+be aligned.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> A function to be called on each row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> User data to passed to func.
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #gfloat indicating the horizontal text alignment
+used for @tool_item
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_expand_row">
@@ -19356,25 +18502,6 @@ Tests whether an iterator is at the start of a display line.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_can_default">
-<description>
-Determines whether @widget can be a default widget. See
-gtk_widget_set_can_default().
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @widget can be a default widget, %FALSE otherwise
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_pack_start">
<description>
Packs the @cell into the beginning of the column. If @expand is %FALSE, then
@@ -19420,48 +18547,29 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_move_iter_to_x">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_startup_id">
<description>
-Keeping the iterator on the same line of the layout, move it to the
-specified X coordinate. The lines of a wrapped paragraph are
-treated as distinct for this operation.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Startup notification identifiers are used by desktop environment to
+track application startup, to provide user feedback and other
+features. This function changes the corresponding property on the
+underlying GdkWindow. Normally, startup identifier is managed
+automatically and you should only use this function in special cases
+like transferring focus from other processes. You should use this
+function before calling gtk_window_present() or any equivalent
+function generating a window map event.
-<function name="gtk_label_set_angle">
-<description>
-Sets the angle of rotation for the label. An angle of 90 reads from
-from bottom to top, an angle of 270, from top to bottom. The angle
-setting for the label is ignored if the label is selectable,
-wrapped, or ellipsized.
+This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="angle">
-<parameter_description> the angle that the baseline of the label makes with
-the horizontal, in degrees, measured counterclockwise
+<parameter name="startup_id">
+<parameter_description> a string with startup-notification identifier
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -19510,26 +18618,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_group_set_visible">
-<description>
-Changes the visible of @action_group.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="visible">
-<parameter_description> new visiblity
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_container_set_reallocate_redraws">
<description>
Sets the @reallocate_redraws flag of the container to the given value.
@@ -19621,6 +18709,24 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_select_function">
+<description>
+Returns the current selection function.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The function.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_insert_prefix">
<description>
Requests a prefix insertion.
@@ -19723,68 +18829,68 @@ gtk_get_default_language ().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_drag_source">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_add_filter">
<description>
-Sets the tool palette as a drag source.
-Enables all groups and items in the tool palette as drag sources
-on button 1 and button 3 press with copy and move actions.
-See gtk_drag_source_set().
+Adds @filter to the list of filters that the user can select between.
+When a filter is selected, only files that are passed by that
+filter are displayed.
-Since: 2.20
+Note that the @chooser takes ownership of the filter, so you have to
+ref and sink it if you want to keep a reference.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkToolPaletteDragTarget<!-- -->s
-which the widget should support
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing">
+<function name="gtk_radio_button_set_group">
<description>
-Passes an activate event to the cell renderer for possible processing.
-
+Sets a #GtkRadioButton's group. It should be noted that this does not change
+the layout of your interface in any way, so if you are changing the group,
+it is likely you will need to re-arrange the user interface to reflect these
+changes.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> widget that received the event
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> widget-dependent string representation of the event location;
-e.g. for #GtkTreeView, a string representation of #GtkTreePath
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="background_area">
-<parameter_description> background area as passed to gtk_cell_renderer_render()
+<parameter name="radio_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRadioButton.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell_area">
-<parameter_description> cell area as passed to gtk_cell_renderer_render()
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> an existing radio button group, such as one returned from
+gtk_radio_button_get_group().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> render flags
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_margin">
+<description>
+Returns the value of the ::margin property.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkCellEditable, or %NULL
+<return> the space at the borders
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -19913,6 +19019,30 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_radio">
+<description>
+If @radio is %TRUE, the cell renderer renders a radio toggle
+(i.e. a toggle in a group of mutually-exclusive toggles).
+If %FALSE, it renders a check toggle (a standalone boolean option).
+This can be set globally for the cell renderer, or changed just
+before rendering each cell in the model (for #GtkTreeView, you set
+up a per-row setting using #GtkTreeViewColumn to associate model
+columns with cell renderer properties).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toggle">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="radio">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to make the toggle look like a radio button
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter">
<description>
Sets @iter to a valid iterator pointing to @path.
@@ -19937,6 +19067,29 @@ Sets @iter to a valid iterator pointing to @path.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_path_is_selected">
+<description>
+Returns %TRUE if the icon pointed to by @path is currently
+selected. If @path does not point to a valid location, %FALSE is returned.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to check selection on.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @path is selected.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_accel_map_add_entry">
<description>
Registers a new accelerator with the global accelerator map.
@@ -20012,32 +19165,6 @@ format's mime-type.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_current_page">
-<description>
-Switches to the page number @page_num.
-
-Note that due to historical reasons, GtkNotebook refuses
-to switch to a page unless the child widget is visible.
-Therefore, it is recommended to show child widgets before
-adding them to a notebook.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_num">
-<parameter_description> index of the page to switch to, starting from 0.
-If negative, the last page will be used. If greater
-than the number of pages in the notebook, nothing
-will be done.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_lookup_by_gicon">
<description>
Looks up an icon and returns a structure containing
@@ -20073,29 +19200,28 @@ wasn't found. Free with gtk_icon_info_free()
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_get_capabilities">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_label_widget">
<description>
-Returns the printer's capabilities.
-
-This is useful when you're using #GtkPrintUnixDialog's manual-capabilities
-setting and need to know which settings the printer can handle and which
-you must handle yourself.
-
-This will return 0 unless the printer's details are available, see
-gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
+Sets @label_widget as the widget that will be used as the label
+for @button. If @label_widget is %NULL the "label" property is used
+as label. If "label" is also %NULL, the label in the stock item
+determined by the "stock_id" property is used as label. If
+"stock_id" is also %NULL, @button does not have a label.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label_widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget used as label, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the printer's capabilities
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_menu_get_show_numbers">
@@ -20137,21 +19263,27 @@ with g_slist_free(), and the files with g_object_unref().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_visible">
+<function name="gtk_misc_get_alignment">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if @tree_column is visible.
-
+Gets the X and Y alignment of the widget within its allocation.
+See gtk_misc_set_alignment().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter name="misc">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMisc
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> location to store X alignment of @misc, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> location to store Y alignment of @misc, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the column is visible or not. If it is visible, then
-the tree will show the column.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_printer">
@@ -20175,28 +19307,49 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_path_to_child_path">
+<function name="gtk_color_button_get_color">
<description>
-Converts @sorted_path to a path on the child model of @tree_model_sort.
-That is, @sorted_path points to a location in @tree_model_sort. The
-returned path will point to the same location in the model not being
-sorted. If @sorted_path does not point to a location in the child model,
-%NULL is returned.
+Sets @color to be the current color in the #GtkColorButton widget.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="sorted_path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the current color.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL
-</return>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_attributes">
+<description>
+Sets the attributes in the list as the attributes of @tree_column.
+The attributes should be in attribute/column order, as in
+gtk_tree_view_column_add_attribute(). All existing attributes
+are removed, and replaced with the new attributes.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell_renderer">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkCellRenderer we're setting the attributes of
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> A %NULL-terminated list of attributes.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_error_quark">
@@ -20270,20 +19423,32 @@ mark exists in the buffer.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_fraction">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_set_size">
<description>
-Returns the current fraction of the task that's been completed.
+Changes the dimensions of a @size to @width x @height.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a custom #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the new width in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the new height in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for @width and @height
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_width">
@@ -20309,21 +19474,29 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_extension_events">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_swap">
<description>
-Retrieves the extension events the widget will receive; see
-gdk_input_set_extension_events().
+Swaps @a and @b in @store. Note that this function only works with
+unsorted stores.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="a">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="b">
+<parameter_description> Another #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> extension events for @widget
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_shape_combine_mask">
@@ -20501,32 +19674,6 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_path_to_path">
-<description>
-Converts @child_path to a path relative to @filter. That is, @child_path
-points to a path in the child model. The rerturned path will point to the
-same row in the filtered model. If @child_path isn't a valid path on the
-child model or points to a row which is not visible in @filter, then %NULL
-is returned.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_set_direction">
<description>
Sets the reading direction on a particular widget. This direction
@@ -20575,19 +19722,29 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_inverted">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_pixbuf">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_range_set_inverted().
+Retrieves the image used for the icon.
+
+Unlike the other methods of setting and getting icon data, this
+method will work regardless of whether the icon was set using a
+#GdkPixbuf, a #GIcon, a stock item, or an icon name.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the range is inverted
+<return> A #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if no icon is set for this position.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -20635,22 +19792,19 @@ the clipboard could not be converted into an image.)
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_spacing">
+<function name="gtk_widget_show_all">
<description>
-Returns the value of the ::spacing property.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Recursively shows a widget, and any child widgets (if the widget is
+a container).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the space between cells
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_set_invisible_char">
@@ -20723,22 +19877,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_queue_clear">
-<description>
-This function does the same as gtk_widget_queue_draw().
-
-Deprecated: 2.2: Use gtk_widget_queue_draw() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_targets_include_text">
<description>
Determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
@@ -20802,36 +19940,6 @@ submenu is passed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_lookup_color">
-<description>
-Looks up @color_name in the style's logical color mappings,
-filling in @color and returning %TRUE if found, otherwise
-returning %FALSE. Do not cache the found mapping, because
-it depends on the #GtkStyle and might change when a theme
-switch occurs.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the logical color to look up
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkColor to fill in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the mapping was found.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_tips">
<description>
Sets whether to show a tooltips containing the full path of each
@@ -20882,48 +19990,37 @@ the return value is 0.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_text_column">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_free">
<description>
-Returns the column in the model of @completion to get strings from.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Frees a #GtkSelectionData structure returned from
+gtk_selection_data_copy().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the column containing the strings
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_forward_display_line">
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_get_screen">
<description>
-Moves the given @iter forward by one display (wrapped) line.
-A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
-separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
-Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
-wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
-same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
-they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
-views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
+Gets the screen on which windows of the #GtkMountOperation
+will be shown.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
+<return> the screen on which windows of @op are shown
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -21013,78 +20110,18 @@ Sets the widget to be monitored by this accelerator label.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_starts_sentence">
-<description>
-Determines whether @iter begins a sentence. Sentence boundaries are
-determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language
-(if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary
-algorithms).
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter is at the start of a sentence.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_job_new">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_default_colormap">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkPrintJob.
+Obtains the default colormap used to create widgets.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> the job title
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPrintJob
-
+<return> default widget colormap
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_old_editable_claim_selection">
-<description>
-Claims or gives up ownership of the selection.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="old_editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkOldEditable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="claim">
-<parameter_description> if %TRUE, claim ownership of the selection, if %FALSE, give
-up ownership
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="time_">
-<parameter_description> timestamp for this operation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_unselect_all">
<description>
Unselects all the nodes.
@@ -21099,12 +20136,12 @@ Unselects all the nodes.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_colormap">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_has_window">
<description>
-Sets the colormap for the widget to the given value. Widget must not
-have been previously realized. This probably should only be used
-from an <function>init()</function> function (i.e. from the constructor
-for the widget).
+Determines whether @widget has a #GdkWindow of its own. See
+gtk_widget_set_has_window().
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21112,12 +20149,10 @@ for the widget).
<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a colormap
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @widget has a window, %FALSE otherwise
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_clipboard_clear">
@@ -21156,25 +20191,45 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ctree_insert_node">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_alignment">
<description>
+Fills in @xalign and @yalign with the appropriate values of @cell.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixmap_closed">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask_closed">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the x alignment of the cell, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixmap_opened">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the y alignment of the cell, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask_opened">
-<parameter_description>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_range_set_lower_stepper_sensitivity">
+<description>
+Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
+'lower' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sensitivity">
+<parameter_description> the lower stepper's sensitivity policy.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -21225,6 +20280,25 @@ never should be called by an application.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_gicon">
+<description>
+Creates a status icon displaying a #GIcon. If the icon is a
+themed icon, it will be updated when the theme changes.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_state_wildcarded">
<description>
If the widget state is wildcarded, this source can be used as the
@@ -21333,41 +20407,44 @@ Removes all rows from the list store.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_no_show_all">
+<function name="gtk_menu_get_monitor">
<description>
-Returns the current value of the GtkWidget:no-show-all property,
-which determines whether calls to gtk_widget_show_all() and
-gtk_widget_hide_all() will affect this widget.
+Retrieves the number of the monitor on which to show the menu.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenu
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current value of the "no-show-all" property.
+<return> the number of the monitor on which the menu should
+be popped up or -1, if no monitor has been set
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_get_monitor">
+<function name="gtk_hsv_is_adjusting">
<description>
-Retrieves the number of the monitor on which to show the menu.
+An HSV color selector can be said to be adjusting if multiple rapid
+changes are being made to its value, for example, when the user is
+adjusting the value with the mouse. This function queries whether
+the HSV color selector is being adjusted or not.
Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenu
+<parameter name="hsv">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkHSV
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of the monitor on which the menu should
-be popped up or -1, if no monitor has been set
+<return> %TRUE if clients can ignore changes to the color value,
+since they may be transitory, or %FALSE if they should consider
+the color value status to be final.
</return>
</function>
@@ -21472,27 +20549,25 @@ at (@x, @y), or %NULL
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_button_get_font_name">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_prepend">
<description>
-Retrieves the name of the currently selected font. This name includes
-style and size information as well. If you want to render something
-with the font, use this string with pango_font_description_from_string() .
-If you're interested in peeking certain values (family name,
-style, size, weight) just query these properties from the
-#PangoFontDescription object.
+Prepends a new row to @list_store. @iter will be changed to point to this new
+row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in
+values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="font_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontButton
+<parameter name="list_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the prepend row
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an internal copy of the font name which must not be freed.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_group_get_action">
@@ -21624,6 +20699,24 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_action_get_show_numbers">
+<description>
+Returns the value set by gtk_recent_chooser_menu_set_show_numbers().
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if numbers should be shown.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_scale_get_value_pos">
<description>
Gets the position in which the current value is displayed.
@@ -21691,45 +20784,27 @@ g_object_ref (scrolled_window->hscrollbar);
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_drag_dest_item">
-<description>
-Gets information about the item that is highlighted for feedback.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the highlighted item, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pos">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_widget_queue_resize_no_redraw">
+<function name="gtk_font_button_get_font_name">
<description>
-This function works like gtk_widget_queue_resize(),
-except that the widget is not invalidated.
+Retrieves the name of the currently selected font. This name includes
+style and size information as well. If you want to render something
+with the font, use this string with pango_font_description_from_string() .
+If you're interested in peeking certain values (family name,
+style, size, weight) just query these properties from the
+#PangoFontDescription object.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="font_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> an internal copy of the font name which must not be freed.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_store_remove">
@@ -21754,31 +20829,22 @@ last one.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_move_before">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_use_markup">
<description>
-Moves @iter in @tree_store to the position before @position. @iter and
- position should be in the same level. Note that this function only
-works with unsorted stores. If @position is %NULL, @iter will be
-moved to the end of the level.
+Returns whether the label's text is interpreted as marked up with
+the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup
+language</link>. See gtk_label_set_use_markup ().
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter or %NULL.
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_visible_text">
@@ -21821,93 +20887,99 @@ Sets the shadow type for @frame.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_propagate_expose">
+<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_set_inconsistent">
<description>
-When a container receives an expose event, it must send synthetic
-expose events to all children that don't have their own #GdkWindows.
-This function provides a convenient way of doing this. A container,
-when it receives an expose event, calls gtk_container_propagate_expose()
-once for each child, passing in the event the container received.
-
-gtk_container_propagate_expose() takes care of deciding whether
-an expose event needs to be sent to the child, intersecting
-the event's area with the child area, and sending the event.
+If the user has selected a range of elements (such as some text or
+spreadsheet cells) that are affected by a boolean setting, and the
+current values in that range are inconsistent, you may want to
+display the check in an "in between" state. This function turns on
+"in between" display. Normally you would turn off the inconsistent
+state again if the user explicitly selects a setting. This has to be
+done manually, gtk_check_menu_item_set_inconsistent() only affects
+visual appearance, it doesn't affect the semantics of the widget.
-In most cases, a container can simply either simply inherit the
-#GtkWidget::expose implementation from #GtkContainer, or, do some drawing
-and then chain to the ::expose implementation from #GtkContainer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a child of @container
+<parameter name="check_menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCheckMenuItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a expose event sent to container
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to display an "inconsistent" third state check
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_freeze">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_item_row">
<description>
-This is a deprecated function, it doesn't do anything useful.
+Gets the row in which the item @path is currently
+displayed. Row numbers start at 0.
+
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTreePath of the item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The row in which the item is displayed
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set">
+<function name="gtk_toggle_action_set_active">
<description>
-Precursor of g_object_set().
+Sets the checked state on the toggle action.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_set() instead.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_property_name">
-<parameter_description> name of first property to set
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> value of first property, followed by more properties,
-%NULL-terminated
+<parameter name="is_active">
+<parameter_description> whether the action should be checked or not
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toggle_action_set_active">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_wmclass">
<description>
-Sets the checked state on the toggle action.
+Don't use this function. It sets the X Window System "class" and
+"name" hints for a window. According to the ICCCM, you should
+always set these to the same value for all windows in an
+application, and GTK+ sets them to that value by default, so calling
+this function is sort of pointless. However, you may want to call
+gtk_window_set_role() on each window in your application, for the
+benefit of the session manager. Setting the role allows the window
+manager to restore window positions when loading a saved session.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_active">
-<parameter_description> whether the action should be checked or not
+<parameter name="wmclass_name">
+<parameter_description> window name hint
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wmclass_class">
+<parameter_description> window class hint
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -21958,29 +21030,6 @@ dialog and must not be modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_set_background">
-<description>
-Sets the background of @window to the background color or pixmap
-specified by @style for the given state.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_hide_on_delete">
<description>
Utility function; intended to be connected to the #GtkWidget::delete-event
@@ -22045,27 +21094,67 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_accept_focus">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_tree_coords">
<description>
-Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to receive
-the input focus. This function sets this hint.
+Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the
+tree (the full scrollable area of the tree).
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to let this window receive input focus
+<parameter name="wx">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate relative to the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wy">
+<parameter_description> Y coordinate relative to the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tx">
+<parameter_description> return location for tree X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ty">
+<parameter_description> return location for tree Y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_remove_accelerator">
+<description>
+Removes an accelerator from @widget, previously installed with
+gtk_widget_add_accelerator().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> widget to install an accelerator on
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> accel group for this widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> GDK keyval of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier key combination of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether an accelerator was installed and could be removed
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_get_vadjustment">
<description>
Returns the vertical scrollbar's adjustment, used to connect the
@@ -22102,6 +21191,38 @@ Sets the visibility of @tree_column.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_test_widget_send_key">
+<description>
+This function will generate keyboard press and release events in
+the middle of the first GdkWindow found that belongs to @widget.
+For %GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets like GtkButton, this will often be an
+input-only event window. For other widgets, this is usually widget->window.
+Certain caveats should be considered when using this function, in
+particular because the mouse pointer is warped to the key press
+location, see gdk_test_simulate_key() for details.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> Widget to generate a key press and release on.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> A Gdk keyboard value.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> Keyboard modifiers the event is setup with.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> wether all actions neccessary for the key event simulation were carried out successfully.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_bool_with_default">
<description>
Returns the boolean represented by the value
@@ -22199,23 +21320,25 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_completion_prefix">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_current_page">
<description>
-Get the original text entered by the user that triggered
-the completion or %NULL if there's no completion ongoing.
+Sets the current page number. If @current_page is not -1, this enables
+the current page choice for the range of pages to print.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="current_page">
+<parameter_description> the current page number.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the prefix for the current completion
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_message_dialog_set_image">
@@ -22256,42 +21379,40 @@ Sets the shadow type of the viewport.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_append_text">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_gicon">
<description>
-Appends the given text to the contents of the widget.
+Gets the gicon of @action.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_insert_text() instead.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the text to append
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The action's #GIcon if one is set.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_headers_visible">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_row_separator_func">
<description>
-Sets the visibility state of the headers.
+Returns the current row separator function.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="headers_visible">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the headers are visible
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the current row separator function.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_range">
@@ -22327,14 +21448,24 @@ so expect those.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_update">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_padding">
<description>
-Manually force an update of the spin button.
+Fills in @xpad and @ypad with the appropriate values of @cell.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xpad">
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the x padding of the cell, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ypad">
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the y padding of the cell, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -22474,42 +21605,19 @@ must be connected to an accelerator group; see gtk_accel_group_connect().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_bar_get_child_pack_direction">
-<description>
-Retrieves the current child pack direction of the menubar.
-See gtk_menu_bar_set_child_pack_direction().
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="menubar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the child pack direction
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_get_max_length">
+<function name="gtk_text_tag_get_priority">
<description>
-Retrieves the maximum allowed length of the text in
- buffer See gtk_entry_buffer_set_max_length().
+Get the tag priority.
-Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the maximum allowed number of characters
-in #GtkEntryBuffer, or 0 if there is no maximum.
-
+<return> The tag's priority.
</return>
</function>
@@ -22588,22 +21696,24 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_from_widget">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_alignment">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem adding it to the same group as @group.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Sets the alignment of the title or custom widget inside the column header.
+The alignment determines its location inside the button -- 0.0 for left, 0.5
+for center, 1.0 for right.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> An existing #GtkRadioMenuItem
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> The alignment, which is between [0.0 and 1.0] inclusive.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The new #GtkRadioMenuItem
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_action_get_current_value">
@@ -22693,36 +21803,46 @@ within the preedit string.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_validate_yrange">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_can_focus">
<description>
-Ensure that a region of a #GtkTextLayout is valid. The ::changed
-signal will be emitted if any lines are validated.
+Specifies whether @widget can own the input focus. See
+gtk_widget_grab_focus() for actually setting the input focus on a
+widget.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="anchor">
-<parameter_description> iter pointing into a line that will be used as the
-coordinate origin
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y0_">
-<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
-which to begin validation. (The offset here is in pixels
-after validation.)
+<parameter name="can_focus">
+<parameter_description> whether or not @widget can own the input focus.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y1_">
-<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
-which to end validation. (The offset here is in pixels
-after validation.)
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_text">
+<description>
+Retrieves the text displayed superimposed on the progress bar,
+if any, otherwise %NULL. The return value is a reference
+to the text, not a copy of it, so will become invalid
+if you change the text in the progress bar.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> text, or %NULL; this string is owned by the widget
+and should not be modified or freed.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_with_values">
@@ -22816,36 +21936,40 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path">
+<function name="gtk_activatable_get_related_action">
<description>
-Set the accelerator path on @menu_item, through which runtime changes of the
-menu item's accelerator caused by the user can be identified and saved to
-persistant storage (see gtk_accel_map_save() on this).
-To setup a default accelerator for this menu item, call
-gtk_accel_map_add_entry() with the same @accel_path.
-See also gtk_accel_map_add_entry() on the specifics of accelerator paths,
-and gtk_menu_set_accel_path() for a more convenient variant of this function.
+Gets the related #GtkAction for @activatable.
-This function is basically a convenience wrapper that handles calling
-gtk_widget_set_accel_path() with the appropriate accelerator group for
-the menu item.
+Since: 2.16
-Note that you do need to set an accelerator on the parent menu with
-gtk_menu_set_accel_group() for this to work.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the related #GtkAction if one is set.
-Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
-pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
-g_intern_static_string().
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_wrap_width">
+<description>
+Sets the wrap width of @combo_box to be @width. The wrap width is basically
+the preferred number of columns when you want the popup to be layed out
+in a table.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu_item">
-<parameter_description> a valid #GtkMenuItem
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description> accelerator path, corresponding to this menu item's
-functionality, or %NULL to unset the current path.
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> Preferred number of columns
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -22942,36 +22066,6 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_requisition_free">
-<description>
-Frees a #GtkRequisition.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="requisition">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRequisition
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_space">
-<description>
-Adds a new space to the end of the toolbar.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_clipboard_get">
<description>
Returns the clipboard object for the given selection.
@@ -22992,76 +22086,46 @@ owned by GTK+, must not be freed or unreffed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_has_toplevel_focus">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_width">
<description>
-Returns whether the input focus is within this GtkWindow.
-For real toplevel windows, this is identical to gtk_window_is_active(),
-but for embedded windows, like #GtkPlug, the results will differ.
+Returns the current size of @tree_column in pixels.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the input focus is within this GtkWindow
-
+<return> The current width of @tree_column.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_freeze_child_notify">
-<description>
-Stops emission of #GtkWidget::child-notify signals on @widget. The
-signals are queued until gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify() is called
-on @widget.
-
-This is the analogue of g_object_freeze_notify() for child properties.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_button_box_set_child_secondary">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_select_uri">
<description>
-Sets whether @child should appear in a secondary group of children.
-A typical use of a secondary child is the help button in a dialog.
+Selects @uri inside @chooser.
-This group appears after the other children if the style
-is %GTK_BUTTONBOX_START, %GTK_BUTTONBOX_SPREAD or
-%GTK_BUTTONBOX_EDGE, and before the other children if the style
-is %GTK_BUTTONBOX_END. For horizontal button boxes, the definition
-of before/after depends on direction of the widget (see
-gtk_widget_set_direction()). If the style is %GTK_BUTTONBOX_START
-or %GTK_BUTTONBOX_END, then the secondary children are aligned at
-the other end of the button box from the main children. For the
-other styles, they appear immediately next to the main children.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButtonBox
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a child of @widget
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> a URI
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_secondary">
-<parameter_description> if %TRUE, the @child appears in a secondary group of the
-button box.
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for a #GError, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @uri was found.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_label">
@@ -23086,67 +22150,53 @@ been set for @child.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_set_min_slider_size">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_new_with_range">
<description>
-Sets the minimum size of the range's slider.
+This is a convenience constructor that allows creation of a numeric
+#GtkSpinButton without manually creating an adjustment. The value is
+initially set to the minimum value and a page increment of 10 * @step
+is the default. The precision of the spin button is equivalent to the
+precision of @step.
-This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
+Note that the way in which the precision is derived works best if @step
+is a power of ten. If the resulting precision is not suitable for your
+needs, use gtk_spin_button_set_digits() to correct it.
-Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="min_size">
-<parameter_description> The slider's minimum size
+<parameter name="min">
+<parameter_description> Minimum allowable value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_get_widget">
-<description>
-Obtains the widget which corresponds to @path.
-
-If the widget corresponding to @path is a menu item which opens a
-submenu, then the submenu is returned. If you are interested in the menu
-item, use gtk_item_factory_get_item() instead.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
+<parameter name="max">
+<parameter_description> Maximum allowable value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> the path to the widget
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> Increment added or subtracted by spinning the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the widget for the given path, or %NULL if @path doesn't lead
-to a widget
+<return> The new spin button as a #GtkWidget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_state_wildcarded">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_use_underline">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_state_wildcarded().
+Returns whether an embedded underline in the label indicates a
+mnemonic. See gtk_label_set_use_underline().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if this icon source is a base for any widget state variant
+<return> %TRUE whether an embedded underline in the label indicates
+the mnemonic accelerator keys.
</return>
</function>
@@ -23241,6 +22291,26 @@ that somewhat like strcmp() returning 0 for equality
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_list">
+<description>
+Sets an icon list to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
+had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them to set up a
+window-specific icon list. This function allows you to set up the
+icon for all windows in your app at once.
+
+See gtk_window_set_icon_list() for more details.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> (element-type GdkPixbuf) (transfer container) a list of #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkIMMulticontext.
@@ -23357,21 +22427,73 @@ is searched in the current directory.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_file">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_status_string">
<description>
-Makes @status_icon display the file @filename.
-See gtk_status_icon_new_from_file() for details.
+Returns a string representation of the status of the
+print operation. The string is translated and suitable
+for displaying the print status e.g. in a #GtkStatusbar.
-Since: 2.10
+Use gtk_print_operation_get_status() to obtain a status
+value that is suitable for programmatic use.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> a filename
+</parameters>
+<return> a string representation of the status
+of the print operation
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height">
+<description>
+Returns the paper height in units of @unit.
+
+Note that this function takes orientation, but
+not margins into consideration.
+See gtk_page_setup_get_page_height().
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the paper height.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_realized">
+<description>
+Marks the widget as being realized.
+
+This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
+"realize" or "unrealize" implementation.
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="realized">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to mark the widget as realized
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -23519,14 +22641,20 @@ Returns %TRUE if the @tree_column can be reordered by the user.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_unlock">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_select_multiple">
<description>
-Undoes the last call to gtk_accel_group_lock() on this @accel_group.
+Sets whether @chooser can select multiple items.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="select_multiple">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if @chooser can select more than one item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -23574,45 +22702,30 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_iter_is_valid">
+<function name="gtk_container_child_get_property">
<description>
-WARNING: This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing
-purposes.
-
-Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkTreeStore.
-
-Since: 2.2
+Gets the value of a child property for @child and @container.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore.
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the iter is valid, %FALSE if the iter is invalid.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_size_group_new">
-<description>
-Create a new #GtkSizeGroup.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="mode">
-<parameter_description> the mode for the new size group.
+<parameter name="property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the property to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> a location to return the value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly created #GtkSizeGroup
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_attributes_new">
@@ -23646,8 +22759,9 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> array containing information about which forms should be stored
-or %NULL to indicate that all forms should be stored.
+<parameter_description> array containing information about which forms
+should be stored or %NULL to indicate that all forms should
+be stored.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="n_targets">
@@ -23662,7 +22776,7 @@ or %NULL to indicate that all forms should be stored.
<description>
Creates a new #GtkPaned widget.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -23739,6 +22853,36 @@ one way or the other.)
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scale_get_layout_offsets">
+<description>
+Obtains the coordinates where the scale will draw the
+#PangoLayout representing the text in the scale. Remember
+when using the #PangoLayout function you need to convert to
+and from pixels using PANGO_PIXELS() or #PANGO_SCALE.
+
+If the #GtkScale:draw-value property is %FALSE, the return
+values are undefined.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> location to store X offset of layout, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> location to store Y offset of layout, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_iter_copy">
<description>
Creates a dynamically allocated tree iterator as a copy of @iter.
@@ -23759,20 +22903,23 @@ You must free this iter with gtk_tree_iter_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_unblock_activate">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_filter">
<description>
-Reenable activation signals from the action
+Gets the #GtkRecentFilter object currently used by @chooser to affect
+the display of the recently used resources.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GtkRecentFilter object.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_get_tooltip_window">
@@ -23906,6 +23053,27 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_stock">
+<description>
+Creates a status icon displaying a stock icon. Sample stock icon
+names are #GTK_STOCK_OPEN, #GTK_STOCK_QUIT. You can register your
+own stock icon names, see gtk_icon_factory_add_default() and
+gtk_icon_factory_add().
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon id
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_is_cursor_position">
<description>
See gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position() or #PangoLogAttr or
@@ -24081,50 +23249,21 @@ docked horizontally.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_set_visible_horizontal">
-<description>
-Sets whether @action is visible when horizontal
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="visible_horizontal">
-<parameter_description> whether the action is visible horizontally
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_window_set_role">
+<function name="gtk_cell_layout_clear_attributes">
<description>
-This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
-
-In combination with the window title, the window role allows a
-<link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> to identify "the
-same" window when an application is restarted. So for example you
-might set the "toolbox" role on your app's toolbox window, so that
-when the user restarts their session, the window manager can put
-the toolbox back in the same place.
-
-If a window already has a unique title, you don't need to set the
-role, since the WM can use the title to identify the window when
-restoring the session.
+Clears all existing attributes previously set with
+gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="cell_layout">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="role">
-<parameter_description> unique identifier for the window to be used when restoring a session
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -24194,50 +23333,103 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_search_column">
<description>
-Gets the currently-selected font.
+Sets @column as the column where the interactive search code should
+search in for the current model.
+
+If the search column is set, users can use the "start-interactive-search"
+key binding to bring up search popup. The enable-search property controls
+whether simply typing text will also start an interactive search.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name() instead.
+Note that @column refers to a column of the current model. The search
+column is reset to -1 when the model is changed.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fsd">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> the column of the model to search in, or -1 to disable searching
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkFont from the #GtkFontSelection for the
-currently selected font in the dialog, or %NULL if no font is selected
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_old_editable_changed">
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_store">
<description>
-Emits the ::changed signal on @old_editable.
+Stores the current clipboard data somewhere so that it will stay
+around after the application has quit.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="old_editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkOldEditable
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_store">
+<function name="gtk_menu_popup_for_device">
<description>
-Stores the current clipboard data somewhere so that it will stay
-around after the application has quit.
+Displays a menu and makes it available for selection. Applications can use
+this function to display context-sensitive menus, and will typically supply
+%NULL for the @parent_menu_shell, @parent_menu_item, @func and @data
+parameters. The default menu positioning function will position the menu
+at the current position of @device (or its corresponding pointer).
-Since: 2.6
+The @button parameter should be the mouse button pressed to initiate
+the menu popup. If the menu popup was initiated by something other than
+a mouse button press, such as a mouse button release or a keypress,
+ button should be 0.
+
+The @activate_time parameter is used to conflict-resolve initiation of
+concurrent requests for mouse/keyboard grab requests. To function
+properly, this needs to be the time stamp of the user event (such as
+a mouse click or key press) that caused the initiation of the popup.
+Only if no such event is available, gtk_get_current_event_time() can
+be used instead.
+
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenu.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent_menu_shell">
+<parameter_description> the menu shell containing the triggering menu item, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent_menu_item">
+<parameter_description> the menu item whose activation triggered the popup, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> a user supplied function used to position the menu, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> user supplied data to be passed to @func.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the mouse button which was pressed to initiate the event.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="activate_time">
+<parameter_description> the time at which the activation event occurred.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -24263,26 +23455,42 @@ typing.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_entry_skip">
+<function name="gtk_box_pack_start">
<description>
-Install a binding on @binding_set which causes key lookups
-to be aborted, to prevent bindings from lower priority sets
-to be activated.
-
-Since: 2.12
+Adds @child to @box, packed with reference to the start of @box.
+The @child is packed after any other child packed with reference
+to the start of @box.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to skip an entry of
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> key value of binding to skip
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be added to @box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to skip
+<parameter name="expand">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the new child is to be given extra space allocated to
+ box The extra space will be divided evenly between all children of
+ box that use this option
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fill">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if space given to @child by the @expand option is
+actually allocated to @child, rather than just padding it. This
+parameter has no effect if @expand is set to %FALSE. A child is
+always allocated the full height of a #GtkHBox and the full width
+of a #GtkVBox. This option affects the other dimension
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="padding">
+<parameter_description> extra space in pixels to put between this child and its
+neighbors, over and above the global amount specified by
+#GtkBox:spacing property. If @child is a widget at one of the
+reference ends of @box, then @padding pixels are also put between
+ child and the reference edge of @box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -24357,24 +23565,6 @@ Returns %TRUE if @descendant is a descendant of @path.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_plus_button">
-<description>
-Retrieves the plus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the plus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_drag_source_drag_data_get">
<description>
Asks the #GtkTreeDragSource to fill in @selection_data with a
@@ -24402,50 +23592,6 @@ longer found in the model!
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_cursor_positions">
-<description>
-Moves up to @count visible cursor positions. See
-gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_position() for details.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of positions to move
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_cell_layout_clear_attributes">
-<description>
-Clears all existing attributes previously set with
-gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes().
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_layout">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_tag_toggle">
<description>
Moves forward to the next toggle (on or off) of the
@@ -24472,6 +23618,25 @@ if no toggle is found.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query">
+<description>
+Triggers a new tooltip query on @display, in order to update the current
+visible tooltip, or to show/hide the current tooltip. This function is
+useful to call when, for example, the state of the widget changed by a
+key press.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_deserialize_set_can_create_tags">
<description>
Use this function to allow a rich text deserialization function to
@@ -24533,6 +23698,9 @@ since the last time a resize was queued. In general, only container
implementations have this information; applications should use
gtk_widget_size_request().
+
+Deprecated: 3.0: Use gtk_size_request_get_size() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
@@ -24606,6 +23774,28 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_arrow_set">
+<description>
+Sets the direction and style of the #GtkArrow, @arrow.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="arrow">
+<parameter_description> a widget of type #GtkArrow.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="arrow_type">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkArrowType.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkShadowType.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_accel_path">
<description>
Retrieve the accelerator path that was previously set on @menu_item.
@@ -24627,68 +23817,44 @@ functionality, or %NULL if not set
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_markup">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_resolution">
<description>
-Sets @markup as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
-the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
-
-This function will take care of setting #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip to %TRUE
-and of the default handler for the #GtkStatusIcon::query-tooltip signal.
-
-See also the #GtkStatusIcon:tooltip-markup property and
-gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="markup">
-<parameter_description> the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon, or %NULL
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the resolution in dpi
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_hline">
+<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic">
<description>
-Draws a horizontal line from (@x1, @y) to (@x2, @y) in @window
-using the given style and state.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_hline() instead.
+Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem containing a label. The label
+will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
+in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x1">
-<parameter_description> the starting x coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x2">
-<parameter_description> the ending x coordinate
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> group the radio menu item is inside
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y coordinate
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
+mnemonic character
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkRadioMenuItem
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_dialog_new_for_manager">
@@ -24795,6 +23961,30 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_auto_startup_notification">
+<description>
+By default, after showing the first #GtkWindow, GTK+ calls
+gdk_notify_startup_complete(). Call this function to disable
+the automatic startup notification. You might do this if your
+first window is a splash screen, and you want to delay notification
+until after your real main window has been shown, for example.
+
+In that example, you would disable startup notification
+temporarily, show your splash screen, then re-enable it so that
+showing the main window would automatically result in notification.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to automatically do startup notification
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_rc_get_im_module_file">
<description>
Obtains the path to the IM modules file. See the documentation
@@ -24827,39 +24017,48 @@ If the element at @iter is a pixbuf, the pixbuf is returned
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_adjustment">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_width">
<description>
-Replaces the #GtkAdjustment associated with @spin_button.
+Returns the page width in units of @unit.
+
+Note that this function takes orientation and
+margins into consideration.
+See gtk_page_setup_get_paper_width().
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment to replace the existing adjustment
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the page width.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_ensure_style">
+<function name="gtk_printer_get_location">
<description>
-Ensures that @widget has a style (@widget->style). Not a very useful
-function; most of the time, if you want the style, the widget is
-realized, and realized widgets are guaranteed to have a style
-already.
+Returns a description of the location of the printer.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the location of @printer
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_range_set_slider_size_fixed">
@@ -25002,6 +24201,28 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_top_margin">
+<description>
+Gets the default top margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the default top margin
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_font_selection_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkFontSelection.
@@ -25034,6 +24255,29 @@ the mnemonic accelerator key.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_application_create_window">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkWindow for the application.
+
+This function calls the #GtkApplication::create_window() virtual function,
+which can be overridden by sub-classes, for instance to use #GtkBuilder to
+create the user interface. After creating a new #GtkWindow instance, it will
+be added to the list of toplevels associated to the application.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="app">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkApplication
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the newly created application #GtkWindow
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_rc_property_parse_requisition">
<description>
A #GtkRcPropertyParser for use with gtk_settings_install_property_parser()
@@ -25062,23 +24306,19 @@ has been set to the resulting #GtkRequisition.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_age">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_new">
<description>
-Gets the number of days elapsed since the last update of the resource
-pointed by @info.
+Creates a new text buffer.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a tag table, or %NULL to create a new one
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a positive integer containing the number of days elapsed
-since the time this resource was last modified.
-
+<return> a new text buffer
</return>
</function>
@@ -25124,20 +24364,19 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_from_accel_closure">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_prev_page">
<description>
-Finds the #GtkAccelGroup to which @closure is connected;
-see gtk_accel_group_connect().
+Switches to the previous page. Nothing happens if the current page
+is the first page.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="closure">
-<parameter_description> a #GClosure
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkAccelGroup to which @closure is connected, or %NULL.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter">
@@ -25515,36 +24754,6 @@ functionality.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_row_separator_func">
-<description>
-Sets the row separator function, which is used to determine
-whether a row should be drawn as a separator. If the row separator
-function is %NULL, no separators are drawn. This is the default value.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewRowSeparatorFunc
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> user data to pass to @func, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_value">
<description>
Get the value in the @spin_button.
@@ -25561,21 +24770,20 @@ Get the value in the @spin_button.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_lower">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_visibility">
<description>
-Retrieves the minimum value of the adjustment.
+Retrieves whether the text in @entry is visible. See
+gtk_entry_set_visibility().
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The current minimum value of the adjustment.
-
+<return> %TRUE if the text is currently visible
</return>
</function>
@@ -25661,32 +24869,36 @@ may be %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_pop_colormap">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_rules_hint">
<description>
-Removes a colormap pushed with gtk_widget_push_colormap().
+Gets the setting set by gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint().
+
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if rules are useful for the user of this tree
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_copy">
<description>
-Returns the name of the themed icon for the window,
-see gtk_window_set_icon_name().
+Copies an existing #GtkPaperSize.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="other">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the icon name or %NULL if the window has
-no themed icon
+<return> a copy of @other
</return>
</function>
@@ -25729,32 +24941,6 @@ gtk_text_buffer_insert_with_tags() is just a convenience function.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_prepend">
-<description>
-Prepends a new row to @tree_store. If @parent is non-%NULL, then it will prepend
-the new row before the first child of @parent, otherwise it will prepend a row
-to the top level. @iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row
-will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to
-call gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the prepended row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_increments">
<description>
Gets the current step and page the increments used by @spin_button. See
@@ -25778,19 +24964,20 @@ gtk_spin_button_set_increments().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_palette">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_title">
<description>
-Shows and hides the palette based upon the value of @has_palette.
+Sets the menu's title in tearoff mode.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_palette">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if palette is to be visible, %FALSE otherwise.
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> a title for the menu in tearoff mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -25916,7 +25103,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon_widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget that will be used as icon widget, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMisc widget that will be used as icon widget, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -25925,6 +25112,44 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_duplex">
+<description>
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether to print the output in duplex.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_view_set_editable">
+<description>
+Sets the default editability of the #GtkTextView. You can override
+this default setting with tags in the buffer, using the "editable"
+attribute of tags.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> whether it's editable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_set_decorated">
<description>
By default, windows are decorated with a title bar, resize
@@ -26030,44 +25255,6 @@ and should be freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_queue_clear_area">
-<description>
-This function is no longer different from
-gtk_widget_queue_draw_area(), though it once was. Now it just calls
-gtk_widget_queue_draw_area(). Originally
-gtk_widget_queue_clear_area() would force a redraw of the
-background for %GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets, and
-gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() would not. Now both functions ensure
-the background will be redrawn.
-
-Deprecated: 2.2: Use gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x coordinate of upper-left corner of rectangle to redraw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y coordinate of upper-left corner of rectangle to redraw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of region to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height of region to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_accel_groups_from_object">
<description>
Gets a list of all accel groups which are attached to @object.
@@ -26179,30 +25366,24 @@ unrefd.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_drop_item">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_n_copies">
<description>
-Gets the tool item at position (x, y).
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x position
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y position
+<parameter name="num_copies">
+<parameter_description> the number of copies
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkToolItem at position (x, y)
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_image_get_icon_set">
@@ -26231,6 +25412,37 @@ icon size, or %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_im_context_filter_keypress">
+<description>
+Allow the #GtkEntry input method to internally handle key press
+and release events. If this function returns %TRUE, then no further
+processing should be done for this key event. See
+gtk_im_context_filter_keypress().
+
+Note that you are expected to call this function from your handler
+when overriding key event handling. This is needed in the case when
+you need to insert your own key handling between the input method
+and the default key event handling of the #GtkEntry.
+See gtk_text_view_reset_im_context() for an example of use.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the key event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the input method handled the key event.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_has_rc_style">
<description>
Determines if the widget style has been looked up through the rc mechanism.
@@ -26250,6 +25462,29 @@ mechanism, %FALSE otherwise.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_alignment">
+<description>
+Sets the alignment for the contents of the entry. This controls
+the horizontal positioning of the contents when the displayed
+text is shorter than the width of the entry.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> The horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).
+Reversed for RTL layouts
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_cell">
<description>
Sets the tip area of @tooltip to the area which @cell occupies in
@@ -26341,39 +25576,21 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_add_builtin_icon">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_artists">
<description>
-Registers a built-in icon for icon theme lookups. The idea
-of built-in icons is to allow an application or library
-that uses themed icons to function requiring files to
-be present in the file system. For instance, the default
-images for all of GTK+'s stock icons are registered
-as built-icons.
-
-In general, if you use gtk_icon_theme_add_builtin_icon()
-you should also install the icon in the icon theme, so
-that the icon is generally available.
-
-This function will generally be used with pixbufs loaded
-via gdk_pixbuf_new_from_inline().
+Sets the strings which are displayed in the artists tab
+of the secondary credits dialog.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the icon to register
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> the size at which to register the icon (different
-images can be registered for the same icon name
-at different sizes.)
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> #GdkPixbuf that contains the image to use
-for @icon_name.
+<parameter name="artists">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -26429,22 +25646,14 @@ Removes a focus chain explicitly set with gtk_container_set_focus_chain().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_logo_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_widget_reset_shapes">
<description>
-Sets the pixbuf to be displayed as logo in the about dialog.
-If it is %NULL, the default window icon set with
-gtk_window_set_default_icon() will be used.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Recursively resets the shape on this widget and its descendants.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name, or %NULL
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -26544,85 +25753,68 @@ selected. Free with g_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_attributes">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_set_current_page">
<description>
-Sets a #PangoAttrList; the attributes in the list are applied to the
-label text.
+Switches the page to @page_num. Note that this will only be necessary
+in custom buttons, as the @assistant flow can be set with
+gtk_assistant_set_forward_page_func().
-<note><para>The attributes set with this function will be applied
-and merged with any other attributes previously effected by way
-of the #GtkLabel:use-underline or #GtkLabel:use-markup properties.
-While it is not recommended to mix markup strings with manually set
-attributes, if you must; know that the attributes will be applied
-to the label after the markup string is parsed.</para></note>
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="attrs">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoAttrList
+<parameter name="page_num">
+<parameter_description> index of the page to switch to, starting from 0.
+If negative, the last page will be used. If greater
+than the number of pages in the @assistant, nothing
+will be done.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_string">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_set_left_margin">
<description>
-Draws a text string on @window with the given parameters.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_layout() instead.
+Sets the default left margin for text in @text_view.
+Tags in the buffer may override the default.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="string">
-<parameter_description> the string to draw
+<parameter name="left_margin">
+<parameter_description> left margin in pixels
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_set_left_margin">
+<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_style">
<description>
-Sets the default left margin for text in @text_view.
-Tags in the buffer may override the default.
+Retrieves whether the tool shell has text, icons, or both. Tool items must
+not call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_style()
+instead.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="left_margin">
-<parameter_description> left margin in pixels
+<parameter name="shell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the current style of @shell
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_selection_data_set_text">
@@ -26841,28 +26033,21 @@ window.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_window">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_program_name">
<description>
-Sets a widget's window. This function should only be used in a
-widget's GtkWidget::realize() implementation. The %window passed is
-usually either new window created with gdk_window_new(), or the
-window of its parent widget as returned by
-gtk_widget_get_parent_window().
-
-Widgets must indicate whether they will create their own #GdkWindow
-by calling gtk_widget_set_has_window(). This is usually done in the
-widget's init() function.
+Sets the name to display in the about dialog.
+If this is not set, it defaults to g_get_application_name().
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> the program name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -26936,27 +26121,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_expand_to_path">
-<description>
-Expands the row at @path. This will also expand all parent rows of
- path as necessary.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> path to a row.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_table_get_row_spacing">
<description>
Gets the amount of space between row @row, and
@@ -26999,41 +26163,21 @@ See gtk_entry_buffer_set_text().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_orientation">
-<description>
-Retrieves the current orientation of the toolbar. See
-gtk_toolbar_set_orientation().
-
-Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_orientable_get_orientation() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the orientation
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_dither">
+<function name="gtk_widget_queue_resize_no_redraw">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.
+This function works like gtk_widget_queue_resize(),
+except that the widget is not invalidated.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the dithering that is used
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_info_has_application">
@@ -27079,6 +26223,72 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_get_size">
+<description>
+Obtains the current size of @window. If @window is not onscreen,
+it returns the size GTK+ will suggest to the <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> for the initial window
+size (but this is not reliably the same as the size the window
+manager will actually select). The size obtained by
+gtk_window_get_size() is the last size received in a
+#GdkEventConfigure, that is, GTK+ uses its locally-stored size,
+rather than querying the X server for the size. As a result, if you
+call gtk_window_resize() then immediately call
+gtk_window_get_size(), the size won't have taken effect yet. After
+the window manager processes the resize request, GTK+ receives
+notification that the size has changed via a configure event, and
+the size of the window gets updated.
+
+Note 1: Nearly any use of this function creates a race condition,
+because the size of the window may change between the time that you
+get the size and the time that you perform some action assuming
+that size is the current size. To avoid race conditions, connect to
+"configure-event" on the window and adjust your size-dependent
+state to match the size delivered in the #GdkEventConfigure.
+
+Note 2: The returned size does <emphasis>not</emphasis> include the
+size of the window manager decorations (aka the window frame or
+border). Those are not drawn by GTK+ and GTK+ has no reliable
+method of determining their size.
+
+Note 3: If you are getting a window size in order to position
+the window onscreen, there may be a better way. The preferred
+way is to simply set the window's semantic type with
+gtk_window_set_type_hint(), which allows the window manager to
+e.g. center dialogs. Also, if you set the transient parent of
+dialogs with gtk_window_set_transient_for() window managers
+will often center the dialog over its parent window. It's
+much preferred to let the window manager handle these
+things rather than doing it yourself, because all apps will
+behave consistently and according to user prefs if the window
+manager handles it. Also, the window manager can take the size
+of the window decorations/border into account, while your
+application cannot.
+
+In any case, if you insist on application-specified window
+positioning, there's <emphasis>still</emphasis> a better way than
+doing it yourself - gtk_window_set_position() will frequently
+handle the details for you.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> return location for width, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> return location for height, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_rc_reset_styles">
<description>
This function recomputes the styles for all widgets that use a
@@ -27104,56 +26314,48 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_screen">
+<function name="gtk_container_add">
<description>
-Sets the #GdkScreen where the @window is displayed; if
-the window is already mapped, it will be unmapped, and
-then remapped on the new screen.
-
-Since: 2.2
+Adds @widget to @container. Typically used for simple containers
+such as #GtkWindow, #GtkFrame, or #GtkButton; for more complicated
+layout containers such as #GtkBox or #GtkTable, this function will
+pick default packing parameters that may not be correct. So
+consider functions such as gtk_box_pack_start() and
+gtk_table_attach() as an alternative to gtk_container_add() in
+those cases. A widget may be added to only one container at a time;
+you can't place the same widget inside two different containers.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow.
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a widget to be placed inside @container
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_set_translate_func">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_progress_fraction">
<description>
-Sets a function to be used for translating the path elements before they
-are displayed.
+Returns the current fraction of the task that's been completed.
+See gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction().
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkTranslateFunc function to be used to translate path elements
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @func and @notify
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="notify">
-<parameter_description> a #GDestroyNotify function to be called when @ifactory is
-destroyed and when the translation function is changed again
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_tags">
@@ -27196,73 +26398,80 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_select_uri">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_entry">
<description>
-Selects @uri inside @chooser.
+Returns the #GtkEntry which is currently in use as interactive search
+entry for @tree_view. In case the built-in entry is being used, %NULL
+will be returned.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> a URI
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for a #GError, or %NULL
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @uri was found.
+<return> the entry currently in use as search entry.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_delete_entries">
+<function name="gtk_button_box_set_child_secondary">
<description>
-Deletes the menu items which were created from the @entries by the given
-item factory.
+Sets whether @child should appear in a secondary group of children.
+A typical use of a secondary child is the help button in a dialog.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+This group appears after the other children if the style
+is %GTK_BUTTONBOX_START, %GTK_BUTTONBOX_SPREAD or
+%GTK_BUTTONBOX_EDGE, and before the other children if the style
+is %GTK_BUTTONBOX_END. For horizontal button boxes, the definition
+of before/after depends on direction of the widget (see
+gtk_widget_set_direction()). If the style is %GTK_BUTTONBOX_START
+or %GTK_BUTTONBOX_END, then the secondary children are aligned at
+the other end of the button box from the main children. For the
+other styles, they appear immediately next to the main children.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButtonBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> the length of @entries
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a child of @widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry<!-- -->s
+<parameter name="is_secondary">
+<parameter_description> if %TRUE, the @child appears in a secondary group of the
+button box.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_use_underline">
+<function name="gtk_range_set_min_slider_size">
<description>
-Returns whether an embedded underline in the label indicates a
-mnemonic. See gtk_label_set_use_underline().
+Sets the minimum size of the range's slider.
+
+This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="min_size">
+<parameter_description> The slider's minimum size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE whether an embedded underline in the label indicates
-the mnemonic accelerator keys.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_operation_preview_is_selected">
@@ -27307,44 +26516,22 @@ is allowed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_position">
+<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_add">
<description>
-Retrieves the iterator pointing to the character at buffer
-coordinates @x and @y. Buffer coordinates are coordinates for
-the entire buffer, not just the currently-displayed portion.
-If you have coordinates from an event, you have to convert
-those to buffer coordinates with
-gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords().
-
-Note that this is different from gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_location(),
-which returns cursor locations, i.e. positions <emphasis>between</emphasis>
-characters.
+Add a tag to the table. The tag is assigned the highest priority
+in the table.
-Since: 2.6
+ tag must not be in a tag table already, and may not have
+the same name as an already-added tag.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="trailing">
-<parameter_description> if non-%NULL, location to store an integer indicating where
-in the grapheme the user clicked. It will either be
-zero, or the number of characters in the grapheme.
-0 represents the trailing edge of the grapheme.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x position, in buffer coordinates
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y position, in buffer coordinates
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27365,22 +26552,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_prepend_space">
-<description>
-Adds a new space to the beginning of the toolbar.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_example_icon_name">
<description>
Gets the name of an icon that is representative of the
@@ -27402,24 +26573,18 @@ Free with g_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_set_title">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_new">
<description>
-Modifies the @title of the browse dialog used by @button.
+Creates a new #GtkPageSetup.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> the button widget to modify.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> the new browse dialog title.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkPageSetup.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets">
@@ -27505,63 +26670,38 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_box_pack_start">
+<function name="gtk_separator_menu_item_new">
<description>
-Adds @child to @box, packed with reference to the start of @box.
-The @child is packed after any other child packed with reference
-to the start of @box.
+Creates a new #GtkSeparatorMenuItem.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be added to @box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the new child is to be given extra space allocated to
- box The extra space will be divided evenly between all children of
- box that use this option
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fill">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if space given to @child by the @expand option is
-actually allocated to @child, rather than just padding it. This
-parameter has no effect if @expand is set to %FALSE. A child is
-always allocated the full height of a #GtkHBox and the full width
-of a #GtkVBox. This option affects the other dimension
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="padding">
-<parameter_description> extra space in pixels to put between this child and its
-neighbors, over and above the global amount specified by
-#GtkBox:spacing property. If @child is a widget at one of the
-reference ends of @box, then @padding pixels are also put between
- child and the reference edge of @box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkSeparatorMenuItem.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_mnemonic_widget">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_cursor_positions">
<description>
-Retrieves the target of the mnemonic (keyboard shortcut) of this
-label. See gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
+Moves up to @count visible cursor positions. See
+gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_position() for details.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of positions to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the target of the label's mnemonic, or %NULL if none
-has been set and the default algorithm will be used.
+<return> %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -27600,40 +26740,48 @@ mnemonic set up it returns #GDK_VoidSymbol.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_get_location">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_bottom_margin">
<description>
-Returns a description of the location of the printer.
+Sets the bottom margin of the #GtkPageSetup.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="margin">
+<parameter_description> the new bottom margin in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the units for @margin
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the location of @printer
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_bin_get_child">
+<function name="gtk_action_set_gicon">
<description>
-Gets the child of the #GtkBin, or %NULL if the bin contains
-no child widget. The returned widget does not have a reference
-added, so you do not need to unref it.
+Sets the icon of @action.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="bin">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBin
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> the #GIcon to set
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> pointer to child of the #GtkBin
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_icon_widget">
@@ -27677,6 +26825,36 @@ saving during an accelerator map dump).
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_row_separator_func">
+<description>
+Sets the row separator function, which is used to determine
+whether a row should be drawn as a separator. If the row separator
+function is %NULL, no separators are drawn. This is the default value.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewRowSeparatorFunc
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> user data to pass to @func, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_char">
<description>
Moves @iter forward by one character offset. Note that images
@@ -27699,52 +26877,20 @@ convenience when writing loops.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_set_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_get_size">
<description>
-Sets the alignment of the child. This property has no effect unless
-the child is a #GtkMisc or a #GtkAligment.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> the horizontal position of the child, 0.0 is left aligned,
-1.0 is right aligned
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description> the vertical position of the child, 0.0 is top aligned,
-1.0 is bottom aligned
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Returns the size of the table (number of tags)
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_set_model">
-<description>
-Sets the model of @tree_model_sort to be @model. If @model is %NULL,
-then the old model is unset. The sort function is unset as a result
-of this call. The model will be in an unsorted state until a sort
-function is set.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeModelSort.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> number of tags in @table
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_selection_bounds">
@@ -27875,76 +27021,52 @@ the arrow.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_popup_with_data">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_from_file">
<description>
-Pops up the menu constructed from the item factory at (@x, @y). Callbacks
-can access the @popup_data while the menu is posted via
-gtk_item_factory_popup_data() and gtk_item_factory_popup_data_from_widget().
-
-The @mouse_button parameter should be the mouse button pressed to initiate
-the menu popup. If the menu popup was initiated by something other than
-a mouse button press, such as a mouse button release or a keypress,
- mouse_button should be 0.
-
-The @time_ parameter should be the time stamp of the event that
-initiated the popup. If such an event is not available, use
-gtk_get_current_event_time() instead.
-
-The operation of the @mouse_button and the @time_ parameters is the same
-as the @button and @activation_time parameters for gtk_menu_popup().
+Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
+had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them from a file
+on disk. Warns on failure if @err is %NULL.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory of type #GTK_TYPE_MENU (see gtk_item_factory_new())
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="popup_data">
-<parameter_description> data available for callbacks while the menu is posted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> a #GDestroyNotify function to be called on @popup_data when
-the menu is unposted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mouse_button">
-<parameter_description> the mouse button which was pressed to initiate the popup
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> location of icon file
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="time_">
-<parameter_description> the time at which the activation event occurred
+<parameter name="err">
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if setting the icon succeeded.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_program_name">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_window">
<description>
-Sets the name to display in the about dialog.
-If this is not set, it defaults to g_get_application_name().
+Sets a widget's window. This function should only be used in a
+widget's GtkWidget::realize() implementation. The %window passed is
+usually either new window created with gdk_window_new(), or the
+window of its parent widget as returned by
+gtk_widget_get_parent_window().
-Since: 2.12
+Widgets must indicate whether they will create their own #GdkWindow
+by calling gtk_widget_set_has_window(). This is usually done in the
+widget's init() function.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> the program name
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27986,76 +27108,26 @@ Gets the update policy of @range. See gtk_range_set_update_policy().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_chain">
-<description>
-Sets a focus chain, overriding the one computed automatically by GTK+.
-
-In principle each widget in the chain should be a descendant of the
-container, but this is not enforced by this method, since it's allowed
-to set the focus chain before you pack the widgets, or have a widget
-in the chain that isn't always packed. The necessary checks are done
-when the focus chain is actually traversed.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="focusable_widgets">
-<parameter_description> the new focus chain
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_draw_handle">
+<function name="gtk_widget_class_list_style_properties">
<description>
-Draws a handle as used in #GtkHandleBox and #GtkPaned.
+Returns all style properties of a widget class.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_handle() instead.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the handle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the handle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> with of the handle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height of the handle
+<parameter name="klass">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidgetClass
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the orientation of the handle
+<parameter name="n_properties">
+<parameter_description> location to return the number of style properties found
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> an newly allocated array of #GParamSpec*. The array must
+be freed with g_free().
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_orientable_get_orientation">
@@ -28076,28 +27148,6 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_class_list_style_properties">
-<description>
-Returns all style properties of a widget class.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="klass">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidgetClass
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_properties">
-<parameter_description> location to return the number of style properties found
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an newly allocated array of #GParamSpec*. The array must
-be freed with g_free().
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_cell_view_get_model">
<description>
Returns the model for @cell_view. If no model is used %NULL is
@@ -28176,6 +27226,26 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_group_get_current_device_grab">
+<description>
+Returns the current grab widget for @device, or %NULL if none.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindowGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The grab widget, or %NULL
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_pixbuf_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkCellRendererPixbuf. Adjust rendering
@@ -28338,26 +27408,6 @@ to pass in tag names instead of tag objects.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_create_menu_entries">
-<description>
-Creates the menu items from the @entries.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> the length of @entries
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GtkMenuEntry<!-- -->s
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_dest_row_at_pos">
<description>
Determines the destination row for a given position. @drag_x and
@@ -28394,45 +27444,22 @@ is indeed the case.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_set_orientation">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_default">
<description>
-Sets whether a toolbar should appear horizontally or vertically.
+Gets the icon theme for the default screen. See
+gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen().
-Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_orientable_set_orientation() instead.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> a new #GtkOrientation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_current_page">
-<description>
-Sets the current page number. If @current_page is not -1, this enables
-the current page choice for the range of pages to print.
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> A unique #GtkIconTheme associated with
+the default screen. This icon theme is associated with
+the screen and can be used as long as the screen
+is open. Do not ref or unref it.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="current_page">
-<parameter_description> the current page number.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_box_set_spacing">
@@ -28494,36 +27521,21 @@ if it doesn't.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_move_item">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_reorderable">
<description>
-Changes the location of a recently used resource from @uri to @new_uri.
-
-Please note that this function will not affect the resource pointed
-by the URIs, but only the URI used in the recently used resources list.
+Retrieves whether the user can reorder the list via drag-and-drop.
+See gtk_icon_view_set_reorderable().
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> the URI of a recently used resource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_uri">
-<parameter_description> the new URI of the recently used resource, or %NULL to
-remove the item pointed by @uri in the list
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> a return location for a #GError, or %NULL
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success.
+<return> %TRUE if the list can be reordered.
</return>
</function>
@@ -28574,60 +27586,19 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_default">
-<description>
-Gets the icon theme for the default screen. See
-gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen().
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> A unique #GtkIconTheme associated with
-the default screen. This icon theme is associated with
-the screen and can be used as long as the screen
-is open. Do not ref or unref it.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_set_add_source">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_use_underline">
<description>
-Icon sets have a list of #GtkIconSource, which they use as base
-icons for rendering icons in different states and sizes. Icons are
-scaled, made to look insensitive, etc. in
-gtk_icon_set_render_icon(), but #GtkIconSet needs base images to
-work with. The base images and when to use them are described by
-a #GtkIconSource.
-
-This function copies @source, so you can reuse the same source immediately
-without affecting the icon set.
-
-An example of when you'd use this function: a web browser's "Back
-to Previous Page" icon might point in a different direction in
-Hebrew and in English; it might look different when insensitive;
-and it might change size depending on toolbar mode (small/large
-icons). So a single icon set would contain all those variants of
-the icon, and you might add a separate source for each one.
-
-You should nearly always add a "default" icon source with all
-fields wildcarded, which will be used as a fallback if no more
-specific source matches. #GtkIconSet always prefers more specific
-icon sources to more generic icon sources. The order in which you
-add the sources to the icon set does not matter.
-
-gtk_icon_set_new_from_pixbuf() creates a new icon set with a
-default icon source based on the given pixbuf.
+If true, an underline in the text indicates the next character should be
+used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -28659,23 +27630,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_visibility">
-<description>
-Retrieves whether the text in @entry is visible. See
-gtk_entry_set_visibility().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the text is currently visible
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_current_uri">
<description>
Gets the URI currently selected by @chooser.
@@ -28741,62 +27695,43 @@ Returns whether the statusbar has a resize grip.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_factory_remove_default">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_update_policy">
<description>
-Removes an icon factory from the list of default icon
-factories. Not normally used; you might use it for a library that
-can be unloaded or shut down.
+Sets the update behavior of a spin button. This determines whether the
+spin button is always updated or only when a valid value is set.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="factory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory previously added with gtk_icon_factory_add_default()
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="policy">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButtonUpdatePolicy value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_text_orientation">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_icons">
<description>
-Retrieves the current text orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
-call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_text_orientation()
-instead.
+Retrieves whether @chooser should show an icon near the resource.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="shell">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current text orientation of @shell
+<return> %TRUE if the icons should be displayed, %FALSE otherwise.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_calendar_display_options">
-<description>
-Sets display options (whether to display the heading and the month headings).
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_calendar_set_display_options() instead
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> the display options to set.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_action_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkAction object. To add the action to a
@@ -28832,6 +27767,35 @@ action, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_iter_to_iter">
+<description>
+Sets @filter_iter to point to the row in @filter that corresponds to the
+row pointed at by @child_iter. If @filter_iter was not set, %FALSE is
+returned.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filter_iter">
+<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child_iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row on the child model.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE, if @filter_iter was set, i.e. if @child_iter is a
+valid iterator pointing to a visible row in child model.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_layout_validate">
<description>
Validate regions of a #GtkTextLayout. The ::changed signal will
@@ -28907,68 +27871,53 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_ui">
+<function name="gtk_widget_add_device_events">
<description>
-Creates a <link linkend="XML-UI">UI definition</link> of the merged UI.
+Adds the device events in the bitfield @events to the event mask for
+ widget See gtk_widget_set_device_events() for details.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated string containing an XML representation of
-the merged UI.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_view_backward_display_line_start">
-<description>
-Moves the given @iter backward to the next display line start.
-A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
-separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
-Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
-wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
-same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
-they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
-views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="events">
+<parameter_description> an event mask, see #GdkEventMask
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_selection_get_select_multiple">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_label">
<description>
-Determines whether or not the user is allowed to select multiple files in
-the file list. See gtk_file_selection_set_select_multiple().
-
+Changes the tab label for @child. If %NULL is specified
+for @tab_label, then the page will have the label 'page N'.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filesel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSelection
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the page
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tab_label">
+<parameter_description> the tab label widget to use, or %NULL for default tab
+label.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the user is allowed to select multiple files in the
-file list
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_user_data">
@@ -29006,45 +27955,31 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_starts_display_line">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_requisition">
<description>
-Determines whether @iter is at the start of a display line.
-See gtk_text_view_forward_display_line() for an explanation of
-display lines vs. paragraphs.
-
+Retrieves the widget's requisition.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter begins a wrapped line
-</return>
-</function>
+This function should only be used by widget implementations in
+order to figure whether the widget's requisition has actually
+changed after some internal state change (so that they can call
+gtk_widget_queue_resize() instead of gtk_widget_queue_draw()).
-<function name="gtk_window_group_list_windows">
-<description>
-Returns a list of the #GtkWindows that belong to @window_group.
+Normally, gtk_widget_size_request() should be used.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindowGroup
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="requisition">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkRequisition to copy to
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly-allocated list of
-windows inside the group.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_get_menu">
@@ -29106,6 +28041,33 @@ with the widget.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement">
+<description>
+Sets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
+for the scrolled window.
+
+The default is %GTK_CORNER_TOP_LEFT, meaning the child is
+in the top left, with the scrollbars underneath and to the right.
+Other values in #GtkCornerType are %GTK_CORNER_TOP_RIGHT,
+%GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT, and %GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT.
+
+See also gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement() and
+gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window_placement">
+<parameter_description> position of the child window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify">
<description>
Reverts the effect of a previous call to gtk_widget_freeze_child_notify().
@@ -29345,113 +28307,76 @@ gtk_frame_set_label_widget().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accelerator_name">
+<function name="gtk_init_with_args">
<description>
-Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask
-into a string parseable by gtk_accelerator_parse().
-For example, if you pass in #GDK_q and #GDK_CONTROL_MASK,
-this function returns "<Control>q".
-
-If you need to display accelerators in the user interface,
-see gtk_accelerator_get_label().
+This function does the same work as gtk_init_check().
+Additionally, it allows you to add your own commandline options,
+and it automatically generates nicely formatted
+<option>--help</option> output. Note that your program will
+be terminated after writing out the help output.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accelerator_key">
-<parameter_description> accelerator keyval
+<parameter name="argc">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to the number of command line arguments.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accelerator_mods">
-<parameter_description> accelerator modifier mask
+<parameter name="argv">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to the array of command line arguments.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parameter_string">
+<parameter_description> a string which is displayed in
+the first line of <option>--help</option> output, after
+<literal><replaceable>programname</replaceable> [OPTION...]</literal>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of #GOptionEntry<!-- -->s
+describing the options of your program
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="translation_domain">
+<parameter_description> a translation domain to use for translating
+the <option>--help</option> output for the options in @entries
+with gettext(), or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> a return location for errors
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated accelerator name
+<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
+%FALSE otherwise.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_parse_geometry">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_size">
<description>
-Parses a standard X Window System geometry string - see the
-manual page for X (type 'man X') for details on this.
-gtk_window_parse_geometry() does work on all GTK+ ports
-including Win32 but is primarily intended for an X environment.
-
-If either a size or a position can be extracted from the
-geometry string, gtk_window_parse_geometry() returns %TRUE
-and calls gtk_window_set_default_size() and/or gtk_window_move()
-to resize/move the window.
-
-If gtk_window_parse_geometry() returns %TRUE, it will also
-set the #GDK_HINT_USER_POS and/or #GDK_HINT_USER_SIZE hints
-indicating to the window manager that the size/position of
-the window was user-specified. This causes most window
-managers to honor the geometry.
-
-Note that for gtk_window_parse_geometry() to work as expected, it has
-to be called when the window has its "final" size, i.e. after calling
-gtk_widget_show_all() on the contents and gtk_window_set_geometry_hints()
-on the window.
-|[
-#include <gtk/gtk.h>
-
-static void
-fill_with_content (GtkWidget *vbox)
-{
-/ * fill with content... * /
-}
-
-int
-main (int argc, char *argv[])
-{
-GtkWidget *window, *vbox;
-GdkGeometry size_hints = {
-100, 50, 0, 0, 100, 50, 10, 10, 0.0, 0.0, GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST
-};
-
-gtk_init (&argc, &argv);
-
-window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
-vbox = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 0);
-
-gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), vbox);
-fill_with_content (vbox);
-gtk_widget_show_all (vbox);
-
-gtk_window_set_geometry_hints (GTK_WINDOW (window),
-window,
-&size_hints,
-GDK_HINT_MIN_SIZE |
-GDK_HINT_BASE_SIZE |
-GDK_HINT_RESIZE_INC);
-
-if (argc > 1)
-{
-if (!gtk_window_parse_geometry (GTK_WINDOW (window), argv[1]))
-fprintf (stderr, "Failed to parse '%s'\n", argv[1]);
-}
-
-gtk_widget_show_all (window);
-gtk_main ();
+Gets the size in pixels that is available for the image.
+Stock icons and named icons adapt their size automatically
+if the size of the notification area changes. For other
+storage types, the size-changed signal can be used to
+react to size changes.
-return 0;
-}
-]|
+Note that the returned size is only meaningful while the
+status icon is embedded (see gtk_status_icon_is_embedded()).
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="geometry">
-<parameter_description> geometry string
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if string was parsed successfully
+<return> the size that is available for the image
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -29513,6 +28438,24 @@ page in the notebook
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_previous_color">
+<description>
+Fills @color in with the original color value.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the original color value.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_target_list_add_text_targets">
<description>
Appends the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
@@ -29603,31 +28546,22 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_model">
<description>
-Sets the area of the widget, where the contents of this tooltip apply,
-to be @rect (in widget coordinates). This is especially useful for
-properly setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView rows and cells, #GtkIconViews,
-etc.
-
-For setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView, please refer to the convenience
-functions for this: gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row() and
-gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_cell().
+Returns the #GtkTreeModel which is acting as data source for @combo_box.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="rect">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GtkTreeModel which was passed during construction.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_paper_size">
@@ -29825,21 +28759,20 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_job_get_title">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_buffer">
<description>
-Gets the job title.
+Gets the text buffer used by the layout. See
+gtk_text_layout_set_buffer().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="job">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintJob
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the title of @job
-
+<return> the text buffer used by the layout.
</return>
</function>
@@ -29880,25 +28813,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_fixed_get_has_window">
-<description>
-Gets whether the #GtkFixed has its own #GdkWindow.
-See gtk_fixed_set_has_window().
-
-Deprecated: 2.20: Use gtk_widget_get_has_window() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="fixed">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @fixed has its own window.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_popup_set_width">
<description>
Returns whether the completion popup window will be resized to the
@@ -29990,56 +28904,25 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_layout">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_create_row_drag_icon">
<description>
-Draws a layout on @window using the given parameters.
+Creates a #GdkPixmap representation of the row at @path.
+This image is used for a drag icon.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_text">
-<parameter_description> whether to use the text or foreground
-graphics context of @style
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> the layout to draw
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath in @tree_view
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a newly-allocated pixmap of the drag icon.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_current_page">
@@ -30067,6 +28950,31 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_select_filename">
+<description>
+Selects a filename. If the file name isn't in the current
+folder of @chooser, then the current folder of @chooser will
+be changed to the folder containing @filename.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> the filename to select
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the file was
+selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_color_button_get_use_alpha">
<description>
Does the color selection dialog use the alpha channel?
@@ -30104,6 +29012,31 @@ and must not be modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_use_full_page">
+<description>
+If @full_page is %TRUE, the transformation for the cairo context
+obtained from #GtkPrintContext puts the origin at the top left
+corner of the page (which may not be the top left corner of the
+sheet, depending on page orientation and the number of pages per
+sheet). Otherwise, the origin is at the top left corner of the
+imageable area (i.e. inside the margins).
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="full_page">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to set up the #GtkPrintContext for the full page
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_line_at_y">
<description>
Gets the #GtkTextIter at the start of the line containing
@@ -30146,6 +29079,27 @@ Creates a new toolbar.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_set_model">
+<description>
+Sets the model of @tree_model_sort to be @model. If @model is %NULL,
+then the old model is unset. The sort function is unset as a result
+of this call. The model will be in an unsorted state until a sort
+function is set.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeModelSort.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name">
<description>
Sets the currently selected font.
@@ -30245,22 +29199,23 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_rebuild_menu">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_active_iter">
<description>
-Calling this function signals to the toolbar that the
-overflow menu item for @tool_item has changed. If the
-overflow menu is visible when this function it called,
-the menu will be rebuilt.
+Sets the current active item to be the one referenced by @iter, or
+unsets the active item if @iter is %NULL.
-The function must be called when the tool item changes what it
-will do in response to the #GtkToolItem::create-menu-proxy signal.
+ iter must correspond to a path of depth one, or be %NULL.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -30374,30 +29329,34 @@ should be ellipsized.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_text">
+<function name="gtk_print_error_quark">
<description>
-Inserts an action in @completion's action item list at position @index_
-with text @text. If you want the action item to have markup, use
-gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_markup().
+Registers an error quark for #GtkPrintOperation if necessary.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="index_">
-<parameter_description> The index of the item to insert.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> Text of the item to insert.
+</parameters>
+<return> The error quark used for #GtkPrintOperation errors.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_equal_func">
+<description>
+Returns the compare function currently in use.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the currently used compare function for the search code.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties">
@@ -30458,32 +29417,6 @@ positive moves right)
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_box_pack_end_defaults">
-<description>
-Adds @widget to @box, packed with reference to the end of @box.
-The child is packed after any other child packed with reference
-to the start of @box.
-
-Parameters for how to pack the child @widget, #GtkBox:expand,
-#GtkBox:fill and #GtkBox:padding, are given their default
-values, %TRUE, %TRUE, and 0, respectively.
-
-Deprecated: 2.14: Use gtk_box_pack_end()
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be added to @box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_statusbar_pop">
<description>
Removes the first message in the #GtkStatusBar's stack
@@ -30507,22 +29440,24 @@ context id.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_mount_operation_new">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_scale">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkMountOperation
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> transient parent of the window, or %NULL
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> the scale in percent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkMountOperation
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_clipboard_get_display">
@@ -30640,45 +29575,18 @@ used.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_complete">
<description>
-Adds a child at fixed coordinates in one of the text widget's
-windows. The window must have nonzero size (see
-gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()). Note that the child
-coordinates are given relative to the #GdkWindow in question, and
-that these coordinates have no sane relationship to scrolling. When
-placing a child in #GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET, scrolling is
-irrelevant, the child floats above all scrollable areas. But when
-placing a child in one of the scrollable windows (border windows or
-text window), you'll need to compute the child's correct position
-in buffer coordinates any time scrolling occurs or buffer changes
-occur, and then call gtk_text_view_move_child() to update the
-child's position. Unfortunately there's no good way to detect that
-scrolling has occurred, using the current API; a possible hack
-would be to update all child positions when the scroll adjustments
-change or the text buffer changes. See bug 64518 on
-bugzilla.gnome.org for status of fixing this issue.
+Requests a completion operation, or in other words a refiltering of the
+current list with completions, using the current key. The completion list
+view will be updated accordingly.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="which_window">
-<parameter_description> which window the child should appear in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xpos">
-<parameter_description> X position of child in window coordinates
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ypos">
-<parameter_description> Y position of child in window coordinates
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -30811,14 +29719,11 @@ The value will be copied or referenced by the store if appropriate.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_widget_unparent">
<description>
-Returns the clipboard object for the given selection to
-be used with @widget. @widget must have a #GdkDisplay
-associated with it, so must be attached to a toplevel
-window.
-
-Since: 2.2
+This function is only for use in widget implementations.
+Should be called by implementations of the remove method
+on #GtkContainer, to dissociate a child from the container.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -30826,35 +29731,8 @@ Since: 2.2
<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkAtom which identifies the clipboard
-to use. %GDK_SELECTION_CLIPBOARD gives the
-default clipboard. Another common value
-is %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY, which gives
-the primary X selection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the appropriate clipboard object. If no
-clipboard already exists, a new one will
-be created. Once a clipboard object has
-been created, it is persistent for all time.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new ui manager object.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
</parameters>
-<return> a new ui manager object.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_dest">
@@ -30903,6 +29781,32 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_lines">
+<description>
+Moves @count lines backward, if possible (if @count would move
+past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
+the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
+onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
+moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
+the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
+moves forward by 0 - @count lines.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of lines to move backward
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_scrollable">
<description>
Returns whether the tab label area has arrows for scrolling. See
@@ -30931,7 +29835,7 @@ Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="panede">
+<parameter name="paned">
<parameter_description> a #GtkPaned
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -30941,22 +29845,20 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_n_copies">
<description>
-Creates a status icon displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
-If the current icon theme is changed, the icon will be updated
-appropriately.
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+<return> the number of copies to print
</return>
</function>
@@ -31043,23 +29945,24 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_opacity_control">
+<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_text_orientation">
<description>
-Sets the @colorsel to use or not use opacity.
+Retrieves the current text orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
+call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_text_orientation()
+instead.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_opacity">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if @colorsel can set the opacity, %FALSE otherwise.
+<parameter name="shell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the current text orientation of @shell
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_iter_is_selected">
@@ -31082,27 +29985,6 @@ Returns %TRUE if the row at @iter is currently selected.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_settings">
-<description>
-Gets a new #GtkPrintSettings object that represents the
-current values in the print dialog. Note that this creates a
-<emphasis>new object</emphasis>, and you need to unref it
-if don't want to keep it.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPrintSettings object with the values from @dialog
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_word_end">
<description>
Moves forward to the next visible word end. (If @iter is currently on a
@@ -31231,59 +30113,26 @@ just get the mark onscreen)
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_new_with_max_length">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkEntry widget with the given maximum length.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_entry_set_max_length() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="max">
-<parameter_description> the maximum length of the entry, or 0 for no maximum.
-(other than the maximum length of entries.) The value passed in will
-be clamped to the range 0-65536.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkEntry
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_double_buffered">
+<function name="gtk_style_lookup_icon_set">
<description>
-Widgets are double buffered by default; you can use this function
-to turn off the buffering. "Double buffered" simply means that
-gdk_window_begin_paint_region() and gdk_window_end_paint() are called
-automatically around expose events sent to the
-widget. gdk_window_begin_paint() diverts all drawing to a widget's
-window to an offscreen buffer, and gdk_window_end_paint() draws the
-buffer to the screen. The result is that users see the window
-update in one smooth step, and don't see individual graphics
-primitives being rendered.
-
-In very simple terms, double buffered widgets don't flicker,
-so you would only use this function to turn off double buffering
-if you had special needs and really knew what you were doing.
+Looks up @stock_id in the icon factories associated with @style
+and the default icon factory, returning an icon set if found,
+otherwise %NULL.
-Note: if you turn off double-buffering, you have to handle
-expose events, since even the clearing to the background color or
-pixmap will not happen automatically (as it is done in
-gdk_window_begin_paint()).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="double_buffered">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to double-buffer a widget
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> icon set of @stock_id
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_side_image">
@@ -31311,24 +30160,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_vborder">
-<description>
-Sets the width of the vertical border of tab labels.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tab_vborder">
-<parameter_description> width of the vertical border of tab labels.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_target_list_add_image_targets">
<description>
Appends the image targets supported by #GtkSelection to
@@ -31393,33 +30224,56 @@ is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accelerator_get_default_mod_mask">
-<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_accelerator_set_default_mod_mask().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> the default accelerator modifier mask
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_label_widget">
+<function name="gtk_paint_diamond">
<description>
-Sets the label of the tool item group.
-The label widget is displayed in the header of the group, in place
-of the usual label.
-
-Since: 2.20
+Draws a diamond in the given rectangle on @window using the given
+parameters.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="label_widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget to be displayed in place of the usual label
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> height of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -31466,42 +30320,6 @@ for array of sizes
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_orientation">
-<description>
-Gets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the page orientation
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_font">
-<description>
-Gets the currently-selected font.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_font_selection_get_font_name() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="fontsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GdkFont.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_cell">
<description>
Moves the alignments of @tree_view to the position specified by @column and
@@ -31563,49 +30381,47 @@ Creates a new #GtkTreePath. This structure refers to a row.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_option">
+<function name="gtk_size_request_is_height_for_width">
<description>
-Draws a radio button indicator in the given rectangle on @window with
-the given parameters.
+Gets whether the widget prefers a height-for-width layout
+or a width-for-height layout.
+
+<note><para>#GtkBin widgets generally propagate the preference of
+their child, container widgets need to request something either in
+context of their children or in context of their allocation
+capabilities.</para></note>
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_option() instead.
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the option in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the option in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle to draw the option in
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeRequest instance
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle to draw the option in
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the widget prefers height-for-width, %FALSE if
+the widget should be treated with a width-for-height preference.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_hadjustment">
+<description>
+Gets the horizontal-scrolling #GtkAdjustment.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> pointer to the horizontal #GtkAdjustment
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_set_use_stock">
@@ -31629,28 +30445,6 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_info_new_for_pixbuf">
-<description>
-Creates a #GtkIconInfo for a #GdkPixbuf.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> the pixbuf to wrap in a #GtkIconInfo
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkIconInfo
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_detachable">
<description>
Returns whether the tab contents can be detached from @notebook.
@@ -31714,23 +30508,6 @@ to a stock icon.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_justification">
-<description>
-Gets the default justification of paragraphs in @text_view.
-Tags in the buffer may override the default.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> default justification
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_buildable_custom_tag_end">
<description>
This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
@@ -31764,73 +30541,120 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_new">
+<function name="gtk_widget_send_expose">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCellRendererToggle. Adjust rendering
-parameters using object properties. Object properties can be set
-globally (with g_object_set()). Also, with #GtkTreeViewColumn, you
-can bind a property to a value in a #GtkTreeModel. For example, you
-can bind the "active" property on the cell renderer to a boolean value
-in the model, thus causing the check button to reflect the state of
-the model.
+Very rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
+an expose event signals on a widget. This function is not
+normally used directly. The only time it is used is when
+propagating an expose event to a child %NO_WINDOW widget, and
+that is normally done using gtk_container_propagate_expose().
+
+If you want to force an area of a window to be redrawn,
+use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() or gdk_window_invalidate_region().
+To cause the redraw to be done immediately, follow that call
+with a call to gdk_window_process_updates().
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a expose #GdkEvent
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new cell renderer
+<return> return from the event signal emission (%TRUE if
+the event was handled)
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_foreach">
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement">
<description>
-Calls @func for each key-value pair of @settings.
+Unsets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
+for the scrolled window. If no window placement is set for a scrolled
+window, it obeys the "gtk-scrolled-window-placement" XSETTING.
+
+See also gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement() and
+gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement().
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> (scope call) the function to call
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_menu_set_screen">
+<description>
+Sets the #GdkScreen on which the menu will be displayed.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenu.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data for @func
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen, or %NULL if the screen should be
+determined by the widget the menu is attached to.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_visible_range">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_added">
<description>
-Sets @start_path and @end_path to be the first and last visible path.
-Note that there may be invisible paths in between.
-
-Both paths should be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() after use.
+Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
+was added to the recently used resources list.
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_path">
-<parameter_description> Return location for start of region, or %NULL
+</parameters>
+<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
+the resource was added to the list, or -1 on failure.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_path_to_path">
+<description>
+Converts @child_path to a path relative to @filter. That is, @child_path
+points to a path in the child model. The rerturned path will point to the
+same row in the filtered model. If @child_path isn't a valid path on the
+child model or points to a row which is not visible in @filter, then %NULL
+is returned.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end_path">
-<parameter_description> Return location for end of region, or %NULL
+<parameter name="child_path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if valid paths were placed in @start_path and @end_path
+<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
</return>
</function>
@@ -31890,29 +30714,27 @@ or %NULL if the mark is deleted.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_rc_parse_color">
+<function name="gtk_button_set_image">
<description>
-Parses a color in the <link linkend="color=format">format</link> expected
-in a RC file.
-
-Note that theme engines should use gtk_rc_parse_color_full() in
-order to support symbolic colors.
+Set the image of @button to the given widget. Note that
+it depends on the #GtkSettings:gtk-button-images setting whether the
+image will be displayed or not, you don't have to call
+gtk_widget_show() on @image yourself.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scanner">
-<parameter_description> a #GScanner
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GdkColor structure in which to store the result
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a widget to set as the image for the button
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %G_TOKEN_NONE if parsing succeeded, otherwise the token
-that was expected but not found
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_cursor_visible">
@@ -31932,21 +30754,26 @@ shown, even if the text is editable.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_can_focus">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_gicon">
<description>
-Determines whether @widget can own the input focus. See
-gtk_widget_set_can_focus().
+Retrieves the #GIcon being displayed by the #GtkStatusIcon.
+The storage type of the status icon must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
+%GTK_IMAGE_GICON (see gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type()).
+The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
+returned #GIcon.
-Since: 2.18
+If this function fails, @icon is left unchanged;
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @widget can own the input focus, %FALSE otherwise
+<return> the displayed icon, or %NULL if the image is empty
</return>
</function>
@@ -32012,42 +30839,68 @@ the anchor, so you can unref it after insertion.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_row_changed">
+<function name="gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic_for_style">
<description>
-Emits the "row-changed" signal on @tree_model.
+Loads an icon, modifying it to match the system colours for the foreground,
+success, warning and error colors provided. If the icon is not a symbolic
+one, the function will return the result from gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
+
+This allows loading symbolic icons that will match the system theme.
+
+See gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic() for more details.
+
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
+<parameter name="icon_info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath pointing to the changed row
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle to take the colors from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to the changed row
+<parameter name="state">
+<parameter_description> the widget state to use for colors
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="was_symbolic">
+<parameter_description> a #gboolean, returns whether the loaded icon
+was a symbolic one and whether the @fg color was applied to it.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> location to store error information on failure,
+or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GdkPixbuf representing the loaded icon
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_progress_bar_new_with_adjustment">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_row_changed">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkProgressBar with an associated #GtkAdjustment.
-
+Emits the "row-changed" signal on @tree_model.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath pointing to the changed row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to the changed row
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkProgressBar.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_get_context_id">
@@ -32229,31 +31082,27 @@ Copies a stock item, mostly useful for language bindings and not in applications
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_expander_get_label">
+<function name="gtk_image_new_from_icon_name">
<description>
-Fetches the text from a label widget including any embedded
-underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup, as set by
-gtk_expander_set_label(). If the label text has not been set the
-return value will be %NULL. This will be the case if you create an
-empty button with gtk_button_new() to use as a container.
-
-Note that this function behaved differently in versions prior to
-2.14 and used to return the label text stripped of embedded
-underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup. This problem can
-be avoided by fetching the label text directly from the label
-widget.
+Creates a #GtkImage displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
+If the icon name isn't known, a "broken image" icon will be
+displayed instead. If the current icon theme is changed, the icon
+will be updated appropriately.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="expander">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The text of the label widget. This string is owned
-by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
+<return> a new #GtkImage displaying the themed icon
</return>
</function>
@@ -32386,26 +31235,23 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_bottom_margin">
+<function name="gtk_icon_factory_add_default">
<description>
-Gets the default bottom margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Adds an icon factory to the list of icon factories searched by
+gtk_style_lookup_icon_set(). This means that, for example,
+gtk_image_new_from_stock() will be able to find icons in @factory.
+There will normally be an icon factory added for each library or
+application that comes with icons. The default icon factories
+can be overridden by themes.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="factory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default bottom margin
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_label_get_label">
@@ -32489,25 +31335,34 @@ in the buffer may override the default.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_get_hadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_do_overwrite_confirmation">
<description>
-This function should only be called after the layout has been
-placed in a #GtkScrolledWindow or otherwise configured for
-scrolling. It returns the #GtkAdjustment used for communication
-between the horizontal scrollbar and @layout.
+Sets whether a file chooser in %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode will present
+a confirmation dialog if the user types a file name that already exists. This
+is %FALSE by default.
-See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
+Regardless of this setting, the @chooser will emit the
+#GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite signal when appropriate.
+
+If all you need is the stock confirmation dialog, set this property to %TRUE.
+You can override the way confirmation is done by actually handling the
+#GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite signal; please refer to its documentation
+for the details.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="do_overwrite_confirmation">
+<parameter_description> whether to confirm overwriting in save mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> horizontal scroll adjustment
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_print_pages">
@@ -32594,39 +31449,36 @@ Creates a new #GtkNotebook widget with no pages.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_keep_below">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_cursor">
<description>
-Asks to keep @window below, so that it stays in bottom. Note that
-you shouldn't assume the window is definitely below afterward,
-because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could not keep it below,
-and not all window managers support putting windows below. But
-normally the window will be kept below. Just don't write code
-that crashes if not.
-
-It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
-in which case the window will be kept below when it appears onscreen
-initially.
-
-You can track the below state via the "window-state-event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
-
-Note that, according to the <ulink
-url="http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec">Extended Window
-Manager Hints</ulink> specification, the above state is mainly meant
-for user preferences and should not be used by applications e.g. for
-drawing attention to their dialogs.
+Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @path, and selects it. This is
+useful when you want to focus the user's attention on a particular row. If
+ focus_column is not %NULL, then focus is given to the column specified by
+it. Additionally, if @focus_column is specified, and @start_editing is
+%TRUE, then editing should be started in the specified cell.
+This function is often followed by @gtk_widget_grab_focus (@tree_view)
+in order to give keyboard focus to the widget. Please note that editing
+can only happen when the widget is realized.
-Since: 2.4
+If @path is invalid for @model, the current cursor (if any) will be unset
+and the function will return without failing.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> whether to keep @window below other windows
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="focus_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start_editing">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the specified cell should start being edited.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -32883,15 +31735,21 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_socket_new">
+<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_plus_button">
<description>
-Create a new empty #GtkSocket.
+Retrieves the plus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkSocket.
+<return> the plus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -32915,22 +31773,21 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_filename">
+<function name="gtk_printer_get_icon_name">
<description>
-Retrieves the source filename, or %NULL if none is set. The
-filename is not a copy, and should not be modified or expected to
-persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
+Gets the name of the icon to use for the printer.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> image filename. This string must not be modified
-or freed.
+<return> the icon name for @printer
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -32962,27 +31819,24 @@ user collapses a row, or a row is deleted.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_justify">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_has_tag">
<description>
-Sets the alignment of the lines in the text of the label relative to
-each other. %GTK_JUSTIFY_LEFT is the default value when the
-widget is first created with gtk_label_new(). If you instead want
-to set the alignment of the label as a whole, use
-gtk_misc_set_alignment() instead. gtk_label_set_justify() has no
-effect on labels containing only a single line.
+Returns %TRUE if @iter is within a range tagged with @tag.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="jtype">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkJustification
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether @iter is tagged with @tag
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_double">
@@ -33073,21 +31927,26 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_valid">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_fixed_size">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if the @reference is non-%NULL and refers to a current valid
-path.
-
+Sets the renderer size to be explicit, independent of the properties set.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="reference">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the cell renderer, or -1
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the cell renderer, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @reference points to a valid path.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_cursor_positions">
@@ -33204,44 +32063,114 @@ gtk_widget_set_style() and go back to the default style
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_is_toplevel">
+<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_selected_rows">
<description>
-Determines whether @widget is a toplevel widget. Currently only
-#GtkWindow and #GtkInvisible are toplevel widgets. Toplevel
-widgets have no parent widget.
+Creates a list of path of all selected rows. Additionally, if you are
+planning on modifying the model after calling this function, you may
+want to convert the returned list into a list of #GtkTreeRowReference<!-- -->s.
+To do this, you can use gtk_tree_row_reference_new().
-Since: 2.18
+To free the return value, use:
+|[
+g_list_foreach (list, (GFunc) gtk_tree_path_free, NULL);
+g_list_free (list);
+]|
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to set to the #GtkTreeModel, or NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @widget is a toplevel, %FALSE otherwise
+<return> A #GList containing a #GtkTreePath for each selected row.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_upper">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_insert_column_with_attributes">
<description>
-Retrieves the maximum value of the adjustment.
+Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn and inserts it into the @tree_view at
+ position If @position is -1, then the newly created column is inserted at
+the end. The column is initialized with the attributes given. If @tree_view
+has "fixed_height" mode enabled, then the new column will have its sizing
+property set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> The position to insert the new column in.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> The title to set the header to.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkCellRenderer.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> A %NULL-terminated list of attributes.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The current maximum value of the adjustment.
+<return> The number of columns in @tree_view after insertion.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_lookup">
+<description>
+Look up a named tag.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> name of a tag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The tag, or %NULL if none by that name is in the table.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_device_grab_remove">
+<description>
+Removes a device grab from the given widget. You have to pair calls
+to gtk_device_grab_add() and gtk_device_grab_remove().
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_accel_group_disconnect">
<description>
Removes an accelerator previously installed through
@@ -33305,6 +32234,29 @@ fill any extra space.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_support_multidevice">
+<description>
+Enables or disables multiple pointer awareness. If this setting is %TRUE,
+ widget will start receiving multiple, per device enter/leave events. Note
+that if custom #GdkWindow<!-- -->s are created in #GtkWidget::realize,
+gdk_window_set_support_multidevice() will have to be called manually on them.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="support_multidevice">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to support input from multiple devices.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_child_anchor_get_deleted">
<description>
Determines whether a child anchor has been deleted from
@@ -33456,22 +32408,28 @@ removed by the recently used resources list, and %FALSE otherwise.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_drag_dest_row">
+<function name="gtk_widget_modify_symbolic_color">
<description>
-Gets information about the row that is highlighted for feedback.
+Sets a symbolic color for a widget.
+All other style values are left untouched. See also
+gtk_widget_modify_style().
+
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the highlighted row, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the symbolic color to modify
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pos">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> the color to assign (does not need to be allocated),
+or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
+of gtk_widget_modify_symbolic_color().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -33527,22 +32485,20 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_create_pango_context">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_hadjustment">
<description>
-Creates a new #PangoContext that can be used with the
-#GtkPrintContext.
+Gets the #GtkAdjustment currently being used for the horizontal aspect.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new Pango context for @context
-
+<return> A #GtkAdjustment object, or %NULL if none is currently being
+used.
</return>
</function>
@@ -33677,42 +32633,6 @@ Sets the size of the scrollable area of the layout.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_append_page_menu">
-<description>
-Appends a page to @notebook, specifying the widget to use as the
-label in the popup menu.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
-or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="menu_label">
-<parameter_description> the widget to use as a label for the page-switch
-menu, if that is enabled. If %NULL, and @tab_label
-is a #GtkLabel or %NULL, then the menu label will be
-a newly created label with the same text as @tab_label;
-If @tab_label is not a #GtkLabel, @menu_label must be
-specified if the page-switch menu is to be used.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the index (starting from 0) of the appended
-page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_printer_get_name">
<description>
Returns the name of the printer.
@@ -33834,60 +32754,72 @@ If the model is frozen, the file will only show up after it is thawn.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_get_owner">
+<function name="gtk_ruler_get_range">
<description>
-If the clipboard contents callbacks were set with
-gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner(), and the gtk_clipboard_set_with_data() or
-gtk_clipboard_clear() has not subsequently called, returns the owner set
-by gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner().
-
+Retrieves values indicating the range and current position of a #GtkRuler.
+See gtk_ruler_set_range().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+<parameter name="ruler">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRuler
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="lower">
+<parameter_description> location to store lower limit of the ruler, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="upper">
+<parameter_description> location to store upper limit of the ruler, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> location to store the current position of the mark on the ruler, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max_size">
+<parameter_description> location to store the maximum size of the ruler used when calculating
+the space to leave for the text, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the owner of the clipboard, if any; otherwise %NULL.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_display_name">
+<function name="gtk_widget_is_focus">
<description>
-Gets the human-readable name of the #GtkPaperSize.
+Determines if the widget is the focus widget within its
+toplevel. (This does not mean that the %HAS_FOCUS flag is
+necessarily set; %HAS_FOCUS will only be set if the
+toplevel widget additionally has the global input focus.)
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the human-readable name of @size
-
+<return> %TRUE if the widget is the focus widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_misc_get_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_expand_to_path">
<description>
-Gets the X and Y alignment of the widget within its allocation.
-See gtk_misc_set_alignment().
+Expands the row at @path. This will also expand all parent rows of
+ path as necessary.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="misc">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMisc
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> location to store X alignment of @misc, or %NULL
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description> location to store Y alignment of @misc, or %NULL
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> path to a row.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -33937,20 +32869,20 @@ range of columns.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_get_length">
+<function name="gtk_viewport_get_bin_window">
<description>
-Retrieves the length in characters of the buffer.
+Gets the bin window of the #GtkViewport.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+<parameter name="viewport">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkViewport
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The number of characters in the buffer.
+<return> a #GdkWindow
</return>
</function>
@@ -33973,46 +32905,55 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_ref">
+<function name="gtk_radio_action_get_group">
<description>
-Adds a reference to a widget. This function is exactly the same
-as calling g_object_ref(), and exists mostly for historical
-reasons. It can still be convenient to avoid casting a widget
-to a #GObject, it saves a small amount of typing.
+Returns the list representing the radio group for this object.
+Note that the returned list is only valid until the next change
+to the group.
+
+A common way to set up a group of radio group is the following:
+|[
+GSList *group = NULL;
+GtkRadioAction *action;
+
+while (/ * more actions to add * /)
+{
+action = gtk_radio_action_new (...);
-Deprecated: 2.12: Use g_object_ref() instead.
+gtk_radio_action_set_group (action, group);
+group = gtk_radio_action_get_group (action);
+}
+]|
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the widget that was referenced
+<return> the list representing the radio group for this object
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_allocation">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_chars_in_line">
<description>
-Sets the widget's allocation. This should not be used
-directly, but from within a widget's size_allocate method.
+Returns the number of characters in the line containing @iter,
+including the paragraph delimiters.
-Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="allocation">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy from
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> number of characters in the line
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_store_append">
@@ -34063,6 +33004,28 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_margin">
+<description>
+Sets the ::margin property which specifies the space
+which is inserted at the top, bottom, left and right
+of the icon view.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="margin">
+<parameter_description> the margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_vscale_new_with_range">
<description>
Creates a new vertical scale widget that lets the user input a
@@ -34163,6 +33126,24 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_n_pages">
+<description>
+Gets the number of pages in a notebook.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the number of pages in the notebook.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_show">
<description>
Flags a widget to be displayed. Any widget that isn't shown will
@@ -34187,24 +33168,6 @@ toplevel container is realized and mapped.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_completion">
-<description>
-Returns the auxiliary completion object currently in use by @entry.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The auxiliary completion object currently in use by @entry.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_menu_set_reserve_toggle_size">
<description>
Sets whether the menu should reserve space for drawing toggles
@@ -34316,28 +33279,6 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_selection_get_selections">
-<description>
-Retrieves the list of file selections the user has made in the dialog box.
-This function is intended for use when the user can select multiple files
-in the file list.
-
-The filenames are in the GLib file name encoding. To convert to
-UTF-8, call g_filename_to_utf8() on each string.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filesel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSelection
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated %NULL-terminated array of strings. Use
-g_strfreev() to free it.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_drag_check_threshold">
<description>
Checks to see if a mouse drag starting at (@start_x, @start_y) and ending
@@ -34372,28 +33313,6 @@ should trigger the beginning of a drag-and-drop operation.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_line_wrap_mode">
-<description>
-If line wrapping is on (see gtk_label_set_line_wrap()) this controls how
-the line wrapping is done. The default is %PANGO_WRAP_WORD which means
-wrap on word boundaries.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wrap_mode">
-<parameter_description> the line wrapping mode
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkAboutDialog.
@@ -34408,31 +33327,23 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_requisition">
+<function name="gtk_window_group_list_windows">
<description>
-Retrieves the widget's requisition.
-
-This function should only be used by widget implementations in
-order to figure whether the widget's requisition has actually
-changed after some internal state change (so that they can call
-gtk_widget_queue_resize() instead of gtk_widget_queue_draw()).
-
-Normally, gtk_widget_size_request() should be used.
+Returns a list of the #GtkWindows that belong to @window_group.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="requisition">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkRequisition to copy to
+<parameter name="window_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindowGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A newly-allocated list of
+windows inside the group.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_line_yrange">
@@ -34482,22 +33393,25 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_single_line_mode">
+<function name="gtk_layout_set_hadjustment">
<description>
-Returns whether the label is in single line mode.
+Sets the horizontal scroll adjustment for the layout.
+
+See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> new scroll adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE when the label is in single line mode.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_pack_end">
@@ -34618,6 +33532,29 @@ g_free().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_valid">
+<description>
+Determines whether a given keyval and modifier mask constitute
+a valid keyboard accelerator. For example, the #GDK_a keyval
+plus #GDK_CONTROL_MASK is valid - this is a "Ctrl+a" accelerator.
+But, you can't, for instance, use the #GDK_Control_L keyval
+as an accelerator.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> a GDK keyval
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> modifier mask
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the accelerator is valid
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_sort_func">
<description>
Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be @sort_func. If
@@ -34670,64 +33607,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_prepend_element">
-<description>
-Adds a new element to the beginning of a toolbar.
-
-If @type == %GTK_TOOLBAR_CHILD_WIDGET, @widget is used as the new element.
-If @type == %GTK_TOOLBAR_CHILD_RADIOBUTTON, @widget is used to determine
-the radio group for the new element. In all other cases, @widget must
-be %NULL.
-
- callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> a value of type #GtkToolbarChildType that determines what @widget will be.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the element's label.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> used for context-sensitive help about this toolbar element.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that provides pictorial representation of the element's function.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> the function to be executed when the button is pressed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> any data you wish to pass to the callback.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new toolbar element as a #GtkWidget.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_has_selection">
<description>
Gets the value of #GtkPrintUnixDialog::has-selection property.
@@ -34773,7 +33652,6 @@ for language bindings to use.
<description>
Removes the visual marker from a particular day.
-
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="calendar">
@@ -34785,8 +33663,7 @@ Removes the visual marker from a particular day.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, always
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_label_set_markup_with_mnemonic">
@@ -34813,24 +33690,6 @@ automatically, or explicitly using gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_current_page">
-<description>
-Returns the page number of the current page.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the index (starting from 0) of the current
-page in the notebook. If the notebook has no pages, then
--1 will be returned.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_accel_map_lock_path">
<description>
Locks the given accelerator path. If the accelerator map doesn't yet contain
@@ -35050,6 +33909,33 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_container_child_get">
+<description>
+Gets the values of one or more child properties for @child and @container.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="first_prop_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the first property to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> return location for the first property, followed
+optionally by more name/return location pairs, followed by %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_button_set_use_underline">
<description>
If true, an underline in the text of the button label indicates
@@ -35120,22 +34006,22 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_slider_size_fixed">
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_new">
<description>
-This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
+Creates a new recent manager object. Recent manager objects are used to
+handle the list of recently used resources. A #GtkRecentManager object
+monitors the recently used resources list, and emits the "changed" signal
+each time something inside the list changes.
-See gtk_range_set_slider_size_fixed().
+#GtkRecentManager objects are expensive: be sure to create them only when
+needed. You should use gtk_recent_manager_get_default() instead.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the range's slider has a fixed size.
+<return> A newly created #GtkRecentManager object.
</return>
</function>
@@ -35313,6 +34199,34 @@ gtk_spin_button_set_snap_to_ticks().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_iconify">
+<description>
+Asks to iconify (i.e. minimize) the specified @window. Note that
+you shouldn't assume the window is definitely iconified afterward,
+because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could deiconify it
+again, or there may not be a window manager in which case
+iconification isn't possible, etc. But normally the window will end
+up iconified. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
+
+It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
+in which case the window will be iconified before it ever appears
+onscreen.
+
+You can track iconification via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_reverse">
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_REVERSE.
@@ -35353,22 +34267,31 @@ will not "adopt" it.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_create_menu_item">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_reordered">
<description>
-Creates a menu item widget that proxies for the given action.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Lets a set of row reference created by gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy()
+know that the model emitted the "rows_reordered" signal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> A #GObject
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The parent path of the reordered signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The iter pointing to the parent of the reordered
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_order">
+<parameter_description> The new order of rows
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a menu item connected to the action.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_change_palette_with_screen_hook">
@@ -35451,64 +34374,6 @@ gtk_editable_set_editable().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_can_activate_accel">
-<description>
-Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal
-identified by @signal_id can currently be activated.
-This is done by emitting the #GtkWidget::can-activate-accel
-signal on @widget; if the signal isn't overridden by a
-handler or in a derived widget, then the default check is
-that the widget must be sensitive, and the widget and all
-its ancestors mapped.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="signal_id">
-<parameter_description> the ID of a signal installed on @widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the accelerator can be activated.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_window_set_geometry_hints">
-<description>
-This function sets up hints about how a window can be resized by
-the user. You can set a minimum and maximum size; allowed resize
-increments (e.g. for xterm, you can only resize by the size of a
-character); aspect ratios; and more. See the #GdkGeometry struct.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="geometry_widget">
-<parameter_description> widget the geometry hints will be applied to
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="geometry">
-<parameter_description> struct containing geometry information
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="geom_mask">
-<parameter_description> mask indicating which struct fields should be paid attention to
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_path_new_first">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTreePath. The string representation of this path is "0"
@@ -35557,40 +34422,6 @@ separated list of numbers. For example, "4:10:0:3" would be an accept
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_set_default_icon">
-<description>
-Changes the default drag icon. GTK+ retains references for the
-arguments, and will release them when they are no longer needed.
-
-Deprecated: Change the default drag icon via the stock system by
-changing the stock pixbuf for #GTK_STOCK_DND instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> the colormap of the icon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixmap">
-<parameter_description> the image data for the icon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> the transparency mask for an image, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="hot_x">
-<parameter_description> The X offset within @widget of the hotspot.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="hot_y">
-<parameter_description> The Y offset within @widget of the hotspot.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_model_row_inserted">
<description>
Emits the "row-inserted" signal on @tree_model
@@ -35674,78 +34505,20 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_element">
-<description>
-Adds a new element to the end of a toolbar.
-
-If @type == %GTK_TOOLBAR_CHILD_WIDGET, @widget is used as the new element.
-If @type == %GTK_TOOLBAR_CHILD_RADIOBUTTON, @widget is used to determine
-the radio group for the new element. In all other cases, @widget must
-be %NULL.
-
- callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> a value of type #GtkToolbarChildType that determines what @widget will be.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the element's label.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> used for context-sensitive help about this toolbar element.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that provides pictorial representation of the element's function.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> the function to be executed when the button is pressed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> any data you wish to pass to the callback.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new toolbar element as a #GtkWidget.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_new_with_model">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_default_direction">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeModel, with @child_model as the child model.
-
+Sets the default reading direction for widgets where the
+direction has not been explicitly set by gtk_widget_set_direction().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="child_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
+<parameter name="dir">
+<parameter_description> the new default direction. This cannot be
+%GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkTreeModel.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_manual_capabilities">
@@ -35847,24 +34620,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_markup_column">
-<description>
-Returns the column with markup text for @icon_view.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the markup column, or -1 if it's unset.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_is_end">
<description>
Returns %TRUE if @iter is the end iterator, i.e. one past the last
@@ -35884,30 +34639,6 @@ iterator.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_buildable_parser_finished">
-<description>
-Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
-<link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder UI definition</link>.
-Note that this will be called once for each time
-gtk_builder_add_from_file() or gtk_builder_add_from_string()
-is called on a builder.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buildable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuildable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_stock_lookup">
<description>
Fills @item with the registered values for @stock_id, returning %TRUE
@@ -35951,7 +34682,7 @@ mnemonic character
<function name="gtk_progress_bar_set_orientation">
<description>
Causes the progress bar to switch to a different orientation
-(left-to-right, right-to-left, top-to-bottom, or bottom-to-top).
+(left-to-right, right-to-left, top-to-bottom, or bottom-to-top).
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -36055,20 +34786,25 @@ action, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_vscrollbar_new">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_enable_tree_lines">
<description>
-Creates a new vertical scrollbar.
+Sets whether to draw lines interconnecting the expanders in @tree_view.
+This does not have any visible effects for lists.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment to use, or %NULL to create a new adjustment
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="enabled">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable tree line drawing, %FALSE otherwise.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkVScrollbar
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_documenters">
@@ -36092,6 +34828,24 @@ and must not be modified.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_events">
+<description>
+Returns the event mask for the widget (a bitfield containing flags
+from the #GdkEventMask enumeration). These are the events that the widget
+will receive.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> event mask for @widget
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_to_file">
<description>
This function saves the print settings from @settings to @file_name. If the
@@ -36165,13 +34919,13 @@ Since: 2.14
<function name="gtk_widget_get_accessible">
<description>
Returns the accessible object that describes the widget to an
-assistive technology.
+assistive technology.
-If no accessibility library is loaded (i.e. no ATK implementation library is
-loaded via <envar>GTK_MODULES</envar> or via another application library,
-such as libgnome), then this #AtkObject instance may be a no-op. Likewise,
-if no class-specific #AtkObject implementation is available for the widget
-instance in question, it will inherit an #AtkObject implementation from the
+If no accessibility library is loaded (i.e. no ATK implementation library is
+loaded via <envar>GTK_MODULES</envar> or via another application library,
+such as libgnome), then this #AtkObject instance may be a no-op. Likewise,
+if no class-specific #AtkObject implementation is available for the widget
+instance in question, it will inherit an #AtkObject implementation from the
first ancestor class for which such an implementation is defined.
The documentation of the <ulink url="http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/atk/index.html">ATK</ulink>
@@ -36189,26 +34943,20 @@ library contains more information about accessible objects and their uses.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_is_active">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_expand">
<description>
-Returns whether the window is part of the current active toplevel.
-(That is, the toplevel window receiving keystrokes.)
-The return value is %TRUE if the window is active toplevel
-itself, but also if it is, say, a #GtkPlug embedded in the active toplevel.
-You might use this function if you wanted to draw a widget
-differently in an active window from a widget in an inactive window.
-See gtk_window_has_toplevel_focus()
+Return %TRUE if the column expands to take any available space.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the window part of the current active window.
+<return> %TRUE, if the column expands
</return>
</function>
@@ -36304,31 +35052,30 @@ gtk_tree_store_set_value().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_groups_activate">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_move_child">
<description>
-Finds the first accelerator in any #GtkAccelGroup attached
-to @object that matches @accel_key and @accel_mods, and
-activates that accelerator.
-
+Updates the position of a child, as for gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="object">
-<parameter_description> the #GObject, usually a #GtkWindow, on which
-to activate the accelerator.
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> accelerator keyval from a key event
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> child widget already added to the text view
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> keyboard state mask from a key event
+<parameter name="xpos">
+<parameter_description> new X position in window coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ypos">
+<parameter_description> new Y position in window coordinates
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if an accelerator was activated and handled this keypress
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_icon_size">
@@ -36424,52 +35171,55 @@ Recursively hides a widget and any child widgets.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_show_about_dialog">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_load_key_file">
<description>
-This is a convenience function for showing an application's about box.
-The constructed dialog is associated with the parent window and
-reused for future invocations of this function.
+Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
+ key_file
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_property_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the first property
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> value of first property, followed by more properties, %NULL-terminated
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
+to use the default name "Page Setup"
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE on success
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_compare">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_wrap_width">
<description>
-A qsort()-style function that returns negative if @lhs is less than
- rhs, positive if @lhs is greater than @rhs, and 0 if they're equal.
-Ordering is in character offset order, i.e. the first character in the buffer
-is less than the second character in the buffer.
+Returns the wrap width which is used to determine the number of columns
+for the popup menu. If the wrap width is larger than 1, the combo box
+is in table mode.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="lhs">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="rhs">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> -1 if @lhs is less than @rhs, 1 if @lhs is greater, 0 if they are equal
+<return> the wrap width.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -36498,6 +35248,29 @@ indices in the layout to byte indices in the entry contents.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_current_icon_drag_source">
+<description>
+Returns the index of the icon which is the source of the current
+DND operation, or -1.
+
+This function is meant to be used in a #GtkWidget::drag-data-get
+callback.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> index of the icon which is the source of the current
+DND operation, or -1.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_text">
<description>
Gets the contents of the selection data as a UTF-8 string.
@@ -36517,34 +35290,70 @@ If the result is non-%NULL it must be freed with g_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_editable_remove_widget">
+<function name="gtk_builder_add_objects_from_string">
<description>
-Emits the #GtkCellEditable::remove-widget signal.
+Parses a string containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
+UI definition</link> building only the requested objects and merges
+them with the current contents of @builder.
+
+Upon errors 0 will be returned and @error will be assigned a
+#GError from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR or #G_MARKUP_ERROR domain.
+
+<note><para>
+If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not
+its child (for instance a #GtkTreeView that depends on its
+#GtkTreeModel), you have to explicitely list all of them in @object_ids.
+</para></note>
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_editable">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeEditable
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> the string to parse
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="length">
+<parameter_description> the length of @buffer (may be -1 if @buffer is nul-terminated)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="object_ids">
+<parameter_description> nul-terminated array of objects to build
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_radio">
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_set_parent">
<description>
-Returns whether we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes.
+Sets the transient parent for windows shown by the
+#GtkMountOperation.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent of the window, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_layout_get_vadjustment">
@@ -36589,77 +35398,42 @@ map dump.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_init_with_args">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_menu_label">
<description>
-This function does the same work as gtk_init_check().
-Additionally, it allows you to add your own commandline options,
-and it automatically generates nicely formatted
-<option>--help</option> output. Note that your program will
-be terminated after writing out the help output.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Changes the menu label for the page containing @child.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to the number of command line arguments.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to the array of command line arguments.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parameter_string">
-<parameter_description> a string which is displayed in
-the first line of <option>--help</option> output, after
-<literal><replaceable>programname</replaceable> [OPTION...]</literal>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of #GOptionEntry<!-- -->s
-describing the options of your program
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="translation_domain">
-<parameter_description> a translation domain to use for translating
-the <option>--help</option> output for the options in @entries
-with gettext(), or %NULL
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the child widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> a return location for errors
+<parameter name="menu_label">
+<parameter_description> the menu label, or NULL for default
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
-%FALSE otherwise.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_policy">
+<function name="gtk_action_set_short_label">
<description>
-Sets the scrollbar policy for the horizontal and vertical scrollbars.
+Sets a shorter label text on @action.
-The policy determines when the scrollbar should appear; it is a value
-from the #GtkPolicyType enumeration. If %GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS, the
-scrollbar is always present; if %GTK_POLICY_NEVER, the scrollbar is
-never present; if %GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC, the scrollbar is present only
-if needed (that is, if the slider part of the bar would be smaller
-than the trough - the display is larger than the page size).
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="hscrollbar_policy">
-<parameter_description> policy for horizontal bar
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="vscrollbar_policy">
-<parameter_description> policy for vertical bar
+<parameter name="short_label">
+<parameter_description> the label text to set
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -36701,6 +35475,90 @@ gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_parse_geometry">
+<description>
+Parses a standard X Window System geometry string - see the
+manual page for X (type 'man X') for details on this.
+gtk_window_parse_geometry() does work on all GTK+ ports
+including Win32 but is primarily intended for an X environment.
+
+If either a size or a position can be extracted from the
+geometry string, gtk_window_parse_geometry() returns %TRUE
+and calls gtk_window_set_default_size() and/or gtk_window_move()
+to resize/move the window.
+
+If gtk_window_parse_geometry() returns %TRUE, it will also
+set the #GDK_HINT_USER_POS and/or #GDK_HINT_USER_SIZE hints
+indicating to the window manager that the size/position of
+the window was user-specified. This causes most window
+managers to honor the geometry.
+
+Note that for gtk_window_parse_geometry() to work as expected, it has
+to be called when the window has its "final" size, i.e. after calling
+gtk_widget_show_all() on the contents and gtk_window_set_geometry_hints()
+on the window.
+|[
+#include <gtk/gtk.h>
+
+static void
+fill_with_content (GtkWidget *vbox)
+{
+/ * fill with content... * /
+}
+
+int
+main (int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+GtkWidget *window, *vbox;
+GdkGeometry size_hints = {
+100, 50, 0, 0, 100, 50, 10, 10, 0.0, 0.0, GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST
+};
+
+gtk_init (&argc, &argv);
+
+window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
+vbox = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 0);
+
+gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), vbox);
+fill_with_content (vbox);
+gtk_widget_show_all (vbox);
+
+gtk_window_set_geometry_hints (GTK_WINDOW (window),
+window,
+&size_hints,
+GDK_HINT_MIN_SIZE |
+GDK_HINT_BASE_SIZE |
+GDK_HINT_RESIZE_INC);
+
+if (argc > 1)
+{
+if (!gtk_window_parse_geometry (GTK_WINDOW (window), argv[1]))
+fprintf (stderr, "Failed to parse '%s'\n", argv[1]);
+}
+
+gtk_widget_show_all (window);
+gtk_main ();
+
+return 0;
+}
+]|
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="geometry">
+<parameter_description> geometry string
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if string was parsed successfully
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_size_from_name">
<description>
Looks up the icon size associated with @name.
@@ -36759,7 +35617,7 @@ Since: 2.6
<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_ellipsize">
<description>
-Returns the ellipsizing position of the progressbar.
+Returns the ellipsizing position of the progressbar.
See gtk_progress_bar_set_ellipsize().
Since: 2.6
@@ -36776,23 +35634,49 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_default_page_setup">
+<function name="gtk_printer_backend_load_modules">
<description>
-Returns the default page setup, see
-gtk_print_operation_set_default_page_setup().
-Since: 2.10
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return>
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_window_set_icon">
+<description>
+Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. This icon is used when
+the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
+managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
+frame, or display it in other contexts.
+
+The icon should be provided in whatever size it was naturally
+drawn; that is, don't scale the image before passing it to
+GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute, when the desired
+final size is known, to allow best quality.
+
+If you have your icon hand-drawn in multiple sizes, use
+gtk_window_set_icon_list(). Then the best size will be used.
+
+This function is equivalent to calling gtk_window_set_icon_list()
+with a 1-element list.
+
+See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
+for all windows in your application in one go.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> icon image, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default page setup
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_visible">
@@ -36887,38 +35771,31 @@ Obtains the selected date from a #GtkCalendar.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_radio_action_get_group">
+<function name="gtk_editable_delete_text">
<description>
-Returns the list representing the radio group for this object.
-Note that the returned list is only valid until the next change
-to the group.
-
-A common way to set up a group of radio group is the following:
-|[
-GSList *group = NULL;
-GtkRadioAction *action;
-
-while (/ * more actions to add * /)
-{
-action = gtk_radio_action_new (...);
-
-gtk_radio_action_set_group (action, group);
-group = gtk_radio_action_get_group (action);
-}
-]|
+Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
+those characters at positions from @start_pos up to, but not including
+ end_pos If @end_pos is negative, then the the characters deleted
+are those from @start_pos to the end of the text.
-Since: 2.4
+Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start_pos">
+<parameter_description> start position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end_pos">
+<parameter_description> end position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the list representing the radio group for this object
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_cursor">
@@ -37020,6 +35897,30 @@ meaningful order.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_drag_dest_item">
+<description>
+Gets information about the item that is highlighted for feedback.
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the highlighted item, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pos">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_assistant_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkAssistant.
@@ -37193,27 +36094,56 @@ that was expected but not found
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_line">
+<function name="gtk_paint_layout">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if @iter points to the start of the paragraph
-delimiter characters for a line (delimiters will be either a
-newline, a carriage return, a carriage return followed by a
-newline, or a Unicode paragraph separator character). Note that an
-iterator pointing to the \n of a \r\n pair will not be counted as
-the end of a line, the line ends before the \r. The end iterator is
-considered to be at the end of a line, even though there are no
-paragraph delimiter chars there.
-
+Draws a layout on @window using the given parameters.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_text">
+<parameter_description> whether to use the text or foreground
+graphics context of @style
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> the layout to draw
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter is at the end of a line
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_container_class_list_child_properties">
@@ -37300,25 +36230,24 @@ GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toggle_tool_button_new_from_stock">
+<function name="gtk_image_get_animation">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkToggleToolButton containing the image and text from a
-stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
-and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-
-It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
+Gets the #GdkPixbufAnimation being displayed by the #GtkImage.
+The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
+%GTK_IMAGE_ANIMATION (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
+The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
+returned animation.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkToggleToolButton
-
+<return> the displayed animation, or %NULL if
+the image is empty
</return>
</function>
@@ -37450,29 +36379,14 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_set_value">
+<function name="gtk_requisition_free">
<description>
-Sets the data in the cell specified by @iter and @column.
-The type of @value must be convertible to the type of the
-column.
-
+Frees a #GtkRequisition.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter for the row being modified
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> column number to modify
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> new value for the cell
+<parameter name="requisition">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRequisition
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -37546,32 +36460,30 @@ the format understood by gtk_accelerator_parse(), or "" for no acceler
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_common_ancestor">
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_get_message_area">
<description>
-Find the common ancestor of @widget_a and @widget_b that
-is closest to the two widgets.
-
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget_a">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget_b">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="message_dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the closest common ancestor of @widget_a and
- widget_b or %NULL if @widget_a and @widget_b do not
-share a common ancestor.
+<return> A #GtkVBox corresponding to the "message area" in the
+ message_dialog This is the box where the dialog's primary and secondary
+labels are packed. You can add your own extra content to that box and it
+will appear below those labels, on the right side of the dialog's image (or
+on the left for right-to-left languages). See gtk_dialog_get_content_area()
+for the corresponding function in the parent #GtkDialog.
+
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_progress_bar_set_ellipsize">
<description>
-Sets the mode used to ellipsize (add an ellipsis: "...") the text
+Sets the mode used to ellipsize (add an ellipsis: "...") the text
if there is not enough space to render the entire string.
Since: 2.6
@@ -37608,30 +36520,6 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_bottom_margin">
-<description>
-Sets the bottom margin of the #GtkPageSetup.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="margin">
-<parameter_description> the new bottom margin in units of @unit
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the units for @margin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_context_create_pango_layout">
<description>
Creates a new #PangoLayout that is suitable for use
@@ -37651,24 +36539,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_overwrite_mode">
-<description>
-Sets overwrite mode
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="overwrite">
-<parameter_description> overwrite mode
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_bindings_activate">
<description>
Find a key binding matching @keyval and @modifiers and activate the
@@ -37694,6 +36564,44 @@ binding on @object.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_radio_action_join_group">
+<description>
+Joins a radio action object to the group of another radio action object.
+
+Use this in language bindings instead of the gtk_radio_action_get_group()
+and gtk_radio_action_set_group() methods
+
+A common way to set up a group of radio actions is the following:
+|[
+GtkRadioAction *action;
+GtkRadioAction *last_action;
+
+while (/ * more actions to add * /)
+{
+action = gtk_radio_action_new (...);
+
+gtk_radio_action_join_group (action, last_action);
+last_action = action;
+}
+]|
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group_source">
+<parameter_description> a radio action object whos group we are
+joining, or %NULL to remove the radio action from its group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_spin_button_spin">
<description>
Increment or decrement a spin button's value in a specified direction
@@ -37740,6 +36648,34 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_init_check">
+<description>
+This function does the same work as gtk_init() with only
+a single change: It does not terminate the program if the GUI can't be
+initialized. Instead it returns %FALSE on failure.
+
+This way the application can fall back to some other means of communication
+with the user - for example a curses or command line interface.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="argc">
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argc</parameter> parameter of your
+main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="argv">
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argv</parameter> parameter of main().
+Any parameters understood by gtk_init() are stripped before return.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
+%FALSE otherwise.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_markup">
<description>
Sets @tooltip as the contents of the tooltip for the icon at
@@ -37771,45 +36707,33 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_add_tearoffs">
+<function name="gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area">
<description>
-Sets whether the popup menu should have a tearoff
-menu item.
+Sets the area of the widget, where the contents of this tooltip apply,
+to be @rect (in widget coordinates). This is especially useful for
+properly setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView rows and cells, #GtkIconViews,
+etc.
-Since: 2.6
+For setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView, please refer to the convenience
+functions for this: gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row() and
+gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_cell().
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="add_tearoffs">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to add tearoff menu items
+<parameter name="rect">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_model">
-<description>
-Returns the #GtkTreeModel which is acting as data source for @combo_box.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkTreeModel which was passed during construction.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_side_image">
<description>
Gets the header image for @page.
@@ -37833,27 +36757,6 @@ if there's no side image for the page.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_prepend">
-<description>
-Prepends a new row to @list_store. @iter will be changed to point to this new
-row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in
-values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="list_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the prepend row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_drag_source_set_target_list">
<description>
Changes the target types that this widget offers for drag-and-drop.
@@ -37911,38 +36814,48 @@ itself, excluding surrounding borders and the tree expander area.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_connect">
+<function name="gtk_paint_hline">
<description>
-Installs an accelerator in this group. When @accel_group is being activated
-in response to a call to gtk_accel_groups_activate(), @closure will be
-invoked if the @accel_key and @accel_mods from gtk_accel_groups_activate()
-match those of this connection.
-
-The signature used for the @closure is that of #GtkAccelGroupActivate.
-
-Note that, due to implementation details, a single closure can only be
-connected to one accelerator group.
+Draws a horizontal line from (@x1, @y) to (@x2, @y) in @window
+using the given style and state.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_flags">
-<parameter_description> a flag mask to configure this accelerator
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="closure">
-<parameter_description> closure to be executed upon accelerator activation
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x1">
+<parameter_description> the starting x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x2">
+<parameter_description> the ending x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -38019,40 +36932,6 @@ Recursively expands all nodes in the @tree_view.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_query_tab_label_packing">
-<description>
-Query the packing attributes for the tab label of the page
-containing @child.
-
-Deprecated: 2.20: Modify the #GtkNotebook:tab-expand and
-#GtkNotebook:tab-fill child properties instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the page
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> location to store the expand value (or NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fill">
-<parameter_description> location to store the fill value (or NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pack_type">
-<parameter_description> location to store the pack_type (or NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_cursor_visible">
<description>
Find out whether the cursor is being displayed.
@@ -38218,87 +37097,91 @@ Same as gtk_text_iter_forward_search(), but moves backward.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_append_index">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_type_hint">
<description>
-Appends a new index to a path. As a result, the depth of the path is
-increased.
+By setting the type hint for the window, you allow the window
+manager to decorate and handle the window in a way which is
+suitable to the function of the window in your application.
+
+This function should be called before the window becomes visible.
+
+gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons() and other convenience functions in GTK+
+will sometimes call gtk_window_set_type_hint() on your behalf.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="index_">
-<parameter_description> The index.
+<parameter name="hint">
+<parameter_description> the window type
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_button_new_with_font">
+<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_set_context_id">
<description>
-Creates a new font picker widget.
+Sets the context id for @context.
-Since: 2.4
+This causes the currently active slave of @context to be
+replaced by the slave corresponding to the new context id.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fontname">
-<parameter_description> Name of font to display in font selection dialog
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context_id">
+<parameter_description> the id to use
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new font picker widget.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_text_targets">
+<function name="gtk_font_button_new_with_font">
<description>
-Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
-the target list of the drag source. The targets
-are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
-use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
-gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
+Creates a new font picker widget.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
+<parameter name="fontname">
+<parameter_description> Name of font to display in font selection dialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new font picker widget.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_width">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_has_selection">
<description>
-Returns the page width in units of @unit.
-
-Note that this function takes orientation and
-margins into consideration.
-See gtk_page_setup_get_paper_width().
+Sets whether a selection exists.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="has_selection">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE indicates that a selection exists
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page width.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_child_anchor_get_widgets">
@@ -38319,44 +37202,46 @@ The returned list should be freed with g_list_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_startup_id">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_angle">
<description>
-Startup notification identifiers are used by desktop environment to
-track application startup, to provide user feedback and other
-features. This function changes the corresponding property on the
-underlying GdkWindow. Normally, startup identifier is managed
-automatically and you should only use this function in special cases
-like transferring focus from other processes. You should use this
-function before calling gtk_window_present() or any equivalent
-function generating a window map event.
-
-This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
+Sets the angle of rotation for the label. An angle of 90 reads from
+from bottom to top, an angle of 270, from top to bottom. The angle
+setting for the label is ignored if the label is selectable,
+wrapped, or ellipsized.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="startup_id">
-<parameter_description> a string with startup-notification identifier
+<parameter name="angle">
+<parameter_description> the angle that the baseline of the label makes with
+the horizontal, in degrees, measured counterclockwise
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_new">
+<function name="gtk_printer_accepts_ps">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget.
+Returns whether the printer accepts input in
+PostScript format.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
+<return> %TRUE if @printer accepts PostScript
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -38519,24 +37404,6 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_unset_invisible_char">
-<description>
-Unsets the invisible char previously set with
-gtk_entry_set_invisible_char(). So that the
-default invisible char is used again.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_foreach">
<description>
Calls @func on each tag in @table, with user data @data.
@@ -38561,45 +37428,51 @@ over it (you can't add/remove tags).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_size">
+<function name="gtk_print_job_new">
<description>
-Gets the size in pixels that is available for the image.
-Stock icons and named icons adapt their size automatically
-if the size of the notification area changes. For other
-storage types, the size-changed signal can be used to
-react to size changes.
-
-Note that the returned size is only meaningful while the
-status icon is embedded (see gtk_status_icon_is_embedded()).
+Creates a new #GtkPrintJob.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the job title
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the size that is available for the image
+<return> a new #GtkPrintJob
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_buffer">
+<function name="gtk_print_job_get_title">
<description>
-Gets the text buffer used by the layout. See
-gtk_text_layout_set_buffer().
+Gets the job title.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+<parameter name="job">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintJob
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the text buffer used by the layout.
+<return> the title of @job
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -38881,24 +37754,32 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_quality">
+<function name="gtk_widget_create_pango_layout">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY.
+Creates a new #PangoLayout with the appropriate font map,
+font description, and base direction for drawing text for
+this widget.
+
+If you keep a #PangoLayout created in this way around, in order to
+notify the layout of changes to the base direction or font of this
+widget, you must call pango_layout_context_changed() in response to
+the #GtkWidget::style-set and #GtkWidget::direction-changed signals
+for the widget.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="quality">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintQuality value
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> text to set on the layout (can be %NULL)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new #PangoLayout
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_set_default_sort_func">
@@ -38935,24 +37816,6 @@ is %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, the model will be unsorted.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_viewport_get_bin_window">
-<description>
-Gets the bin window of the #GtkViewport.
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="viewport">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkViewport
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a #GdkWindow
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_calendar_get_display_options">
<description>
Returns the current display options of @calendar.
@@ -39065,24 +37928,39 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_socket_get_id">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_append_page_menu">
<description>
-Gets the window ID of a #GtkSocket widget, which can then
-be used to create a client embedded inside the socket, for
-instance with gtk_plug_new().
-
-The #GtkSocket must have already be added into a toplevel window
-before you can make this call.
+Appends a page to @notebook, specifying the widget to use as the
+label in the popup menu.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="socket_">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSocket.
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tab_label">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
+or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="menu_label">
+<parameter_description> the widget to use as a label for the page-switch
+menu, if that is enabled. If %NULL, and @tab_label
+is a #GtkLabel or %NULL, then the menu label will be
+a newly created label with the same text as @tab_label;
+If @tab_label is not a #GtkLabel, @menu_label must be
+specified if the page-switch menu is to be used.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the window ID for the socket
+<return> the index (starting from 0) of the appended
+page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
</return>
</function>
@@ -39113,27 +37991,25 @@ mnemonic character
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_media_type">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_visible">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE.
-
-The set of media types is defined in PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG.
-<!-- FIXME link here -->
+Returns whether the status icon is visible or not.
+Note that being visible does not guarantee that
+the user can actually see the icon, see also
+gtk_status_icon_is_embedded().
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="media_type">
-<parameter_description> the media type
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the status icon is visible
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_toolbar_set_style">
@@ -39154,19 +38030,23 @@ Alters the view of @toolbar to display either icons only, text only, or both.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_widget">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_completion">
<description>
-Sets the widget in the header to be @widget. If widget is %NULL, then the
-header button is set with a #GtkLabel set to the title of @tree_column.
+Sets @completion to be the auxiliary completion object to use with @entry.
+All further configuration of the completion mechanism is done on
+ completion using the #GtkEntryCompletion API. Completion is disabled if
+ completion is set to %NULL.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> A child #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkEntryCompletion or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -39265,29 +38145,6 @@ Removes a window from a #GtkWindowGroup.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_present_with_time">
-<description>
-Presents a window to the user in response to a user interaction.
-If you need to present a window without a timestamp, use
-gtk_window_present(). See gtk_window_present() for details.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="timestamp">
-<parameter_description> the timestamp of the user interaction (typically a
-button or key press event) which triggered this call
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_range_set_update_policy">
<description>
Sets the update policy for the range. #GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS means that
@@ -39313,67 +38170,24 @@ drag operation.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new text buffer.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a tag table, or %NULL to create a new one
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new text buffer
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_entry_select_region">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_age">
<description>
-Selects a region of text. The characters that are selected are
-those characters at positions from @start_pos up to, but not
-including @end_pos. If @end_pos is negative, then the the characters
-selected will be those characters from @start_pos to the end of
-the text.
+Gets the number of days elapsed since the last update of the resource
+pointed by @info.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_select_region() instead.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> the starting position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
-<parameter_description> the end position
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_popup">
-<description>
-Pops up the menu or dropdown list of @combo_box.
-
-This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
-applications should have little use for it.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> a positive integer containing the number of days elapsed
+since the time this resource was last modified.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_inline_completion">
@@ -39395,41 +38209,21 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_error_quark">
-<description>
-Registers an error quark for #GtkPrintOperation if necessary.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> The error quark used for #GtkPrintOperation errors.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_label_text">
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_lower">
<description>
-Retrieves the text of the tab label for the page containing
- child
+Retrieves the minimum value of the adjustment.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a widget contained in a page of @notebook
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the text of the tab label, or %NULL if the
-tab label widget is not a #GtkLabel. The
-string is owned by the widget and must not
-be freed.
+<return> The current minimum value of the adjustment.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -39542,26 +38336,6 @@ output should not be clipped
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_style">
-<description>
-Retrieves whether the tool shell has text, icons, or both. Tool items must
-not call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_style()
-instead.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="shell">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the current style of @shell
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_activate_focus">
<description>
Activates the current focused widget within the window.
@@ -39598,6 +38372,43 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_calendar_set_detail_func">
+<description>
+Installs a function which provides Pango markup with detail information
+for each day. Examples for such details are holidays or appointments. That
+information is shown below each day when #GtkCalendar:show-details is set.
+A tooltip containing with full detail information is provided, if the entire
+text should not fit into the details area, or if #GtkCalendar:show-details
+is not set.
+
+The size of the details area can be restricted by setting the
+#GtkCalendar:detail-width-chars and #GtkCalendar:detail-height-rows
+properties.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> a function providing details for each day.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @func invokations.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> a function for releasing @data.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords">
<description>
Converts coordinates on the window identified by @win to buffer
@@ -39625,11 +38436,11 @@ gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()).
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="buffer_x">
-<parameter_description> buffer x coordinate return location
+<parameter_description> buffer x coordinate return location or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="buffer_y">
-<parameter_description> buffer y coordinate return location
+<parameter_description> buffer y coordinate return location or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -39656,45 +38467,49 @@ offset back into an iterator.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_set_color">
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_iter_is_valid">
<description>
-Sets the current color to be @color.
+WARNING: This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing
+purposes.
-Since: 2.4
+Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkTreeStore.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> A #GdkColor to set the current color with.
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the iter is valid, %FALSE if the iter is invalid.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_create_row_drag_icon">
+<function name="gtk_color_button_set_color">
<description>
-Creates a #GdkPixmap representation of the row at @path.
-This image is used for a drag icon.
+Sets the current color to be @color.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath in @tree_view
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkColor to set the current color with.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated pixmap of the drag icon.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_finishings">
@@ -39797,31 +38612,6 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_select_filename">
-<description>
-Selects a filename. If the file name isn't in the current
-folder of @chooser, then the current folder of @chooser will
-be changed to the folder containing @filename.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> the filename to select
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the file was
-selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_embed_page_setup">
<description>
Gets the value of #GtkPrintUnixDialog::embed-page-setup property.
@@ -39866,60 +38656,22 @@ as plaintext
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_diamond">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_is_important">
<description>
-Draws a diamond in the given rectangle on @window using the given
-parameters.
+Checks whether @action is important or not
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether @action is important
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_label_from_widget">
@@ -39989,29 +38741,6 @@ Sets the horizontal adjustment of the viewport.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_change_palette_hook">
-<description>
-Installs a global function to be called whenever the user tries to
-modify the palette in a color selection. This function should save
-the new palette contents, and update the GtkSettings property
-"gtk-color-palette" so all GtkColorSelection widgets will be modified.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: This function does not work in multihead environments.
-Use gtk_color_selection_set_change_palette_with_screen_hook() instead.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> a function to call when the custom palette needs saving.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the previous change palette hook (that was replaced).
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_set_tooltip_markup">
<description>
Sets @markup as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
@@ -40039,6 +38768,23 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_select_all">
+<description>
+Selects all the icons. @icon_view must has its selection mode set
+to #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_for_targets">
<description>
Returns a list of targets that are present on the clipboard, or %NULL
@@ -40093,59 +38839,24 @@ Obtains the location of @anchor within @buffer.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_detachable">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_foreach">
<description>
-Sets whether the tab can be detached from @notebook to another
-notebook or widget.
-
-Note that 2 notebooks must share a common group identificator
-(see gtk_notebook_set_group_id ()) to allow automatic tabs
-interchange between them.
-
-If you want a widget to interact with a notebook through DnD
-(i.e.: accept dragged tabs from it) it must be set as a drop
-destination and accept the target "GTK_NOTEBOOK_TAB". The notebook
-will fill the selection with a GtkWidget** pointing to the child
-widget that corresponds to the dropped tab.
-|[
-static void
-on_drop_zone_drag_data_received (GtkWidget *widget,
-GdkDragContext *context,
-gint x,
-gint y,
-GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
-guint info,
-guint time,
-gpointer user_data)
-{
-GtkWidget *notebook;
-GtkWidget **child;
-
-notebook = gtk_drag_get_source_widget (context);
-child = (void*) selection_data->data;
-
-process_widget (*child);
-gtk_container_remove (GTK_CONTAINER (notebook), *child);
-}
-]|
-
-If you want a notebook to accept drags from other widgets,
-you will have to set your own DnD code to do it.
+Calls @func for each key-value pair of @settings.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a child #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> (scope call) the function to call
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="detachable">
-<parameter_description> whether the tab is detachable or not
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data for @func
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40194,20 +38905,18 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_unparent">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new">
<description>
-This function is only for use in widget implementations.
-Should be called by implementations of the remove method
-on #GtkContainer, to dissociate a child from the container.
+Creates a new ui manager object.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new ui manager object.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_toggled_tags">
@@ -40235,29 +38944,6 @@ does <emphasis>not</emphasis> have the tag applied to it.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_hsv_is_adjusting">
-<description>
-An HSV color selector can be said to be adjusting if multiple rapid
-changes are being made to its value, for example, when the user is
-adjusting the value with the mouse. This function queries whether
-the HSV color selector is being adjusted or not.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="hsv">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkHSV
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if clients can ignore changes to the color value,
-since they may be transitory, or %FALSE if they should consider
-the color value status to be final.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_radio_tool_button_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkRadioToolButton, adding it to @group.
@@ -40276,19 +38962,22 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_use_underline">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_label_widget">
<description>
-If true, an underline in the text indicates the next character should be
-used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
+Sets the label of the tool item group.
+The label widget is displayed in the header of the group, in place
+of the usual label.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
+<parameter name="label_widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget to be displayed in place of the usual label
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40314,40 +39003,24 @@ Note that this position is in characters, not in bytes.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_set_font">
+<function name="gtk_vbox_new">
<description>
-Sets the #GdkFont to use for a given style. This is
-meant only as a replacement for direct access to style->font
-and should not be used in new code. New code should
-use style->font_desc instead.
+Creates a new #GtkVBox.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="font">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkFont, or %NULL to use the #GdkFont corresponding
-to style->font_desc.
+<parameter name="homogeneous">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if all children are to be given equal space allotments.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_border_free">
-<description>
-Frees a #GtkBorder structure.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="border_">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBorder.
+<parameter name="spacing">
+<parameter_description> the number of pixels to place by default between children.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkVBox.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char">
@@ -40509,6 +39182,20 @@ about a file.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_spin_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkCellRendererSpin.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkCellRendererSpin
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_get_children">
<description>
Returns the container's non-internal children. See
@@ -40545,17 +39232,51 @@ the currently selected day.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_push_colormap">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_disconnect_key">
<description>
-Pushes @cmap onto a global stack of colormaps; the topmost
-colormap on the stack will be used to create all widgets.
-Remove @cmap with gtk_widget_pop_colormap(). There's little
-reason to use this function.
+Removes an accelerator previously installed through
+gtk_accel_group_connect().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cmap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if there was an accelerator which could be
+removed, %FALSE otherwise
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_window_stick">
+<description>
+Asks to stick @window, which means that it will appear on all user
+desktops. Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely
+stuck afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could unstick it
+again, and some window managers do not support sticking
+windows. But normally the window will end up stuck. Just don't
+write code that crashes if not.
+
+It's permitted to call this function before showing a window.
+
+You can track stickiness via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40604,43 +39325,6 @@ will be ignored.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_label_packing">
-<description>
-Sets the packing parameters for the tab label of the page
-containing @child. See gtk_box_pack_start() for the exact meaning
-of the parameters.
-
-Deprecated: 2.20: Modify the #GtkNotebook:tab-expand and
-#GtkNotebook:tab-fill child properties instead.
-Modifying the packing of the tab label is a deprecated feature and
-shouldn't be done anymore.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the child widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> whether to expand the tab label or not
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fill">
-<parameter_description> whether the tab label should fill the allocated area or not
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pack_type">
-<parameter_description> the position of the tab label
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_drag_source_set_icon">
<description>
Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular widget
@@ -40721,22 +39405,6 @@ Increments the reference count on @values.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_direction_wildcarded">
-<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if this icon source is a base for any text direction variant
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_cell_editable_start_editing">
<description>
Begins editing on a @cell_editable. @event is the #GdkEvent that began
@@ -40778,19 +39446,25 @@ value changes.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_selection">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_uris">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkTreeSelection associated with @tree_view.
+Gets the contents of the selection data as array of URIs.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkTreeSelection object.
+<return> if
+the selection data contains a list of
+URIs, a newly allocated %NULL-terminated string array
+containing the URIs, otherwise %NULL. If the result is
+non-%NULL it must be freed with g_strfreev().
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -40824,21 +39498,20 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_duplex">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_extension_events">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX.
+Retrieves the extension events the widget will receive; see
+gdk_input_set_extension_events().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether to print the output in duplex.
-
+<return> extension events for @widget
</return>
</function>
@@ -40973,32 +39646,32 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_remove_accelerator">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_point">
<description>
-Removes an accelerator from @widget, previously installed with
-gtk_widget_add_accelerator().
+Scrolls the tree view such that the top-left corner of the visible
+area is @tree_x, @tree_y, where @tree_x and @tree_y are specified
+in tree coordinates. The @tree_view must be realized before
+this function is called. If it isn't, you probably want to be
+using gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_cell().
+
+If either @tree_x or @tree_y are -1, then that direction isn't scrolled.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> widget to install an accelerator on
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> accel group for this widget
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> GDK keyval of the accelerator
+<parameter name="tree_x">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier key combination of the accelerator
+<parameter name="tree_y">
+<parameter_description> Y coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether an accelerator was installed and could be removed
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_hover_expand">
@@ -41178,70 +39851,41 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_window_creation_hook">
+<function name="gtk_range_get_inverted">
<description>
-Installs a global function used to create a window
-when a detached tab is dropped in an empty area.
+Gets the value set by gtk_range_set_inverted().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkNotebookWindowCreationFunc, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> user data for @func
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> Destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the range is inverted
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_check">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_window_creation_hook">
<description>
-Draws a check button indicator in the given rectangle on @window with
-the given parameters.
+Installs a global function used to create a window
+when a detached tab is dropped in an empty area.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_check() instead.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the check in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the check in
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkNotebookWindowCreationFunc, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle to draw the check in
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> user data for @func
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle to draw the check in
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> Destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -41293,6 +39937,36 @@ or should all have the same requisition in both directions
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action">
+<description>
+Called to indicate that the buffer operations between here and a
+call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() are part of a single
+user-visible operation. The operations between
+gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() and
+gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() can then be grouped when creating
+an undo stack. #GtkTextBuffer maintains a count of calls to
+gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() that have not been closed with
+a call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action(), and emits the
+"begin-user-action" and "end-user-action" signals only for the
+outermost pair of calls. This allows you to build user actions
+from other user actions.
+
+The "interactive" buffer mutation functions, such as
+gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive(), automatically call begin/end
+user action around the buffer operations they perform, so there's
+no need to add extra calls if you user action consists solely of a
+single call to one of those functions.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_ellipsize">
<description>
Sets the ellipsization mode which should be used by labels in @group.
@@ -41313,22 +39987,15 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_accepts_ps">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_new">
<description>
-Returns whether the printer accepts input in
-PostScript format.
+Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @printer accepts PostScript
-
+<return> A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
</return>
</function>
@@ -41375,25 +40042,6 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_get_dpi_y">
-<description>
-Obtains the vertical resolution of the #GtkPrintContext,
-in dots per inch.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the vertical resolution of @context
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_ensure_update">
<description>
Makes sure that all pending updates to the UI have been completed.
@@ -41424,19 +40072,67 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_equal_func">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_single_line_mode">
<description>
-Returns the compare function currently in use.
+Returns whether the label is in single line mode.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the currently used compare function for the search code.
+<return> %TRUE when the label is in single line mode.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_text">
+<description>
+Inserts an action in @completion's action item list at position @index_
+with text @text. If you want the action item to have markup, use
+gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_markup().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="index_">
+<parameter_description> The index of the item to insert.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> Text of the item to insert.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_window_has_toplevel_focus">
+<description>
+Returns whether the input focus is within this GtkWindow.
+For real toplevel windows, this is identical to gtk_window_is_active(),
+but for embedded windows, like #GtkPlug, the results will differ.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the input focus is within this GtkWindow
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -41487,30 +40183,6 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_padding">
-<description>
-Fills in @xpad and @ypad with the appropriate values of @cell.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xpad">
-<parameter_description> location to fill in with the x padding of the cell, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ypad">
-<parameter_description> location to fill in with the y padding of the cell, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_get_title">
<description>
Retrieves the title of the window. See gtk_window_set_title().
@@ -41619,67 +40291,58 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_columns">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_show_hidden">
<description>
-Returns the value of the ::columns property.
+Gets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
+See gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden().
Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of columns, or -1
+<return> %TRUE if hidden files and folders are displayed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_disconnect_key">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_columns">
<description>
-Removes an accelerator previously installed through
-gtk_accel_group_connect().
+Returns the value of the ::columns property.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if there was an accelerator which could be
-removed, %FALSE otherwise
+<return> the number of columns, or -1
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_set_new">
+<function name="gtk_widget_push_colormap">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkIconSet. A #GtkIconSet represents a single icon
-in various sizes and widget states. It can provide a #GdkPixbuf
-for a given size and state on request, and automatically caches
-some of the rendered #GdkPixbuf objects.
-
-Normally you would use gtk_widget_render_icon() instead of
-using #GtkIconSet directly. The one case where you'd use
-#GtkIconSet is to create application-specific icon sets to place in
-a #GtkIconFactory.
-
+Pushes @cmap onto a global stack of colormaps; the topmost
+colormap on the stack will be used to create all widgets.
+Remove @cmap with gtk_widget_pop_colormap(). There's little
+reason to use this function.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="cmap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkIconSet
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_intersect">
@@ -41864,102 +40527,73 @@ freed with gtk_border_free()
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_progress_pulse">
+<function name="gtk_socket_get_id">
<description>
-Indicates that some progress is made, but you don't know how much.
-Causes the entry's progress indicator to enter "activity mode,"
-where a block bounces back and forth. Each call to
-gtk_entry_progress_pulse() causes the block to move by a little bit
-(the amount of movement per pulse is determined by
-gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step()).
+Gets the window ID of a #GtkSocket widget, which can then
+be used to create a client embedded inside the socket, for
+instance with gtk_plug_new().
+
+The #GtkSocket must have already be added into a toplevel window
+before you can make this call.
-Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="socket_">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSocket.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the window ID for the socket
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_selection_set_filename">
+<function name="gtk_entry_progress_pulse">
<description>
-Sets a default path for the file requestor. If @filename includes a
-directory path, then the requestor will open with that path as its
-current working directory.
-
-This has the consequence that in order to open the requestor with a
-working directory and an empty filename, @filename must have a trailing
-directory separator.
+Indicates that some progress is made, but you don't know how much.
+Causes the entry's progress indicator to enter "activity mode,"
+where a block bounces back and forth. Each call to
+gtk_entry_progress_pulse() causes the block to move by a little bit
+(the amount of movement per pulse is determined by
+gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step()).
-The encoding of @filename is preferred GLib file name encoding, which
-may not be UTF-8. See g_filename_from_utf8().
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filesel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> a string to set as the default file name.
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_context">
+<function name="gtk_buildable_construct_child">
<description>
-This function is supposed to be used in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip
-signal handler for #GtkTreeView. The @x, @y and @keyboard_tip values
-which are received in the signal handler, should be passed to this
-function without modification.
+Constructs a child of @buildable with the name @name.
-The return value indicates whether there is a tree view row at the given
-coordinates (%TRUE) or not (%FALSE) for mouse tooltips. For keyboard
-tooltips the row returned will be the cursor row. When %TRUE, then any of
- model, @path and @iter which have been provided will be set to point to
-that row and the corresponding model. @x and @y will always be converted
-to be relative to @tree_view's bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
+#GtkBuilder calls this function if a "constructor" has been
+specified in the UI definition.
Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyboard_tip">
-<parameter_description> whether this is a keyboard tooltip or not
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeModel or %NULL
+<parameter name="buildable">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkBuildable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreePath or %NULL
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> #GtkBuilder used to construct this object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeIter or %NULL
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> name of child to construct
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether or not the given tooltip context points to a row.
+<return> the constructed child
</return>
</function>
@@ -42073,6 +40707,24 @@ instead of backward.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_vadjustment">
+<description>
+Gets the vertical-scrolling #GtkAdjustment.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> pointer to the vertical #GtkAdjustment
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_select_all">
<description>
Selects all the items inside @chooser, if the @chooser supports
@@ -42159,7 +40811,7 @@ to free any allocated memory.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> (inout) (transfer none) An empty #GValue to set.
+<parameter_description> (out) (transfer none) An empty #GValue to set.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -42212,24 +40864,24 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_retrieve_proxy_menu_item">
<description>
-Initializes @iter with the first iterator in the tree (the one at the path
-"0") and returns %TRUE. Returns %FALSE if the tree is empty.
+Returns the #GtkMenuItem that was last set by
+gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item(), ie. the #GtkMenuItem
+that is going to appear in the overflow menu.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
+<return> The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
+overflow menu for @tool_item.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -42351,50 +41003,54 @@ Disables the popup menu.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_set_new_from_pixbuf">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_remove_filter">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkIconSet with @pixbuf as the default/fallback
-source image. If you don't add any additional #GtkIconSource to the
-icon set, all variants of the icon will be created from @pixbuf,
-using scaling, pixelation, etc. as required to adjust the icon size
-or make the icon look insensitive/prelighted.
+Removes @filter from the list of #GtkRecentFilter objects held by @chooser.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkIconSet
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_insert_column">
+<function name="gtk_application_new">
<description>
-This inserts the @column into the @tree_view at @position. If @position is
--1, then the column is inserted at the end. If @tree_view has
-"fixed_height" mode enabled, then @column must have its "sizing" property
-set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
+Create a new #GtkApplication, or if one has already been initialized
+in this process, return the existing instance. This function will as
+a side effect initialize the display system; see gtk_init().
+
+For the behavior if this application is running in another process,
+see g_application_new().
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+<parameter name="appid">
+<parameter_description> System-dependent application identifier
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be inserted.
+<parameter name="argc">
+<parameter_description> System argument count
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> The position to insert @column in.
+<parameter name="argv">
+<parameter_description> System argument vector
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The number of columns in @tree_view after insertion.
+<return> A newly-referenced #GtkApplication
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -42479,50 +41135,32 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_embed_page_setup">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_stop_editing">
<description>
-Embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.
+Informs the cell renderer that the editing is stopped.
+If @canceled is %TRUE, the cell renderer will emit the
+#GtkCellRenderer::editing-canceled signal.
-Since: 2.18
+This function should be called by cell renderer implementations
+in response to the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal of
+#GtkCellEditable.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="embed">
-<parameter_description> embed page setup selection
+<parameter name="canceled">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the editing has been canceled
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_gicon">
-<description>
-Retrieves the #GIcon being displayed by the #GtkStatusIcon.
-The storage type of the status icon must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
-%GTK_IMAGE_GICON (see gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type()).
-The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
-returned #GIcon.
-
-If this function fails, @icon is left unchanged;
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the displayed icon, or %NULL if the image is empty
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_window">
<description>
Returns the #GdkWindow which contains the entry's icon at
@@ -42550,22 +41188,49 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_horizontal">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window">
<description>
-Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
-
-Since: 2.16
+Adds a child at fixed coordinates in one of the text widget's
+windows. The window must have nonzero size (see
+gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()). Note that the child
+coordinates are given relative to the #GdkWindow in question, and
+that these coordinates have no sane relationship to scrolling. When
+placing a child in #GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET, scrolling is
+irrelevant, the child floats above all scrollable areas. But when
+placing a child in one of the scrollable windows (border windows or
+text window), you'll need to compute the child's correct position
+in buffer coordinates any time scrolling occurs or buffer changes
+occur, and then call gtk_text_view_move_child() to update the
+child's position. Unfortunately there's no good way to detect that
+scrolling has occurred, using the current API; a possible hack
+would be to update all child positions when the scroll adjustments
+change or the text buffer changes. See bug 64518 on
+bugzilla.gnome.org for status of fixing this issue.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="which_window">
+<parameter_description> which window the child should appear in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xpos">
+<parameter_description> X position of child in window coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ypos">
+<parameter_description> Y position of child in window coordinates
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_info_is_local">
@@ -42587,24 +41252,24 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_adjustment_set_step_increment">
+<function name="gtk_layout_get_size">
<description>
-Sets the step increment of the adjustment.
-
-See gtk_adjustment_set_lower() about how to compress multiple
-emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment
-properties.
-
-Since: 2.14
+Gets the size that has been set on the layout, and that determines
+the total extents of the layout's scrollbar area. See
+gtk_layout_set_size ().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="step_increment">
-<parameter_description> the new step increment
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> location to store the width set on @layout, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> location to store the height set on @layout, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -42631,6 +41296,35 @@ items.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels">
+<description>
+Returns a newly allocated list of the widgets, normally labels, for
+which this widget is the target of a mnemonic (see for example,
+gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget()).
+
+The widgets in the list are not individually referenced. If you
+want to iterate through the list and perform actions involving
+callbacks that might destroy the widgets, you
+<emphasis>must</emphasis> call <literal>g_list_foreach (result,
+(GFunc)g_object_ref, NULL)</literal> first, and then unref all the
+widgets afterwards.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the list of
+mnemonic labels; free this list
+with g_list_free() when you are done with it.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new_from_stock">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem containing the image and text from a
@@ -42650,8 +41344,8 @@ gtk_accel_map_add_entry() to register it.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAccelGroup to add the menu items accelerator to,
-or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAccelGroup to add the menu items
+accelerator to, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -42659,20 +41353,26 @@ or %NULL.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_from_widget">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_text_chars">
<description>
-Obtains the item factory from which a widget was created.
+Moves backward by @count text characters (pixbufs, widgets,
+etc. do not count as characters for this). Equivalent to moving
+through the results of gtk_text_iter_get_text (), rather than
+gtk_text_iter_get_slice ().
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of chars to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the item factory from which @widget was created, or %NULL
+<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
</return>
</function>
@@ -42715,28 +41415,6 @@ by @widget are invalidated.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip">
-<description>
-Sets the tooltip of the status icon.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_text() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> the tooltip text, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_filter_add_age">
<description>
Adds a rule that allows resources based on their age - that is, the number
@@ -42758,20 +41436,16 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_vertical">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_new">
<description>
-Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
+Creates a new empty #GtkComboBox.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
+<return> A new #GtkComboBox.
</return>
</function>
@@ -42796,19 +41470,20 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_spinner_new">
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_load">
<description>
-Returns a new cell renderer which will show a spinner to indicate
-activity.
-
-Since: 2.20
+Parses a file previously saved with gtk_accel_map_save() for
+accelerator specifications, and propagates them accordingly.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="file_name">
+<parameter_description> a file containing accelerator specifications,
+in the GLib file name encoding
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkCellRenderer
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_new">
@@ -42976,30 +41651,20 @@ Makes a copy of a #GtkSelectionData structure and its data.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_targets_include_image">
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_save_fd">
<description>
-Given a #GtkSelectionData object holding a list of targets,
-determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
-provide a #GdkPixbuf.
+Filedescriptor variant of gtk_accel_map_save().
-Since: 2.6
+Note that the file descriptor will not be closed by this function.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="writable">
-<parameter_description> whether to accept only targets for which GTK+ knows
-how to convert a pixbuf into the format
+<parameter name="fd">
+<parameter_description> a valid writable file descriptor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
-and a suitable target for images is included, otherwise %FALSE.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_page_increment">
@@ -43045,25 +41710,28 @@ list of color names readable by gdk_color_parse().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_name">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_gravity">
<description>
-Returns the program name displayed in the about dialog.
+Window gravity defines the meaning of coordinates passed to
+gtk_window_move(). See gtk_window_move() and #GdkGravity for
+more details.
-Since: 2.6
+The default window gravity is #GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST which will
+typically "do what you mean."
-Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_about_dialog_get_program_name() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gravity">
+<parameter_description> window gravity
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The program name. The string is owned by the about
-dialog and must not be modified.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_get_policy">
@@ -43109,29 +41777,23 @@ show invisible text at all.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_class_path">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_hover_selection">
<description>
-Same as gtk_widget_path(), but always uses the name of a widget's type,
-never uses a custom name set with gtk_widget_set_name().
+Enables of disables the hover selection mode of @tree_view.
+Hover selection makes the selected row follow the pointer.
+Currently, this works only for the selection modes
+%GTK_SELECTION_SINGLE and %GTK_SELECTION_BROWSE.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path_length">
-<parameter_description> location to store the length of the class path, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> (out) (allow-none) location to store the class path as an allocated string, or %NULL
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path_reversed">
-<parameter_description> (out) (allow-none) location to store the reverse class path as an allocated
-string, or %NULL
+<parameter name="hover">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable hover selection mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -43226,46 +41888,22 @@ filename, size, and pixbuf fields if those are not %NULL.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_visible_vertical">
<description>
-You do not need to use this function. Creates a row reference based on
- path This reference will keep pointing to the node pointed to by @path,
-so long as it exists. If @path isn't a valid path in @model, then %NULL is
-returned. However, unlike references created with
-gtk_tree_row_reference_new(), it does not listen to the model for changes.
-The creator of the row reference must do this explicitly using
-gtk_tree_row_reference_inserted(), gtk_tree_row_reference_deleted(),
-gtk_tree_row_reference_reordered().
-
-These functions must be called exactly once per proxy when the
-corresponding signal on the model is emitted. This single call
-updates all row references for that proxy. Since built-in GTK+
-objects like #GtkTreeView already use this mechanism internally,
-using them as the proxy object will produce unpredictable results.
-Further more, passing the same object as @model and @proxy
-doesn't work for reasons of internal implementation.
-
-This type of row reference is primarily meant by structures that need to
-carefully monitor exactly when a row reference updates itself, and is not
-generally needed by most applications.
+Returns whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically.
+See gtk_tool_item_set_visible_vertical().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> A proxy #GObject
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreePath to monitor
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
+<return> Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -43290,6 +41928,20 @@ resource's URI or %NULL. Use g_free() when done using it.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_unlock">
+<description>
+Undoes the last call to gtk_accel_group_lock() on this @accel_group.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_dither">
<description>
Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.
@@ -43344,32 +41996,6 @@ gtk_widget_queue_draw() instead of making up expose events.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_buildable_get_internal_child">
-<description>
-Get the internal child called @childname of the @buildable object.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buildable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuildable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="childname">
-<parameter_description> name of child
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the internal child of the buildable object
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_exclusive">
<description>
Sets whether the group should be exclusive or not.
@@ -43422,22 +42048,25 @@ get a #GtkTextTag, then calls gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_layout_new">
<description>
-Creates a status icon displaying a #GIcon. If the icon is a
-themed icon, it will be updated when the theme changes.
+Creates a new #GtkLayout. Unless you have a specific adjustment
+you'd like the layout to use for scrolling, pass %NULL for
+ hadjustment and @vadjustment.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GIcon
+<parameter name="hadjustment">
+<parameter_description> horizontal scroll adjustment, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="vadjustment">
+<parameter_description> vertical scroll adjustment, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
-
+<return> a new #GtkLayout
</return>
</function>
@@ -43512,10 +42141,30 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_pixels_above_lines">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_unset_rows_drag_dest">
<description>
-Gets the default number of pixels to put above paragraphs.
+Undoes the effect of
+gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this method sets
+#GtkTreeView:reorderable to %FALSE.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_view_reset_im_context">
+<description>
+Reset the input method context of the text view if needed.
+
+This can be necessary in the case where modifying the buffer
+would confuse on-going input method behavior.
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -43524,33 +42173,29 @@ Gets the default number of pixels to put above paragraphs.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> default number of pixels above paragraphs
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toggle_button_set_mode">
+<function name="gtk_link_button_new_with_label">
<description>
-Sets whether the button is displayed as a separate indicator and label.
-You can call this function on a checkbutton or a radiobutton with
- draw_indicator = %FALSE to make the button look like a normal button
+Creates a new #GtkLinkButton containing a label.
-This function only affects instances of classes like #GtkCheckButton
-and #GtkRadioButton that derive from #GtkToggleButton,
-not instances of #GtkToggleButton itself.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToggleButton
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> a valid URI
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="draw_indicator">
-<parameter_description> if %TRUE, draw the button as a separate indicator
-and label; if %FALSE, draw the button like a normal button
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text of the button
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new link button widget.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_new_from_stock">
@@ -43573,21 +42218,22 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_website">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_do_overwrite_confirmation">
<description>
-Returns the website URL.
+Queries whether a file chooser is set to confirm for overwriting when the user
+types a file name that already exists.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The website URL. The string is owned by the about
-dialog and must not be modified.
+<return> %TRUE if the file chooser will present a confirmation dialog;
+%FALSE otherwise.
</return>
</function>
@@ -43688,113 +42334,140 @@ The value will be copied or referenced by the store if appropriate.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_selection_unselect_range">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_minimum_key_length">
<description>
-Unselects a range of nodes, determined by @start_path and @end_path
-inclusive.
+Returns the minimum key length as set for @completion.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_path">
-<parameter_description> The initial node of the range.
+</parameters>
+<return> The currently used minimum key length.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark_by_name">
+<description>
+Deletes the mark named @name; the mark must exist. See
+gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark() for details.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end_path">
-<parameter_description> The initial node of the range.
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> name of a mark in @buffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_minimum_key_length">
+<function name="gtk_file_filter_new">
<description>
-Returns the minimum key length as set for @completion.
+Creates a new #GtkFileFilter with no rules added to it.
+Such a filter doesn't accept any files, so is not
+particularly useful until you add rules with
+gtk_file_filter_add_mime_type(), gtk_file_filter_add_pattern(),
+or gtk_file_filter_add_custom(). To create a filter
+that accepts any file, use:
+|[
+GtkFileFilter *filter = gtk_file_filter_new ();
+gtk_file_filter_add_pattern (filter, "*");
+]|
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The currently used minimum key length.
+<return> a new #GtkFileFilter
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_parse_binding">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_no_show_all">
<description>
-Parse a binding entry from a gtkrc file.
+Returns the current value of the GtkWidget:no-show-all property,
+which determines whether calls to gtk_widget_show_all() and
+gtk_widget_hide_all() will affect this widget.
-Deprecated: 2.12: There should be no need to call this function outside GTK+.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scanner">
-<parameter_description> GtkRC scanner
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> expected token upon errors, %G_TOKEN_NONE on success.
+<return> the current value of the "no-show-all" property.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark_by_name">
+<function name="gtk_paint_resize_grip">
<description>
-Deletes the mark named @name; the mark must exist. See
-gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark() for details.
+Draws a resize grip in the given rectangle on @window using the given
+parameters.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> name of a mark in @buffer
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_from_key_file">
-<description>
-Reads a paper size from the group @group_name in the key file
- key_file
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the papersize from
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name ofthe group in the key file to read,
-or %NULL to read the first group
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="edge">
+<parameter_description> the edge in which to draw the resize grip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object with the restored
-paper size, or %NULL if an error occurred.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_attributes_unref">
@@ -43856,34 +42529,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_drag_dest_row_drop_possible">
-<description>
-Determines whether a drop is possible before the given @dest_path,
-at the same depth as @dest_path. i.e., can we drop the data in
- selection_data at that location. @dest_path does not have to
-exist; the return value will almost certainly be %FALSE if the
-parent of @dest_path doesn't exist, though.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="drag_dest">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeDragDest
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_path">
-<parameter_description> destination row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> the data being dragged
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if a drop is possible before @dest_path
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_right_justified">
<description>
Gets whether the menu item appears justified at the right
@@ -43945,9 +42590,9 @@ see the docs for <envar>GTK_PATH</envar> in
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_n_copies">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_dither">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.
Since: 2.10
@@ -43958,67 +42603,75 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of copies to print
+<return> the dithering that is used
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_foreach">
<description>
-Returns the text alignment used for @tool_item. Custom subclasses of
-#GtkToolItem should call this function to find out how text should
-be aligned.
-
-Since: 2.20
+Calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.
+If @func returns %TRUE, then the tree ceases to be walked, and
+gtk_tree_model_foreach() returns.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> A function to be called on each row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> User data to passed to func.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #gfloat indicating the horizontal text alignment
-used for @tool_item
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_retrieve_proxy_menu_item">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_is_descendant">
<description>
-Returns the #GtkMenuItem that was last set by
-gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item(), ie. the #GtkMenuItem
-that is going to appear in the overflow menu.
+Returns %TRUE if @path is a descendant of @ancestor.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ancestor">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkTreePath
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
-overflow menu for @tool_item.
-
+<return> %TRUE if @ancestor contains @path somewhere below it
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_set_title">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_item_position">
<description>
-Sets the title for the color selection dialog.
+Sets the position of @item in the list of children of @group.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> String containing new window title.
+<parameter name="item">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkToolItem to move to a new position, should
+be a child of @group.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the new position of @item in @group, starting with 0.
+The position -1 means end of list.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -44094,58 +42747,64 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_size_group_add_widget">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_track_print_status">
<description>
-Adds a widget to a #GtkSizeGroup. In the future, the requisition
-of the widget will be determined as the maximum of its requisition
-and the requisition of the other widgets in the size group.
-Whether this applies horizontally, vertically, or in both directions
-depends on the mode of the size group. See gtk_size_group_set_mode().
+If track_status is %TRUE, the print operation will try to continue report
+on the status of the print job in the printer queues and printer. This
+can allow your application to show things like "out of paper" issues,
+and when the print job actually reaches the printer.
-When the widget is destroyed or no longer referenced elsewhere, it will
-be removed from the size group.
+This function is often implemented using some form of polling, so it should
+not be enabled unless needed.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGroup
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to add
+<parameter name="track_status">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to track status after printing
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_from_file">
+<function name="gtk_get_current_event_state">
<description>
-Sets the icon for @window.
-Warns on failure if @err is %NULL.
-
-This function is equivalent to calling gtk_window_set_icon()
-with a pixbuf created by loading the image from @filename.
+If there is a current event and it has a state field, place
+that state field in @state and return %TRUE, otherwise return
+%FALSE.
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> location of icon file
+<parameter name="state">
+<parameter_description> a location to store the state of the current event
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="err">
-<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if there was a current event and it had a state field
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_visible">
+<description>
+Returns %TRUE if @tree_column is visible.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if setting the icon succeeded.
-
+<return> whether the column is visible or not. If it is visible, then
+the tree will show the column.
</return>
</function>
@@ -44302,25 +42961,6 @@ Accessor for whether the dialog has a separator.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_cell_renderers">
-<description>
-Returns a newly-allocated #GList of all the cell renderers in the column,
-in no particular order. The list must be freed with g_list_free().
-
-Deprecated: 2.18: use gtk_cell_layout_get_cells() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A list of #GtkCellRenderers
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_data_type">
<description>
Retrieves the data type of the selection.
@@ -44428,6 +43068,26 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_set_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkIconSet. A #GtkIconSet represents a single icon
+in various sizes and widget states. It can provide a #GdkPixbuf
+for a given size and state on request, and automatically caches
+some of the rendered #GdkPixbuf objects.
+
+Normally you would use gtk_widget_render_icon() instead of
+using #GtkIconSet directly. The one case where you'd use
+#GtkIconSet is to create application-specific icon sets to place in
+a #GtkIconFactory.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkIconSet
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_toplevels">
<description>
Obtains a list of all toplevel widgets of the requested types.
@@ -44453,30 +43113,6 @@ all toplevel widgets of the requested types. Free the returned list with g_slis
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_padding">
-<description>
-Sets the renderer's padding.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xpad">
-<parameter_description> the x padding of the cell renderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ypad">
-<parameter_description> the y padding of the cell renderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_drag_dest_item">
<description>
Sets the item that is highlighted for feedback.
@@ -44547,6 +43183,25 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_append_index">
+<description>
+Appends a new index to a path. As a result, the depth of the path is
+increased.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="index_">
+<parameter_description> The index.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_new_from_icon_set">
<description>
Creates a #GtkImage displaying an icon set. Sample stock sizes are
@@ -44595,6 +43250,26 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_set_new_from_pixbuf">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkIconSet with @pixbuf as the default/fallback
+source image. If you don't add any additional #GtkIconSource to the
+icon set, all variants of the icon will be created from @pixbuf,
+using scaling, pixelation, etc. as required to adjust the icon size
+or make the icon look insensitive/prelighted.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkIconSet
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_box_set_homogeneous">
<description>
Sets the #GtkBox:homogeneous property of @box, controlling
@@ -44720,33 +43395,29 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_iter_to_iter">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_header_image">
<description>
-Sets @filter_iter to point to the row in @filter that corresponds to the
-row pointed at by @child_iter. If @filter_iter was not set, %FALSE is
-returned.
+Sets a header image for @page. This image is displayed in the header
+area of the assistant when @page is the current page.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter_iter">
-<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row on the child model.
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> the new header image @page
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @filter_iter was set, i.e. if @child_iter is a
-valid iterator pointing to a visible row in child model.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_hsv_set_metrics">
@@ -44838,23 +43509,16 @@ release it when it is no longer needed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_range_rect">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_default_colormap">
<description>
-This function returns the area that contains the range's trough
-and its steppers, in widget->window coordinates.
-
-This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
-
-Since: 2.20
+Sets the default colormap to use when creating widgets.
+gtk_widget_push_colormap() is a better function to use if
+you only want to affect a few widgets, rather than all widgets.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="range_rect">
-<parameter_description> return location for the range rectangle
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -44876,7 +43540,7 @@ needed. Multihead-aware applications should keep this in mind.
Also remember that the size request is not necessarily the size
a widget will actually be allocated.
-See also gtk_widget_get_child_requisition().
+Deprecated: 3.0: Use gtk_size_request_get_size() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44915,35 +43579,41 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_item_activated">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_opacity">
<description>
-Activates the item determined by @path.
+Fetches the requested opacity for this window. See
+gtk_window_set_opacity().
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath to be activated
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the requested opacity for this window.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_editable_cut_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rubber_banding">
<description>
-Removes the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
-puts it on the clipboard.
+Enables or disables rubber banding in @tree_view. If the selection mode
+is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the user to select
+multiple rows by dragging the mouse.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="enable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable rubber banding
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -45144,21 +43814,21 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_preview_text">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_current_page">
<description>
-Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
+Returns the page number of the current page.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fsd">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the text displayed in the preview area.
-This string is owned by the widget and should not be
-modified or freed
+<return> the index (starting from 0) of the current
+page in the notebook. If the notebook has no pages, then
+-1 will be returned.
</return>
</function>
@@ -45255,24 +43925,23 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_list">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_get_dpi_y">
<description>
-Sets an icon list to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
-had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them to set up a
-window-specific icon list. This function allows you to set up the
-icon for all windows in your app at once.
-
-See gtk_window_set_icon_list() for more details.
+Obtains the vertical resolution of the #GtkPrintContext,
+in dots per inch.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> a list of #GdkPixbuf
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the vertical resolution of @context
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_frame_get_shadow_type">
@@ -45347,6 +44016,32 @@ gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded">
+<description>
+If the text direction is wildcarded, this source can be used
+as the base image for an icon in any #GtkTextDirection.
+If the text direction is not wildcarded, then the
+text direction the icon source applies to should be set
+with gtk_icon_source_set_direction(), and the icon source
+will only be used with that text direction.
+
+#GtkIconSet prefers non-wildcarded sources (exact matches) over
+wildcarded sources, and will use an exact match when possible.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to wildcard the text direction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_title">
<description>
Gets the title for @page.
@@ -45422,28 +44117,6 @@ displaying the file.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_lookup_icon_set">
-<description>
-Looks up @stock_id in the icon factories associated with @style
-and the default icon factory, returning an icon set if found,
-otherwise %NULL.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> icon set of @stock_id
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_deserialize">
<description>
This function deserializes rich text in format @format and inserts
@@ -45517,23 +44190,24 @@ defined as @widget->window coordinates for widgets that are not
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_blinking">
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_set_step_increment">
<description>
-Makes the status icon start or stop blinking.
-Note that blinking user interface elements may be problematic
-for some users, and thus may be turned off, in which case
-this setting has no effect.
+Sets the step increment of the adjustment.
-Since: 2.10
+See gtk_adjustment_set_lower() about how to compress multiple
+emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment
+properties.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="blinking">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to turn blinking on, %FALSE to turn it off
+<parameter name="step_increment">
+<parameter_description> the new step increment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -45560,34 +44234,6 @@ algorithms).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_init_check">
-<description>
-This function does the same work as gtk_init() with only
-a single change: It does not terminate the program if the GUI can't be
-initialized. Instead it returns %FALSE on failure.
-
-This way the application can fall back to some other means of communication
-with the user - for example a curses or command line interface.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argc</parameter> parameter of your
-main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argv</parameter> parameter of main().
-Any parameters understood by gtk_init() are stripped before return.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
-%FALSE otherwise.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_unrealize">
<description>
This function is only useful in widget implementations.
@@ -45623,73 +44269,22 @@ dialog and must not be modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_set_screen">
-<description>
-Sets the screen for a recent manager; the screen is used to
-track the user's currently configured recently used documents
-storage.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-Deprecated: 2.12: This function has been deprecated and should
-not be used in newly written code. Calling this function has
-no effect.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_line">
<description>
-Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format (with
-printf()-style), which is marked up with the
-<link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
-
-Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
-bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
-
-Due to an oversight, this function does not escape special XML characters
-like gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup() does. Thus, if the arguments
-may contain special XML characters, you should use g_markup_printf_escaped()
-to escape it.
-
-<informalexample><programlisting>
-gchar *msg;
-
-msg = g_markup_printf_escaped (message_format, ...);
-gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup (message_dialog, "%s", msg);
-g_free (msg);
-</programlisting></informalexample>
+Returns the line number containing the iterator. Lines in
+a #GtkTextBuffer are numbered beginning with 0 for the first
+line in the buffer.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="message_dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="message_format">
-<parameter_description> printf()-style markup string (see
- <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>), or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a line number
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_get_for_attach_widget">
@@ -45745,55 +44340,25 @@ of gtk_widget_modify_bg().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkWindow, which is a toplevel window that can
-contain other widgets. Nearly always, the type of the window should
-be #GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL. If you're implementing something like a
-popup menu from scratch (which is a bad idea, just use #GtkMenu),
-you might use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP. #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP is not for
-dialogs, though in some other toolkits dialogs are called "popups".
-In GTK+, #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP means a pop-up menu or pop-up tooltip.
-On X11, popup windows are not controlled by the <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>.
-
-If you simply want an undecorated window (no window borders), use
-gtk_window_set_decorated(), don't use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> type of window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkWindow.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_action_connect_proxy">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label">
<description>
-Connects a widget to an action object as a proxy. Synchronises
-various properties of the action with the widget (such as label
-text, icon, tooltip, etc), and attaches a callback so that the
-action gets activated when the proxy widget does.
+Sets whether the file chooser should display a stock label with the name of
+the file that is being previewed; the default is %TRUE. Applications that
+want to draw the whole preview area themselves should set this to %FALSE and
+display the name themselves in their preview widget.
-If the widget is already connected to an action, it is disconnected
-first.
+See also: gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()
Since: 2.4
-Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_set_related_action() instead.
-
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> the proxy widget
+<parameter name="use_label">
+<parameter_description> whether to display a stock label with the name of the previewed file
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -45834,7 +44399,7 @@ Retrieves the current ellipsize mode for the tool shell. Tool items must not
call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_ellipsize_mode()
instead.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45848,24 +44413,6 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_homogeneous_tabs">
-<description>
-Sets whether the tabs must have all the same size or not.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="homogeneous">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if all tabs should be the same size.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_parse_args">
<description>
Parses command line arguments, and initializes global
@@ -45915,78 +44462,6 @@ that menu item's label.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert_stock">
-<description>
-Inserts a stock item at the specified position of the toolbar. If
- stock_id is not a known stock item ID, it's inserted verbatim,
-except that underscores used to mark mnemonics are removed.
-
- callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkToolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> The id of the stock item you want to insert
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> The text in the tooltip of the toolbar button
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> The private text of the tooltip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> The callback called when the toolbar button is clicked.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data passed to callback
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> The position the button shall be inserted at.
--1 means at the end.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the inserted widget
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_image_set">
-<description>
-Sets the #GtkImage.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_image_set_from_image() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="val">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkBitmap that indicates which parts of the image should be transparent.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_right_margin">
<description>
Sets the default right margin for text in the text view.
@@ -46022,24 +44497,29 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_size_wildcarded().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_filter_add_mime_type">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_get_indices_with_depth">
<description>
-Adds a rule allowing a given mime type to @filter.
+Returns the current indices of @path.
+This is an array of integers, each representing a node in a tree.
+It also returns the number of elements in the array.
+The array should not be freed.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkFileFilter
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mime_type">
-<parameter_description> name of a MIME type
+<parameter name="depth">
+<parameter_description> Number of elements returned in the integer array
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The current indices, or %NULL.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_paint_spinner">
@@ -46099,26 +44579,22 @@ output should not be clipped
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_set_accel_group">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_settings">
<description>
-Specifies an @accel_group to add the menu items accelerator to
-(this only applies to stock items so a stock item must already
-be set, make sure to call gtk_image_menu_item_set_use_stock()
-and gtk_menu_item_set_label() with a valid stock item first).
-
-If you want this menu item to have changeable accelerators then
-you shouldnt need this (see gtk_image_menu_item_new_from_stock()).
+Sets the #GtkPrintSettings for the #GtkPrintUnixDialog. Typically,
+this is used to restore saved print settings from a previous print
+operation before the print dialog is shown.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image_menu_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImageMenuItem
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAccelGroup
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -46165,46 +44641,27 @@ with g_slist_free(), and the filenames with g_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_transient_for">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_cursor">
<description>
-Dialog windows should be set transient for the main application
-window they were spawned from. This allows <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window managers</link> to e.g. keep the
-dialog on top of the main window, or center the dialog over the
-main window. gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons() and other convenience
-functions in GTK+ will sometimes call
-gtk_window_set_transient_for() on your behalf.
-
-Passing %NULL for @parent unsets the current transient window.
+Fills in @path and @focus_column with the current path and focus column. If
+the cursor isn't currently set, then * path will be %NULL. If no column
+currently has focus, then * focus_column will be %NULL.
-On Windows, this function puts the child window on top of the parent,
-much as the window manager would have done on X.
+The returned #GtkTreePath must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() when
+you are done with it.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> parent window, or %NULL
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to be filled with the current cursor path, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_calendar_freeze">
-<description>
-Does nothing. Previously locked the display of the calendar until
-it was thawed with gtk_calendar_thaw().
-
-Deprecated: 2.8:
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
+<parameter name="focus_column">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to be filled with the current focus column, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -46275,6 +44732,31 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_range_set_increments">
+<description>
+Sets the step and page sizes for the range.
+The step size is used when the user clicks the #GtkScrollbar
+arrows or moves #GtkScale via arrow keys. The page size
+is used for example when moving via Page Up or Page Down keys.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> step size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> page size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step">
<description>
Sets the fraction of total progress bar length to move the
@@ -46359,15 +44841,27 @@ with a context for the source side of a drag)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_hide">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_cursor_hadjustment">
<description>
-Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
-hidden (invisible to the user).
+Hooks up an adjustment to the cursor position in an entry, so that when
+the cursor is moved, the adjustment is scrolled to show that position.
+See gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
+the adjustment.
+
+The adjustment has to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system
+as the entry.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the cursor
+is moved, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -46444,53 +44938,33 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_arrow">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_cell_set_cell_data">
<description>
-Draws an arrow in the given rectangle on @window using the given
-parameters. @arrow_type determines the direction of the arrow.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_arrow() instead.
+Sets the cell renderer based on the @tree_model and @iter. That is, for
+every attribute mapping in @tree_column, it will get a value from the set
+column on the @iter, and use that value to set the attribute on the cell
+renderer. This is used primarily by the #GtkTreeView.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="arrow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of arrow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fill">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the arrow tip should be filled
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeModel to to get the cell renderers attributes from.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter to to get the cell renderer's attributes from.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
+<parameter name="is_expander">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the row has children
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
+<parameter name="is_expanded">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the row has visible children
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -46516,48 +44990,30 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_button_set_use_size">
+<function name="gtk_table_get_size">
<description>
-If @use_size is %TRUE, the font name will be written using the selected size.
+Returns the number of rows and columns in the table.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="font_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_size">
-<parameter_description> If %TRUE, font name will be written using the selected size.
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_get_item_by_action">
-<description>
-Obtains the menu item which was constructed from the first
-#GtkItemFactoryEntry with the given @action.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
+<parameter name="rows">
+<parameter_description> return location for the number of
+rows, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> an action as specified in the @callback_action field
-of #GtkItemFactoryEntry
+<parameter name="columns">
+<parameter_description> return location for the number
+of columns, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the menu item which corresponds to the given action, or %NULL
-if no menu item was found
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_get_use_stock">
@@ -46662,57 +45118,39 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_new">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_get_width">
<description>
-Creates a new empty #GtkComboBox.
+Obtains the width of the #GtkPrintContext, in pixels.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkComboBox.
+<return> the width of @context
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_render_icon">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_default_source">
<description>
-A convenience function that uses the theme engine and RC file
-settings for @widget to look up @stock_id and render it to
-a pixbuf. @stock_id should be a stock icon ID such as
-#GTK_STOCK_OPEN or #GTK_STOCK_OK. @size should be a size
-such as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU. @detail should be a string that
-identifies the widget or code doing the rendering, so that
-theme engines can special-case rendering for that widget or code.
-
-The pixels in the returned #GdkPixbuf are shared with the rest of
-the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be freed
-after use with g_object_unref().
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> a stock ID
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> (type int) a stock size. A size of (GtkIconSize)-1 means
-render at the size of the source and don't scale (if there are
-multiple source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> render detail to pass to theme engine
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the stock ID wasn't known
+<return> the default source
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -46734,28 +45172,57 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_numbers">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_label">
<description>
-Whether to show recently used resources prepended by a unique number.
-
-Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_recent_chooser_menu_set_show_numbers() instead.
+Sets the label of the tool item group. The label is displayed in the header
+of the group.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_numbers">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to show numbers, %FALSE otherwise
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the new human-readable label of of the group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_info_bar_add_button">
+<description>
+Adds a button with the given text (or a stock button, if button_text
+is a stock ID) and sets things up so that clicking the button will emit
+the "response" signal with the given response_id. The button is appended
+to the end of the info bars's action area. The button widget is
+returned, but usually you don't need it.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="info_bar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkInfoBar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="button_text">
+<parameter_description> text of button, or stock ID
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="response_id">
+<parameter_description> response ID for the button
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the button widget that was added
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_get_pixmap">
<description>
Gets the pixmap and mask being displayed by the #GtkImage.
@@ -46784,77 +45251,69 @@ mask, or %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_add_filter">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_drag_source">
<description>
-Adds @filter to the list of filters that the user can select between.
-When a filter is selected, only files that are passed by that
-filter are displayed.
-
-Note that the @chooser takes ownership of the filter, so you have to
-ref and sink it if you want to keep a reference.
+Sets the tool palette as a drag source.
+Enables all groups and items in the tool palette as drag sources
+on button 1 and button 3 press with copy and move actions.
+See gtk_drag_source_set().
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkToolPaletteDragTarget<!-- -->s
+which the widget should support
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_int_with_default">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing">
<description>
-Returns the value of @key, interpreted as
-an integer, or the default value.
+Passes an activate event to the cell renderer for possible processing.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRenderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="def">
-<parameter_description> the default value
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> widget that received the event
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the integer value of @key
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_remove_action_group">
-<description>
-Removes an action group from the list of action groups associated
-with @self.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> widget-dependent string representation of the event location;
+e.g. for #GtkTreeView, a string representation of #GtkTreePath
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group to be removed
+<parameter name="background_area">
+<parameter_description> background area as passed to gtk_cell_renderer_render()
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell_area">
+<parameter_description> cell area as passed to gtk_cell_renderer_render()
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> render flags
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A new #GtkCellEditable, or %NULL
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type">
@@ -47014,27 +45473,10 @@ mnemonic character
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_get_event_widget">
-<description>
-If @event is %NULL or the event was not associated with any widget,
-returns %NULL, otherwise returns the widget that received the event
-originally.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the widget that originally received @event, or %NULL
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_paint_box">
+<function name="gtk_paint_slider">
<description>
-Draws a box on @window with the given parameters.
+Draws a slider in the given rectangle on @window using the
+given style and orientation.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -47051,7 +45493,7 @@ Draws a box on @window with the given parameters.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
+<parameter_description> a shadow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
@@ -47068,19 +45510,44 @@ output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the box
+<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the box
+<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the box
+<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the box
+<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the orientation to be used
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_gicon">
+<description>
+Makes @status_icon display the #GIcon.
+See gtk_status_icon_new_from_gicon() for details.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> a GIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -47168,24 +45635,46 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_icon_list">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_ellipsize">
<description>
-Retrieves the list of icons set by gtk_window_set_icon_list().
-The list is copied, but the reference count on each
-member won't be incremented.
+Gets the ellipsization mode of @group.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> copy of window's icon list
+<return> the #PangoEllipsizeMode of @group
+
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_logo_icon_name">
+<description>
+Sets the pixbuf to be displayed as logo in the about dialog.
+If it is %NULL, the default window icon set with
+gtk_window_set_default_icon() will be used.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_selected_items">
<description>
Creates a list of paths of all selected items. Additionally, if you are
@@ -47213,26 +45702,6 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_is_paused">
-<description>
-Returns whether the printer is currently paused.
-A paused printer still accepts jobs, but it is not
-printing them.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @printer is paused
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_factory_lookup_default">
<description>
Looks for an icon in the list of default icon factories. For
@@ -47273,40 +45742,6 @@ Returns %TRUE if the node pointed to by @path is expanded in @tree_view.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tooltips_get_info_from_tip_window">
-<description>
-Determines the tooltips and the widget they belong to from the window in
-which they are displayed.
-
-This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
-applications should have little use for it.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-Deprecated: 2.12:
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tip_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltips">
-<parameter_description> the return location for the tooltips which are displayed
-in @tip_window, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="current_widget">
-<parameter_description> the return location for the widget whose tooltips
-are displayed, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @tip_window is displaying tooltips, otherwise %FALSE.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_reorderable">
<description>
Gets whether the tab can be reordered via drag and drop or not.
@@ -47406,6 +45841,29 @@ views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_range_get_range_rect">
+<description>
+This function returns the area that contains the range's trough
+and its steppers, in widget->window coordinates.
+
+This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="range_rect">
+<parameter_description> return location for the range rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_layout_get_cells">
<description>
Returns the cell renderers which have been added to @cell_layout.
@@ -47426,29 +45884,15 @@ g_list_free() when no longer needed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_new">
+<function name="gtk_vbutton_box_new">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkPrinter.
+Creates a new vertical button box.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the printer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="backend">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintBackend
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="virtual_">
-<parameter_description> whether the printer is virtual
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPrinter
-
+<return> a new button box #GtkWidget.
</return>
</function>
@@ -47501,29 +45945,26 @@ character in @str will match embedded pixbufs or child widgets.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_attributes">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_new">
<description>
-Sets the attributes in the list as the attributes of @tree_column.
-The attributes should be in attribute/column order, as in
-gtk_tree_view_column_add_attribute(). All existing attributes
-are removed, and replaced with the new attributes.
+Creates a new file-selecting button widget.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell_renderer">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkCellRenderer we're setting the attributes of
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the title of the browse dialog.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> A %NULL-terminated list of attributes.
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the open mode for the widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new button widget.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_clipboard_request_uris">
@@ -47558,53 +45999,46 @@ one way or the other.)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_create_pango_layout">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_stock">
<description>
-Creates a new #PangoLayout with the appropriate font map,
-font description, and base direction for drawing text for
-this widget.
-
-If you keep a #PangoLayout created in this way around, in order to
-notify the layout of changes to the base direction or font of this
-widget, you must call pango_layout_context_changed() in response to
-the #GtkWidget::style-set and #GtkWidget::direction-changed signals
-for the widget.
+Retrieves the stock id used for the icon, or %NULL if there is
+no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
+pixbuf, icon name or gicon).
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> text to set on the layout (can be %NULL)
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new #PangoLayout
+<return> A stock id, or %NULL if no icon is set or if the icon
+wasn't set from a stock id
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_new">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_title">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkScale.
+Retrieves the title of the browse dialog used by @button. The returned value
+should not be modified or freed.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the scale's orientation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment which sets the range of the scale, or
-%NULL to create a new adjustment.
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the button widget to examine.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkScale
+<return> a pointer to the browse dialog's title.
</return>
</function>
@@ -47655,6 +46089,25 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_group_get_current_grab">
+<description>
+Gets the current grab widget of the given group,
+see gtk_grab_add().
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindowGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the current grab widget of the group
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_get_tooltip_markup">
<description>
Gets the contents of the tooltip for @widget.
@@ -47708,20 +46161,30 @@ Retrieves the pulse step set with gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step()
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_save_fd">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_targets_include_image">
<description>
-Filedescriptor variant of gtk_accel_map_save().
+Given a #GtkSelectionData object holding a list of targets,
+determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
+provide a #GdkPixbuf.
-Note that the file descriptor will not be closed by this function.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fd">
-<parameter_description> a valid writable file descriptor
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="writable">
+<parameter_description> whether to accept only targets for which GTK+ knows
+how to convert a pixbuf into the format
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
+and a suitable target for images is included, otherwise %FALSE.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_set_is_important">
@@ -47746,23 +46209,43 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_animation">
+<function name="gtk_widget_device_is_shadowed">
<description>
-Causes the #GtkImage to display the given animation (or display
-nothing, if you set the animation to %NULL).
+Returns %TRUE if @device has been shadowed by a GTK+
+device grab on another widget, so it would stop sending
+events to @widget. This may be used in the
+#GtkWidget::grab-notify signal to check for specific
+devices. See gtk_device_grab_add().
+
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbufAnimation
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if there is an ongoing grab on @device
+by another #GtkWidget than @widget.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_vseparator_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkVSeparator.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkVSeparator.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_set_tooltip_text">
@@ -47891,36 +46374,6 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_get_layout_offsets">
-<description>
-Obtains the coordinates where the scale will draw the
-#PangoLayout representing the text in the scale. Remember
-when using the #PangoLayout function you need to convert to
-and from pixels using PANGO_PIXELS() or #PANGO_SCALE.
-
-If the #GtkScale:draw-value property is %FALSE, the return
-values are undefined.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> location to store X offset of layout, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> location to store Y offset of layout, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_dialog_add_action_widget">
<description>
Adds an activatable widget to the action area of a #GtkDialog,
@@ -47968,30 +46421,6 @@ boundary algorithms).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_gravity">
-<description>
-Window gravity defines the meaning of coordinates passed to
-gtk_window_move(). See gtk_window_move() and #GdkGravity for
-more details.
-
-The default window gravity is #GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST which will
-typically "do what you mean."
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gravity">
-<parameter_description> window gravity
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_expander_set_use_underline">
<description>
If true, an underline in the text of the expander label indicates
@@ -48013,27 +46442,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_popup_data_from_widget">
-<description>
-Obtains the @popup_data which was passed to
-gtk_item_factory_popup_with_data(). This data is available until the menu
-is popped down again.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> @popup_data associated with the item factory from
-which @widget was created, or %NULL if @widget wasn't created
-by an item factory
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_row_separator_func">
<description>
Sets the row separator function, which is used to determine
@@ -48064,50 +46472,6 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_unselect_path">
-<description>
-Unselects the row at @path.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath to be unselected.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_group_id">
-<description>
-Sets an group identificator for @notebook, notebooks sharing
-the same group identificator will be able to exchange tabs
-via drag and drop. A notebook with group identificator -1 will
-not be able to exchange tabs with any other notebook.
-
-Since: 2.10
-Deprecated: 2.12: use gtk_notebook_set_group() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_id">
-<parameter_description> a group identificator, or -1 to unset it
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_file_filter_get_name">
<description>
Gets the human-readable name for the filter. See gtk_file_filter_set_name().
@@ -48155,39 +46519,6 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_tree_to_bin_window_coords">
-<description>
-Converts tree coordinates (coordinates in full scrollable area of the tree)
-to bin_window coordinates.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tx">
-<parameter_description> tree X coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ty">
-<parameter_description> tree Y coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bx">
-<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate relative to bin_window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="by">
-<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate relative to bin_window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_page_setup_unix_dialog_get_page_setup">
<description>
Gets the currently selected page setup from the dialog.
@@ -48206,39 +46537,21 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_context_simple_add_table">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_numeric">
<description>
-Adds an additional table to search to the input context.
-Each row of the table consists of @max_seq_len key symbols
-followed by two #guint16 interpreted as the high and low
-words of a #gunicode value. Tables are searched starting
-from the last added.
+Returns whether non-numeric text can be typed into the spin button.
+See gtk_spin_button_set_numeric().
-The table must be sorted in dictionary order on the
-numeric value of the key symbol fields. (Values beyond
-the length of the sequence should be zero.)
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context_simple">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIMContextSimple
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> the table
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max_seq_len">
-<parameter_description> Maximum length of a sequence in the table
-(cannot be greater than #GTK_MAX_COMPOSE_LEN)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_seqs">
-<parameter_description> number of sequences in the table
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if only numeric text can be entered
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_model">
@@ -48266,10 +46579,13 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_select_multiple">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_action">
<description>
-Gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
-selector. See gtk_file_chooser_set_select_multiple().
+Sets the type of operation that the chooser is performing; the
+user interface is adapted to suit the selected action. For example,
+an option to create a new folder might be shown if the action is
+%GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE but not if the action is
+%GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN.
Since: 2.4
@@ -48279,10 +46595,12 @@ Since: 2.4
<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action that the file selector is performing
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if multiple files can be selected.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_item_padding">
@@ -48303,73 +46621,58 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_copyright">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_width_chars">
<description>
-Sets the copyright string to display in the about dialog.
-This should be a short string of one or two lines.
+Retrieves the desired width of @label, in characters. See
+gtk_label_set_width_chars().
Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="copyright">
-<parameter_description> (allow-none) the copyright string
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the width of the label in characters.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_state">
+<function name="gtk_application_run">
<description>
-Returns the widget's state. See gtk_widget_set_state().
+Runs the main loop; see g_application_run().
+The default implementation for #GtkApplication uses gtk_main().
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="app">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkApplication
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the state of @widget.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_reorderable">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_name">
<description>
-This function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder
-models that support the #GtkDragSourceIface and the
-#GtkDragDestIface. Both #GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore support
-these. If @reorderable is %TRUE, then the user can reorder the
-model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to
-these changes by connecting to the model's row_inserted and
-row_deleted signals. The reordering is implemented by setting up
-the tree view as a drag source and destination. Therefore, drag and
-drop can not be used in a reorderable view for any other purpose.
+Gets the name of the #GtkPaperSize.
-This function does not give you any degree of control over the order -- any
-reordering is allowed. If more control is needed, you should probably
-handle drag and drop manually.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="reorderable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the tree can be reordered.
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the name of @size
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_previous_alpha">
@@ -48438,50 +46741,6 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_popup">
-<description>
-Pops up the menu constructed from the item factory at (@x, @y).
-
-The @mouse_button parameter should be the mouse button pressed to initiate
-the menu popup. If the menu popup was initiated by something other than
-a mouse button press, such as a mouse button release or a keypress,
- mouse_button should be 0.
-
-The @time_ parameter should be the time stamp of the event that
-initiated the popup. If such an event is not available, use
-gtk_get_current_event_time() instead.
-
-The operation of the @mouse_button and the @time_ parameter is the same
-as the @button and @activation_time parameters for gtk_menu_popup().
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory of type #GTK_TYPE_MENU (see gtk_item_factory_new())
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mouse_button">
-<parameter_description> the mouse button which was pressed to initiate the popup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="time_">
-<parameter_description> the time at which the activation event occurred
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_current_color">
<description>
Sets the current color to be @color. The first time this is called, it will
@@ -48501,18 +46760,24 @@ also set the original color to be @color too.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_progress_new">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_printer_lpi">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCellRendererProgress.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER_LPI.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="lpi">
+<parameter_description> the resolution in lpi (lines per inch)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new cell renderer
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_iter_to_child_iter">
@@ -48537,23 +46802,29 @@ Sets @child_iter to point to the row pointed to by @sorted_iter.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_hover_selection">
+<function name="gtk_widget_class_path">
<description>
-Enables of disables the hover selection mode of @tree_view.
-Hover selection makes the selected row follow the pointer.
-Currently, this works only for the selection modes
-%GTK_SELECTION_SINGLE and %GTK_SELECTION_BROWSE.
+Same as gtk_widget_path(), but always uses the name of a widget's type,
+never uses a custom name set with gtk_widget_set_name().
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="hover">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable hover selection mode
+<parameter name="path_length">
+<parameter_description> location to store the length of the class path, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> (out) (allow-none) location to store the class path as an allocated string, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path_reversed">
+<parameter_description> (out) (allow-none) location to store the reverse class path as an allocated
+string, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -48599,25 +46870,22 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_set_screen">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_new">
<description>
-Sets the #GdkScreen on which the menu will be displayed.
+Creates a new #GtkCellRendererToggle. Adjust rendering
+parameters using object properties. Object properties can be set
+globally (with g_object_set()). Also, with #GtkTreeViewColumn, you
+can bind a property to a value in a #GtkTreeModel. For example, you
+can bind the "active" property on the cell renderer to a boolean value
+in the model, thus causing the check button to reflect the state of
+the model.
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenu.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen, or %NULL if the screen should be
-determined by the widget the menu is attached to.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new cell renderer
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_unset_model_drag_dest">
@@ -48753,48 +47021,43 @@ Same as gtk_stock_add(), but doesn't copy @items, so
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_is_equal">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_type">
<description>
-Compares two #GtkPaperSize objects.
+Gets the page type of @page.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size1">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size2">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @size1 and @size2
-represent the same paper size
+<return> the page type of @page.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_action">
+<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_has_default_sort_func">
<description>
-Returns the #GtkAction that @widget is a proxy for.
-See also gtk_action_get_proxies().
-
-Since: 2.10
+Returns %TRUE if the model has a default sort function. This is used
+primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can
+go back to the default state, or not.
-Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_get_related_action() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="sortable">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSortable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the action that a widget is a proxy for, or
-%NULL, if it is not attached to an action.
-
+<return> %TRUE, if the model has a default sort function
</return>
</function>
@@ -48817,67 +47080,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_list">
-<description>
-Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. The icon is used when
-the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
-managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
-frame, or display it in other contexts.
-
-gtk_window_set_icon_list() allows you to pass in the same icon in
-several hand-drawn sizes. The list should contain the natural sizes
-your icon is available in; that is, don't scale the image before
-passing it to GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute,
-when the desired final size is known, to allow best quality.
-
-By passing several sizes, you may improve the final image quality
-of the icon, by reducing or eliminating automatic image scaling.
-
-Recommended sizes to provide: 16x16, 32x32, 48x48 at minimum, and
-larger images (64x64, 128x128) if you have them.
-
-See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
-for all windows in your application in one go.
-
-Note that transient windows (those who have been set transient for another
-window using gtk_window_set_transient_for()) will inherit their
-icon from their transient parent. So there's no need to explicitly
-set the icon on transient windows.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> list of #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_added">
-<description>
-Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
-was added to the recently used resources list.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
-the resource was added to the list, or -1 on failure.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_add_ui_from_string">
<description>
Parses a string containing a <link linkend="XML-UI">UI definition</link> and
@@ -48912,6 +47114,31 @@ the return value is 0.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_printer_get_capabilities">
+<description>
+Returns the printer's capabilities.
+
+This is useful when you're using #GtkPrintUnixDialog's manual-capabilities
+setting and need to know which settings the printer can handle and which
+you must handle yourself.
+
+This will return 0 unless the printer's details are available, see
+gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the printer's capabilities
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_header_relief">
<description>
Set the button relief of the group header.
@@ -48933,26 +47160,33 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_line">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_visible_range">
<description>
-Initializes @iter to the start of the given line.
+Sets @start_path and @end_path to be the first and last visible path.
+Note that there may be invisible paths in between.
+
+Both paths should be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() after use.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize
+<parameter name="start_path">
+<parameter_description> Return location for start of region, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="line_number">
-<parameter_description> line number counting from 0
+<parameter name="end_path">
+<parameter_description> Return location for end of region, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE, if valid paths were placed in @start_path and @end_path
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_editable">
@@ -48972,52 +47206,6 @@ buffer may override this setting for some ranges of text.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_item">
-<description>
-Inserts a new item into the toolbar. You must specify the position
-in the toolbar where it will be inserted.
-
- callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> give your toolbar button a label.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> a string that appears when the user holds the mouse over this item.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> use with #GtkTipsQuery.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> the function to be executed when the button is pressed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to any data you wish to be passed to the callback.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new toolbar item as a #GtkWidget.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_get_deletable">
<description>
Returns whether the window has been set to have a close button
@@ -49114,46 +47302,55 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions_full">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_mnemonic_modifier">
<description>
-This variant of gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions() adds a
-#GDestroyNotify callback for @user_data.
+Returns the mnemonic modifier for this window. See
+gtk_window_set_mnemonic_modifier().
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of radio action descriptions
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> the number of entries
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> the value of the action to activate initially, or -1 if
-no action should be activated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="on_change">
-<parameter_description> the callback to connect to the changed signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to the action callbacks
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> destroy notification callback for @user_data
+</parameters>
+<return> the modifier mask used to activate
+mnemonics on this window.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_license">
+<description>
+Returns the license information.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The license information. The string is owned by the about
+dialog and must not be modified.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_separator_tool_item_new">
+<description>
+Create a new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> the new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_title">
@@ -49174,20 +47371,23 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new_merge_id">
<description>
-Unselects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
+Returns an unused merge id, suitable for use with
+gtk_ui_manager_add_ui().
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> an unused merge id.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_job_set_source_file">
@@ -49332,47 +47532,22 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_get_digits">
+<function name="gtk_button_box_new">
<description>
-Gets the number of decimal places that are displayed in the value.
+Creates a new #GtkButtonBox.
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the box' orientation.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of decimal places that are displayed
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_drag_set_icon_pixbuf">
-<description>
-Sets @pixbuf as the icon for a given drag.
+<return> a new #GtkButtonBox.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> the context for a drag. (This must be called
-with a context for the source side of a drag)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbuf to use as the drag icon.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="hot_x">
-<parameter_description> the X offset within @widget of the hotspot.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="hot_y">
-<parameter_description> the Y offset within @widget of the hotspot.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_clear_cache">
@@ -49464,6 +47639,51 @@ this operation.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_path_to_child_path">
+<description>
+Converts @sorted_path to a path on the child model of @tree_model_sort.
+That is, @sorted_path points to a location in @tree_model_sort. The
+returned path will point to the same location in the model not being
+sorted. If @sorted_path does not point to a location in the child model,
+%NULL is returned.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sorted_path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_authors">
+<description>
+Sets the strings which are displayed in the authors tab
+of the secondary credits dialog.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="authors">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_emit_inserted_text">
<description>
Used when subclassing #GtkEntryBuffer
@@ -49492,6 +47712,62 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_radio_button_new_from_widget">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkRadioButton, adding it to the same group as @radio_group_member.
+As with gtk_radio_button_new(), a widget should be packed into the radio button.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="radio_group_member">
+<parameter_description> an existing #GtkRadioButton.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new radio button.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_can_default">
+<description>
+Determines whether @widget can be a default widget. See
+gtk_widget_set_can_default().
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @widget can be a default widget, %FALSE otherwise
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_action_group_set_visible">
+<description>
+Changes the visible of @action_group.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="visible">
+<parameter_description> new visiblity
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_paint_tab">
<description>
Draws an option menu tab (i.e. the up and down pointing arrows)
@@ -49603,22 +47879,34 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_margin">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_n_pages">
<description>
-Returns the value of the ::margin property.
+Sets the number of pages in the document.
-Since: 2.6
+This <emphasis>must</emphasis> be set to a positive number
+before the rendering starts. It may be set in a
+#GtkPrintOperation::begin-print signal hander.
+
+Note that the page numbers passed to the
+#GtkPrintOperation::request-page-setup
+and #GtkPrintOperation::draw-page signals are 0-based, i.e. if
+the user chooses to print all pages, the last ::draw-page signal
+will be for page @n_pages - 1.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_pages">
+<parameter_description> the number of pages
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the space at the borders
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_container_class_install_child_property">
@@ -49817,20 +48105,31 @@ was found.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_get_draw_value">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_query">
<description>
-Returns whether the current value is displayed as a string
-next to the slider.
-
+Queries an accelerator group for all entries matching @accel_key and
+ accel_mods
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator group to query
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_entries">
+<parameter_description> location to return the number of entries found, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the current value is displayed as a string
+<return> an array of @n_entries #GtkAccelGroupEntry elements, or %NULL. The array is owned by GTK+ and must not be freed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -49878,27 +48177,35 @@ Creates a new #GtkVScale.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_resolution_x">
+<function name="gtk_buildable_get_internal_child">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X.
+Get the internal child called @childname of the @buildable object.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="buildable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuildable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="childname">
+<parameter_description> name of child
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the horizontal resolution in dpi
+<return> the internal child of the buildable object
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_resolution_y">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_resolution_x">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y.
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X.
Since: 2.16
@@ -49909,36 +48216,27 @@ Since: 2.16
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the vertical resolution in dpi
+<return> the horizontal resolution in dpi
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_forall">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_resolution_y">
<description>
-Invokes @callback on each child of @container, including children
-that are considered "internal" (implementation details of the
-container). "Internal" children generally weren't added by the user
-of the container, but were added by the container implementation
-itself. Most applications should use gtk_container_foreach(),
-rather than gtk_container_forall().
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> a callback
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_data">
-<parameter_description> callback user data
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the vertical resolution in dpi
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_current_alpha">
@@ -49960,20 +48258,21 @@ also set the original opacity to be @alpha too.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_active">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_mnemonic_widget">
<description>
-Returns whether the cell renderer is active. See
-gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_active().
+Retrieves the target of the mnemonic (keyboard shortcut) of this
+label. See gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
+<return> the target of the label's mnemonic, or %NULL if none
+has been set and the default algorithm will be used.
</return>
</function>
@@ -49983,7 +48282,7 @@ Retrieves the current text alignment for the tool shell. Tool items must not
call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment()
instead.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -49997,55 +48296,52 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_point">
+<function name="gtk_expander_get_label">
<description>
-Scrolls the tree view such that the top-left corner of the visible
-area is @tree_x, @tree_y, where @tree_x and @tree_y are specified
-in tree coordinates. The @tree_view must be realized before
-this function is called. If it isn't, you probably want to be
-using gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_cell().
+Fetches the text from a label widget including any embedded
+underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup, as set by
+gtk_expander_set_label(). If the label text has not been set the
+return value will be %NULL. This will be the case if you create an
+empty button with gtk_button_new() to use as a container.
-If either @tree_x or @tree_y are -1, then that direction isn't scrolled.
+Note that this function behaved differently in versions prior to
+2.14 and used to return the label text stripped of embedded
+underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup. This problem can
+be avoided by fetching the label text directly from the label
+widget.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_x">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_y">
-<parameter_description> Y coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
+<parameter name="expander">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The text of the label widget. This string is owned
+by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_name">
+<function name="gtk_menu_bar_get_child_pack_direction">
<description>
-Sets the name to display in the about dialog.
-If this is not set, it defaults to g_get_application_name().
-
-Since: 2.6
+Retrieves the current child pack direction of the menubar.
+See gtk_menu_bar_set_child_pack_direction().
-Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_about_dialog_set_program_name() instead.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> the program name
+<parameter name="menubar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the child pack direction
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_load_file">
@@ -50157,122 +48453,6 @@ then 0 is returned.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_run">
-<description>
-Runs the print operation, by first letting the user modify
-print settings in the print dialog, and then print the document.
-
-Normally that this function does not return until the rendering of all
-pages is complete. You can connect to the
-#GtkPrintOperation::status-changed signal on @op to obtain some
-information about the progress of the print operation.
-Furthermore, it may use a recursive mainloop to show the print dialog.
-
-If you call gtk_print_operation_set_allow_async() or set the
-#GtkPrintOperation:allow-async property the operation will run
-asynchronously if this is supported on the platform. The
-#GtkPrintOperation::done signal will be emitted with the result of the
-operation when the it is done (i.e. when the dialog is canceled, or when
-the print succeeds or fails).
-|[
-if (settings != NULL)
-gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings (print, settings);
-
-if (page_setup != NULL)
-gtk_print_operation_set_default_page_setup (print, page_setup);
-
-g_signal_connect (print, "begin-print",
-G_CALLBACK (begin_print), &data);
-g_signal_connect (print, "draw-page",
-G_CALLBACK (draw_page), &data);
-
-res = gtk_print_operation_run (print,
-GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT_DIALOG,
-parent,
-&error);
-
-if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_ERROR)
-{
-error_dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (GTK_WINDOW (parent),
-GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
-GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
-GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
-"Error printing file:\n%s",
-error->message);
-g_signal_connect (error_dialog, "response",
-G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_destroy), NULL);
-gtk_widget_show (error_dialog);
-g_error_free (error);
-}
-else if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY)
-{
-if (settings != NULL)
-g_object_unref (settings);
-settings = g_object_ref (gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings (print));
-}
-]|
-
-Note that gtk_print_operation_run() can only be called once on a
-given #GtkPrintOperation.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action to start
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> Return location for errors, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the result of the print operation. A return value of
-%GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY indicates that the printing was
-completed successfully. In this case, it is a good idea to obtain
-the used print settings with gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings()
-and store them for reuse with the next print operation. A value of
-%GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_IN_PROGRESS means the operation is running
-asynchronously, and will emit the #GtkPrintOperation::done signal when
-done.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_list_store_swap">
-<description>
-Swaps @a and @b in @store. Note that this function only works with
-unsorted stores.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="a">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="b">
-<parameter_description> Another #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_focus_on_click">
<description>
Returns whether the combo box grabs focus when it is clicked
@@ -50466,6 +48646,33 @@ This function is mainly used for language bindings.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_device_grab_add">
+<description>
+Adds a GTK+ grab on @device, so all the events on @device and its
+associated pointer or keyboard (if any) are delivered to @widget.
+If the @block_others parameter is %TRUE, any other devices will be
+unable to interact with @widget during the grab.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkDevice to grab on.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="block_others">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to prevent other devices to interact with @widget.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_editable_paste_clipboard">
<description>
Pastes the content of the clipboard to the current position of the
@@ -50505,62 +48712,46 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_add">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_name">
<description>
-Add a tag to the table. The tag is assigned the highest priority
-in the table.
+Sets the icon for the window from a named themed icon. See
+the docs for #GtkIconTheme for more details.
- tag must not be in a tag table already, and may not have
-the same name as an already-added tag.
+Note that this has nothing to do with the WM_ICON_NAME
+property which is mentioned in the ICCCM.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the themed icon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_size_get_name">
-<description>
-Gets the canonical name of the given icon size. The returned string
-is statically allocated and should not be freed.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSize.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the name of the given icon size.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction">
<description>
-Sets the icon for the window from a named themed icon. See
-the docs for #GtkIconTheme for more details.
-
-Note that this has nothing to do with the WM_ICON_NAME
-property which is mentioned in the ICCCM.
+Causes the entry's progress indicator to "fill in" the given
+fraction of the bar. The fraction should be between 0.0 and 1.0,
+inclusive.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the themed icon
+<parameter name="fraction">
+<parameter_description> fraction of the task that's been completed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -50678,20 +48869,22 @@ cast the object yourself.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_copy">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_icon_name">
<description>
-Copies an existing #GtkPaperSize.
+Returns the name of the themed icon for the window,
+see gtk_window_set_icon_name().
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="other">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a copy of @other
+<return> the icon name or %NULL if the window has
+no themed icon
</return>
</function>
@@ -50721,20 +48914,27 @@ is not a #GIcon
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_set_editable">
+<function name="gtk_range_get_slider_range">
<description>
-Sets the default editability of the #GtkTextView. You can override
-this default setting with tags in the buffer, using the "editable"
-attribute of tags.
+This function returns sliders range along the long dimension,
+in widget->window coordinates.
+
+This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> whether it's editable
+<parameter name="slider_start">
+<parameter_description> return location for the slider's start, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="slider_end">
+<parameter_description> return location for the slider's end, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -50758,20 +48958,20 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_unset_rows_drag_dest">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_pixels_above_lines">
<description>
-Undoes the effect of
-gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this method sets
-#GtkTreeView:reorderable to %FALSE.
+Gets the default number of pixels to put above paragraphs.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> default number of pixels above paragraphs
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_expander_column">
@@ -50995,6 +49195,26 @@ Creates a new #GtkViewport with the given adjustments.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_append_menuitems">
+<description>
+Add menuitems for various available input methods to a menu;
+the menuitems, when selected, will switch the input method
+for the context and the global default input method.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="menushell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuShell
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_child_type">
<description>
Returns the type of the children supported by the container.
@@ -51015,42 +49235,49 @@ children.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_set_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_bin_get_child">
<description>
-Sets the icon of @action.
+Gets the child of the #GtkBin, or %NULL if the bin contains
+no child widget. The returned widget does not have a reference
+added, so you do not need to unref it.
-Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> the #GIcon to set
+<parameter name="bin">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBin
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> pointer to child of the #GtkBin
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_set_by_class">
+<function name="gtk_button_set_alignment">
<description>
-This function returns the binding set named after the type name of
-the passed in class structure. New binding sets are created on
-demand by this function.
+Sets the alignment of the child. This property has no effect unless
+the child is a #GtkMisc or a #GtkAligment.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="object_class">
-<parameter_description> a valid #GtkObject class
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> the horizontal position of the child, 0.0 is left aligned,
+1.0 is right aligned
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> the vertical position of the child, 0.0 is top aligned,
+1.0 is bottom aligned
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the binding set corresponding to @object_class
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_default_widget">
@@ -51174,43 +49401,36 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_reorderable">
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_move_item">
<description>
-Retrieves whether the user can reorder the list via drag-and-drop.
-See gtk_icon_view_set_reorderable().
+Changes the location of a recently used resource from @uri to @new_uri.
-Since: 2.8
+Please note that this function will not affect the resource pointed
+by the URIs, but only the URI used in the recently used resources list.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the list can be reordered.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_active_iter">
-<description>
-Sets @iter to point to the current active item, if it exists.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> the URI of a recently used resource
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter
+<parameter name="new_uri">
+<parameter_description> the new URI of the recently used resource, or %NULL to
+remove the item pointed by @uri in the list
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> a return location for a #GError, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set
+<return> %TRUE on success.
</return>
</function>
@@ -51256,49 +49476,11 @@ be freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_tooltips">
-<description>
-Retrieves whether tooltips are enabled. See
-gtk_toolbar_set_tooltips().
-
-Deprecated: 2.14: The toolkit-wide #GtkSettings:gtk-enable-tooltips property
-is now used instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if tooltips are enabled
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_hborder">
-<description>
-Sets the width of the horizontal border of tab labels.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tab_hborder">
-<parameter_description> width of the horizontal border of tab labels.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_ruler_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkRuler with the given orientation.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -51312,55 +49494,6 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_string">
-<description>
-Draws a text string on @window with the given parameters.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_layout() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="string">
-<parameter_description> the string to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_get_text">
<description>
Retrieves the contents of the entry widget.
@@ -51387,22 +49520,21 @@ stored.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_do_overwrite_confirmation">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_website">
<description>
-Queries whether a file chooser is set to confirm for overwriting when the user
-types a file name that already exists.
+Returns the website URL.
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the file chooser will present a confirmation dialog;
-%FALSE otherwise.
+<return> The website URL. The string is owned by the about
+dialog and must not be modified.
</return>
</function>
@@ -51536,22 +49668,6 @@ of properties to set on the tag, as with g_object_set().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_new_with_model">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget with the model initialized to @model.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> the model.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_attach_points">
<description>
Fetches the set of attach points for an icon. An attach point
@@ -51581,6 +49697,26 @@ free the array of points with g_free().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_hbox_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkHBox.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="homogeneous">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if all children are to be given equal space allotments.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="spacing">
+<parameter_description> the number of pixels to place by default between children.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkHBox.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_start_iter">
<description>
Initialized @iter with the first position in the text buffer. This
@@ -51700,19 +49836,25 @@ if no toggle is found.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new_with_label">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_not_found">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem containing a label.
+Sets whether @chooser should display the recently used resources that
+it didn't find. This only applies to local resources.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the text of the menu item.
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="show_not_found">
+<parameter_description> whether to show the local items we didn't find
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_filter_filter">
@@ -51762,53 +49904,6 @@ Sets whether to show the tabs for the notebook or not.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement">
-<description>
-Unsets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
-for the scrolled window. If no window placement is set for a scrolled
-window, it obeys the "gtk-scrolled-window-placement" XSETTING.
-
-See also gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement() and
-gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement().
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_label_set_line_wrap">
-<description>
-Toggles line wrapping within the #GtkLabel widget. %TRUE makes it break
-lines if text exceeds the widget's size. %FALSE lets the text get cut off
-by the edge of the widget if it exceeds the widget size.
-
-Note that setting line wrapping to %TRUE does not make the label
-wrap at its parent container's width, because GTK+ widgets
-conceptually can't make their requisition depend on the parent
-container's size. For a label that wraps at a specific position,
-set the label's width using gtk_widget_set_size_request().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wrap">
-<parameter_description> the setting
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_column_spacing">
<description>
Returns the value of the ::column-spacing property.
@@ -51868,42 +49963,43 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_has_tag">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_justify">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if @iter is within a range tagged with @tag.
-
+Sets the alignment of the lines in the text of the label relative to
+each other. %GTK_JUSTIFY_LEFT is the default value when the
+widget is first created with gtk_label_new(). If you instead want
+to set the alignment of the label as a whole, use
+gtk_misc_set_alignment() instead. gtk_label_set_justify() has no
+effect on labels containing only a single line.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
+<parameter name="jtype">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkJustification
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter is tagged with @tag
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new_text">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_valid">
<description>
-Convenience function which constructs a new editable text combo box, which
-is a #GtkComboBoxEntry just displaying strings. If you use this function to
-create a text combo box, you should only manipulate its data source with
-the following convenience functions: gtk_combo_box_append_text(),
-gtk_combo_box_insert_text(), gtk_combo_box_prepend_text() and
-gtk_combo_box_remove_text().
+Returns %TRUE if the @reference is non-%NULL and refers to a current valid
+path.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="reference">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new text #GtkComboBoxEntry.
-
+<return> %TRUE if @reference points to a valid path.
</return>
</function>
@@ -51969,32 +50065,6 @@ previously selected.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_pixbuf">
-<description>
-Retrieves the image used for the icon.
-
-Unlike the other methods of setting and getting icon data, this
-method will work regardless of whether the icon was set using a
-#GdkPixbuf, a #GIcon, a stock item, or an icon name.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if no icon is set for this position.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_im_context_focus_out">
<description>
Notify the input method that the widget to which this
@@ -52038,42 +50108,44 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factories_path_delete">
+<function name="gtk_builder_get_translation_domain">
<description>
-Deletes all widgets constructed from the specified path.
+Gets the translation domain of @builder.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory_path">
-<parameter_description> a factory path to prepend to @path. May be %NULL if @path
-starts with a factory path
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a path
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the translation domain. This string is owned
+by the builder object and must not be modified or freed.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_builder_get_translation_domain">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_drag_item">
<description>
-Gets the translation domain of @builder.
+Get the dragged item from the selection.
+This could be a #GtkToolItem or a #GtkToolItemGroup.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the translation domain. This string is owned
-by the builder object and must not be modified or freed.
+<return> the dragged item in selection
</return>
</function>
@@ -52144,54 +50216,29 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clist_set_pixmap">
-<description>
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_add_foreign">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_action_widget">
<description>
-Installs an accelerator for @accel_widget in @accel_group, that causes
-the ::activate signal to be emitted if the accelerator is activated.
+Sets @widget as one of the action widgets. Depending on the pack type
+the widget will be placed before or after the tabs. You can use
+a #GtkBox if you need to pack more than one widget on the same side.
-This function can be used to make widgets participate in the accel
-saving/restoring functionality provided by gtk_accel_map_save() and
-gtk_accel_map_load(), even if they haven't been created by an item
-factory.
+Note that action widgets are "internal" children of the notebook and thus
+not included in the list returned from gtk_container_foreach().
-Deprecated: 2.4: The recommended API for this purpose are the functions
-gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() and gtk_widget_set_accel_path(); don't
-use gtk_item_factory_add_foreign() in new code, since it is likely to
-be removed in the future.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_widget">
-<parameter_description> widget to install an accelerator on
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="full_path">
-<parameter_description> the full path for the @accel_widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install the accelerator in
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
+<parameter name="pack_type">
+<parameter_description> pack type of the action widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -52216,21 +50263,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_show_all">
-<description>
-Recursively shows a widget, and any child widgets (if the widget is
-a container).
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_paned_set_position">
<description>
Sets the position of the divider between the two panes.
@@ -52268,25 +50300,6 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_update_policy">
-<description>
-Sets the update behavior of a spin button. This determines whether the
-spin button is always updated or only when a valid value is set.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="policy">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButtonUpdatePolicy value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_get_sort_column_id">
<description>
Fills in @sort_column_id and @order with the current sort column and the
@@ -52315,98 +50328,81 @@ column ids.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_set_arrow_tooltip">
+<function name="gtk_cell_editable_remove_widget">
<description>
-Sets the #GtkTooltips object to be used for arrow button which
-pops up the menu. See gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip() for setting
-a tooltip on the whole #GtkMenuToolButton.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_menu_tool_button_set_arrow_tooltip_text()
-instead.
+Emits the #GtkCellEditable::remove-widget signal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuToolButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltips">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkTooltips object to be used
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tip_text">
-<parameter_description> text to be used as tooltip text for tool_item
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tip_private">
-<parameter_description> text to be used as private tooltip text
+<parameter name="cell_editable">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_builder_add_objects_from_string">
+<function name="gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list">
<description>
-Parses a string containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
-UI definition</link> building only the requested objects and merges
-them with the current contents of @builder.
-
-Upon errors 0 will be returned and @error will be assigned a
-#GError from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR or #G_MARKUP_ERROR domain.
-
-<note><para>
-If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not
-its child (for instance a #GtkTreeView that depends on its
-#GtkTreeModel), you have to explicitely list all of them in @object_ids.
-</para></note>
+Returns the list of targets this widget can accept from
+drag-and-drop.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> the string to parse
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="length">
-<parameter_description> the length of @buffer (may be -1 if @buffer is nul-terminated)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="object_ids">
-<parameter_description> nul-terminated array of objects to build
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
-
+<return> the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_im_context_filter_keypress">
<description>
-Returns the list of targets this widget can accept from
-drag-and-drop.
+Allow the #GtkTextView input method to internally handle key press
+and release events. If this function returns %TRUE, then no further
+processing should be done for this key event. See
+gtk_im_context_filter_keypress().
+Note that you are expected to call this function from your handler
+when overriding key event handling. This is needed in the case when
+you need to insert your own key handling between the input method
+and the default key event handling of the #GtkTextView.
+
+|[
+static gboolean
+gtk_foo_bar_key_press_event (GtkWidget *widget,
+GdkEventKey *event)
+{
+if ((key->keyval == GDK_Return || key->keyval == GDK_KP_Enter))
+{
+if (gtk_text_view_im_context_filter_keypress (GTK_TEXT_VIEW (view), event))
+return TRUE;
+}
+
+/ * Do some stuff * /
+
+return GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (gtk_foo_bar_parent_class)->key_press_event (widget, event);
+}
+]|
+
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the key event
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
+<return> %TRUE if the input method handled the key event.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -52464,26 +50460,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_scale">
-<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> the scale in percent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_info_match">
<description>
Checks whether two #GtkRecentInfo structures point to the same
@@ -52508,20 +50484,30 @@ resource, %FALSE otherwise.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_model">
+<function name="gtk_window_present">
<description>
-Sets the model for a #GtkTreeView. If the @tree_view already has a model
-set, it will remove it before setting the new model. If @model is %NULL,
-then it will unset the old model.
+Presents a window to the user. This may mean raising the window
+in the stacking order, deiconifying it, moving it to the current
+desktop, and/or giving it the keyboard focus, possibly dependent
+on the user's platform, window manager, and preferences.
+
+If @window is hidden, this function calls gtk_widget_show()
+as well.
+
+This function should be used when the user tries to open a window
+that's already open. Say for example the preferences dialog is
+currently open, and the user chooses Preferences from the menu
+a second time; use gtk_window_present() to move the already-open dialog
+where the user can see it.
+
+If you are calling this function in response to a user interaction,
+it is preferable to use gtk_window_present_with_time().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeNode.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> The model.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -52581,6 +50567,37 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_box_set_spacing().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_application_get_window">
+<description>
+A simple #GtkApplication has a "default window". This window should
+act as the primary user interaction point with your application.
+The window returned by this function is of type #GTK_WINDOW_TYPE_TOPLEVEL
+and its properties such as "title" and "icon-name" will be initialized
+as appropriate for the platform.
+
+If the user closes this window, and your application hasn't created
+any other windows, the default action will be to call gtk_application_quit().
+
+If your application has more than one toplevel window (e.g. an
+single-document-interface application with multiple open documents),
+or if you are constructing your toplevel windows yourself (e.g. using
+#GtkBuilder), use gtk_application_create_window() or
+gtk_application_add_window() instead.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="app">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkApplication
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The default #GtkWindow for this application
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_get_always_show_image">
<description>
Returns whether the menu item will ignore the #GtkSettings:gtk-menu-images
@@ -52686,26 +50703,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_type_class">
-<description>
-Returns a pointer pointing to the class of @type or %NULL if there
-was any trouble identifying @type. Initializes the class if
-necessary.
-
-Deprecated: 2.14: Use g_type_class_peek() or g_type_class_ref() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkType.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> pointer to the class.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_left_margin">
<description>
Gets the left margin in units of @unit.
@@ -52728,23 +50725,26 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_factory_add_default">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_bottom_margin">
<description>
-Adds an icon factory to the list of icon factories searched by
-gtk_style_lookup_icon_set(). This means that, for example,
-gtk_image_new_from_stock() will be able to find icons in @factory.
-There will normally be an icon factory added for each library or
-application that comes with icons. The default icon factories
-can be overridden by themes.
+Gets the default bottom margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="factory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the default bottom margin
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_assistant_prepend_page">
@@ -52825,25 +50825,6 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_is_focus">
-<description>
-Determines if the widget is the focus widget within its
-toplevel. (This does not mean that the %HAS_FOCUS flag is
-necessarily set; %HAS_FOCUS will only be set if the
-toplevel widget additionally has the global input focus.)
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the widget is the focus widget.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_action_group_add_toggle_actions">
<description>
This is a convenience function to create a number of toggle actions and add them
@@ -52877,25 +50858,27 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_visible">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_media_type">
<description>
-Returns whether the status icon is visible or not.
-Note that being visible does not guarantee that
-the user can actually see the icon, see also
-gtk_status_icon_is_embedded().
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE.
+
+The set of media types is defined in PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG.
+<!-- FIXME link here -->
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="media_type">
+<parameter_description> the media type
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the status icon is visible
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_block_activate">
@@ -52919,41 +50902,28 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_widget_to_tree_coords">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_label_text">
<description>
-Converts bin_window coordinates to coordinates for the
-tree (the full scrollable area of the tree).
-
-Deprecated: 2.12: Due to historial reasons the name of this function is
-incorrect. For converting coordinates relative to the widget to
-bin_window coordinates, please see
-gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords().
+Retrieves the text of the tab label for the page containing
+ child
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wx">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate relative to bin_window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wy">
-<parameter_description> Y coordinate relative to bin_window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tx">
-<parameter_description> return location for tree X coordinate
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ty">
-<parameter_description> return location for tree Y coordinate
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a widget contained in a page of @notebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the text of the tab label, or %NULL if the
+tab label widget is not a #GtkLabel. The
+string is owned by the widget and must not
+be freed.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_for_rich_text">
@@ -53013,28 +50983,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_set_resize_mode">
-<description>
-Sets the resize mode for the container.
-
-The resize mode of a container determines whether a resize request
-will be passed to the container's parent, queued for later execution
-or executed immediately.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="resize_mode">
-<parameter_description> the new resize mode
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_set_destroy_with_parent">
<description>
If @setting is %TRUE, then destroying the transient parent of @window
@@ -53204,25 +51152,19 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_uris">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_selection">
<description>
-Gets the contents of the selection data as array of URIs.
+Gets the #GtkTreeSelection associated with @tree_view.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> if
-the selection data contains a list of
-URIs, a newly allocated %NULL-terminated string array
-containing the URIs, otherwise %NULL. If the result is
-non-%NULL it must be freed with g_strfreev().
-
+<return> A #GtkTreeSelection object.
</return>
</function>
@@ -53263,34 +51205,32 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action">
+<function name="gtk_tree_drag_dest_row_drop_possible">
<description>
-Called to indicate that the buffer operations between here and a
-call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() are part of a single
-user-visible operation. The operations between
-gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() and
-gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() can then be grouped when creating
-an undo stack. #GtkTextBuffer maintains a count of calls to
-gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() that have not been closed with
-a call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action(), and emits the
-"begin-user-action" and "end-user-action" signals only for the
-outermost pair of calls. This allows you to build user actions
-from other user actions.
+Determines whether a drop is possible before the given @dest_path,
+at the same depth as @dest_path. i.e., can we drop the data in
+ selection_data at that location. @dest_path does not have to
+exist; the return value will almost certainly be %FALSE if the
+parent of @dest_path doesn't exist, though.
-The "interactive" buffer mutation functions, such as
-gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive(), automatically call begin/end
-user action around the buffer operations they perform, so there's
-no need to add extra calls if you user action consists solely of a
-single call to one of those functions.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="drag_dest">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeDragDest
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_path">
+<parameter_description> destination row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> the data being dragged
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if a drop is possible before @dest_path
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_fixed_height_mode">
@@ -53317,6 +51257,25 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_move_iter_to_previous_line">
+<description>
+Move the iterator to the beginning of the previous line. The lines
+of a wrapped paragraph are treated as distinct for this operation.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_frame_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkFrame, with optional label @label.
@@ -53360,33 +51319,29 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_buildable_construct_child">
+<function name="gtk_cell_layout_reorder">
<description>
-Constructs a child of @buildable with the name @name.
-
-#GtkBuilder calls this function if a "constructor" has been
-specified in the UI definition.
+Re-inserts @cell at @position. Note that @cell has already to be packed
+into @cell_layout for this to function properly.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buildable">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkBuildable
+<parameter name="cell_layout">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> #GtkBuilder used to construct this object
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer to reorder.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> name of child to construct
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> New position to insert @cell at.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the constructed child
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_set_popup_single_match">
@@ -53413,22 +51368,47 @@ match
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_get_depth">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first">
<description>
-Returns the current depth of @path.
+Initializes @iter with the first iterator in the tree (the one at the path
+"0") and returns %TRUE. Returns %FALSE if the tree is empty.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The depth of @path
+<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_embed_page_setup">
+<description>
+Embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="embed">
+<parameter_description> embed page setup selection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_tooltip_context">
<description>
This function is supposed to be used in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip
@@ -53509,29 +51489,6 @@ of gtk_widget_modify_text().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_text_chars">
-<description>
-Moves backward by @count text characters (pixbufs, widgets,
-etc. do not count as characters for this). Equivalent to moving
-through the results of gtk_text_iter_get_text (), rather than
-gtk_text_iter_get_slice ().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of chars to move
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_calendar_get_detail_width_chars">
<description>
Queries the width of detail cells, in characters.
@@ -53551,107 +51508,76 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_shadow">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_keep_below">
<description>
-Draws a shadow around the given rectangle in @window
-using the given style and state and shadow type.
+Asks to keep @window below, so that it stays in bottom. Note that
+you shouldn't assume the window is definitely below afterward,
+because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could not keep it below,
+and not all window managers support putting windows below. But
+normally the window will be kept below. Just don't write code
+that crashes if not.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_shadow() instead.
+It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
+in which case the window will be kept below when it appears onscreen
+initially.
+
+You can track the below state via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
+
+Note that, according to the <ulink
+url="http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec">Extended Window
+Manager Hints</ulink> specification, the above state is mainly meant
+for user preferences and should not be used by applications e.g. for
+drawing attention to their dialogs.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> whether to keep @window below other windows
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_cell_set_cell_data">
+<function name="gtk_widget_modify_cursor">
<description>
-Sets the cell renderer based on the @tree_model and @iter. That is, for
-every attribute mapping in @tree_column, it will get a value from the set
-column on the @iter, and use that value to set the attribute on the cell
-renderer. This is used primarily by the #GtkTreeView.
+Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the
+#GtkWidget:cursor-color and #GtkWidget:secondary-cursor-color
+style properties. All other style values are left untouched.
+See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeModel to to get the cell renderers attributes from.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter to to get the cell renderer's attributes from.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_expander">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the row has children
+<parameter name="primary">
+<parameter_description> the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be
+allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
+of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_expanded">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the row has visible children
+<parameter name="secondary">
+<parameter_description> the color to use for secondary cursor (does not need to be
+allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
+of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_filter_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkFileFilter with no rules added to it.
-Such a filter doesn't accept any files, so is not
-particularly useful until you add rules with
-gtk_file_filter_add_mime_type(), gtk_file_filter_add_pattern(),
-or gtk_file_filter_add_custom(). To create a filter
-that accepts any file, use:
-|[
-GtkFileFilter *filter = gtk_file_filter_new ();
-gtk_file_filter_add_pattern (filter, "*");
-]|
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkFileFilter
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_column_drag_function">
<description>
Sets a user function for determining where a column may be dropped when
@@ -53765,32 +51691,60 @@ stripped before return.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_track_print_status">
+<function name="gtk_size_group_add_widget">
<description>
-If track_status is %TRUE, the print operation will try to continue report
-on the status of the print job in the printer queues and printer. This
-can allow your application to show things like "out of paper" issues,
-and when the print job actually reaches the printer.
-
-This function is often implemented using some form of polling, so it should
-not be enabled unless needed.
+Adds a widget to a #GtkSizeGroup. In the future, the requisition
+of the widget will be determined as the maximum of its requisition
+and the requisition of the other widgets in the size group.
+Whether this applies horizontally, vertically, or in both directions
+depends on the mode of the size group. See gtk_size_group_set_mode().
-Since: 2.10
+When the widget is destroyed or no longer referenced elsewhere, it will
+be removed from the size group.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="size_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="track_status">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to track status after printing
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to add
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_from_key_file">
+<description>
+Reads a paper size from the group @group_name in the key file
+ key_file
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the papersize from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name ofthe group in the key file to read,
+or %NULL to read the first group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object with the restored
+paper size, or %NULL if an error occurred.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_text_column">
<description>
Sets the column with text for @icon_view to be @column. The text
@@ -53812,19 +51766,22 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_free">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_text_column">
<description>
-Frees a #GtkSelectionData structure returned from
-gtk_selection_data_copy().
+Returns the column in the model of @completion to get strings from.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the column containing the strings
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_collate">
@@ -53867,25 +51824,53 @@ and must not be freed or modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_mount_operation_get_screen">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_forward_display_line">
<description>
-Gets the screen on which windows of the #GtkMountOperation
-will be shown.
+Moves the given @iter forward by one display (wrapped) line.
+A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
+separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
+Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
+wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
+same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
+they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
+views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the screen on which windows of @op are shown
-
+<return> %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accessible_set_widget">
+<description>
+Sets the #GtkWidget corresponding to the #GtkAccessible.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accessible">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccessible
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_menu_shell_cancel">
<description>
Cancels the selection within the menu shell.
@@ -53902,26 +51887,21 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accelerator_valid">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_preview_text">
<description>
-Determines whether a given keyval and modifier mask constitute
-a valid keyboard accelerator. For example, the #GDK_a keyval
-plus #GDK_CONTROL_MASK is valid - this is a "Ctrl+a" accelerator.
-But, you can't, for instance, use the #GDK_Control_L keyval
-as an accelerator.
+Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> a GDK keyval
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> modifier mask
+<parameter name="fsd">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the accelerator is valid
+<return> the text displayed in the preview area.
+This string is owned by the widget and should not be
+modified or freed
</return>
</function>
@@ -53966,24 +51946,62 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_is_descendant">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_position">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if @path is a descendant of @ancestor.
+This function returns the position you need to pass to
+gtk_window_move() to keep @window in its current position. This
+means that the meaning of the returned value varies with window
+gravity. See gtk_window_move() for more details.
+
+If you haven't changed the window gravity, its gravity will be
+#GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST. This means that gtk_window_get_position()
+gets the position of the top-left corner of the window manager
+frame for the window. gtk_window_move() sets the position of this
+same top-left corner.
+
+gtk_window_get_position() is not 100% reliable because the X Window System
+does not specify a way to obtain the geometry of the
+decorations placed on a window by the window manager.
+Thus GTK+ is using a "best guess" that works with most
+window managers.
+
+Moreover, nearly all window managers are historically broken with
+respect to their handling of window gravity. So moving a window to
+its current position as returned by gtk_window_get_position() tends
+to result in moving the window slightly. Window managers are
+slowly getting better over time.
+
+If a window has gravity #GDK_GRAVITY_STATIC the window manager
+frame is not relevant, and thus gtk_window_get_position() will
+always produce accurate results. However you can't use static
+gravity to do things like place a window in a corner of the screen,
+because static gravity ignores the window manager decorations.
+
+If you are saving and restoring your application's window
+positions, you should know that it's impossible for applications to
+do this without getting it somewhat wrong because applications do
+not have sufficient knowledge of window manager state. The Correct
+Mechanism is to support the session management protocol (see the
+"GnomeClient" object in the GNOME libraries for example) and allow
+the window manager to save your window sizes and positions.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ancestor">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkTreePath
+<parameter name="root_x">
+<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate of gravity-determined reference point
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="root_y">
+<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate of gravity-determined reference point
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @ancestor contains @path somewhere below it
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_set_parent_window">
@@ -54034,6 +52052,27 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_radio_button_new_with_label_from_widget">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkRadioButton with a text label, adding it to the same group
+as @radio_group_member.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="radio_group_member">
+<parameter_description> widget to get radio group from or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a text string to display next to the radio button.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new radio button.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_font_button_set_show_size">
<description>
If @show_size is %TRUE, the font size will be displayed along with the name of the selected font.
@@ -54054,32 +52093,63 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_ancestor">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_detachable">
<description>
-Gets the first ancestor of @widget with type @widget_type. For example,
-<literal>gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX)</literal> gets
-the first #GtkBox that's an ancestor of @widget. No reference will be
-added to the returned widget; it should not be unreferenced. See note
-about checking for a toplevel #GtkWindow in the docs for
-gtk_widget_get_toplevel().
+Sets whether the tab can be detached from @notebook to another
+notebook or widget.
-Note that unlike gtk_widget_is_ancestor(), gtk_widget_get_ancestor()
-considers @widget to be an ancestor of itself.
+Note that 2 notebooks must share a common group identificator
+(see gtk_notebook_set_group_id ()) to allow automatic tabs
+interchange between them.
+If you want a widget to interact with a notebook through DnD
+(i.e.: accept dragged tabs from it) it must be set as a drop
+destination and accept the target "GTK_NOTEBOOK_TAB". The notebook
+will fill the selection with a GtkWidget** pointing to the child
+widget that corresponds to the dropped tab.
+|[
+static void
+on_drop_zone_drag_data_received (GtkWidget *widget,
+GdkDragContext *context,
+gint x,
+gint y,
+GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
+guint info,
+guint time,
+gpointer user_data)
+{
+GtkWidget *notebook;
+GtkWidget **child;
+
+notebook = gtk_drag_get_source_widget (context);
+child = (void*) selection_data->data;
+
+process_widget (*child);
+gtk_container_remove (GTK_CONTAINER (notebook), *child);
+}
+]|
+
+If you want a notebook to accept drags from other widgets,
+you will have to set your own DnD code to do it.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget_type">
-<parameter_description> ancestor type
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a child #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detachable">
+<parameter_description> whether the tab is detachable or not
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the ancestor widget, or %NULL if not found
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_set_always_show_image">
@@ -54106,102 +52176,87 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_mnemonic_modifier">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_label">
<description>
-Returns the mnemonic modifier for this window. See
-gtk_window_set_mnemonic_modifier().
+Returns the label used by the tool button, or %NULL if the tool button
+doesn't have a label. or uses a the label from a stock item. The returned
+string is owned by GTK+, and must not be modified or freed.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the modifier mask used to activate
-mnemonics on this window.
+<return> The label, or %NULL
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_editable">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_has_tooltip">
<description>
-Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable
-widget or not.
+Sets the has-tooltip property on @status_icon to @has_tooltip.
+See #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip for more information.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_set_editable() instead.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the user is allowed to edit the text
-in the widget
+<parameter name="has_tooltip">
+<parameter_description> whether or not @status_icon has a tooltip
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_is_ancestor">
+<function name="gtk_color_button_set_title">
<description>
-Determines whether @widget is somewhere inside @ancestor, possibly with
-intermediate containers.
+Sets the title for the color selection dialog.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ancestor">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> String containing new window title.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @ancestor contains @widget as a child,
-grandchild, great grandchild, etc.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_cursor">
+<function name="gtk_widget_is_ancestor">
<description>
-Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @path, and selects it. This is
-useful when you want to focus the user's attention on a particular row. If
- focus_column is not %NULL, then focus is given to the column specified by
-it. Additionally, if @focus_column is specified, and @start_editing is
-%TRUE, then editing should be started in the specified cell.
-This function is often followed by @gtk_widget_grab_focus (@tree_view)
-in order to give keyboard focus to the widget. Please note that editing
-can only happen when the widget is realized.
+Determines whether @widget is somewhere inside @ancestor, possibly with
+intermediate containers.
-If @path is invalid for @model, the current cursor (if any) will be unset
-and the function will return without failing.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="focus_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn, or %NULL
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_editing">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the specified cell should start being edited.
+<parameter name="ancestor">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @ancestor contains @widget as a child,
+grandchild, great grandchild, etc.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_unstick">
@@ -54227,21 +52282,82 @@ on #GtkWidget.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_paint_box">
<description>
-Makes @status_icon display the #GIcon.
-See gtk_status_icon_new_from_gicon() for details.
+Draws a box on @window with the given parameters.
-Since: 2.14
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_vadjustment">
+<description>
+Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in a container, so when a
+child of the container is focused, the adjustment is scrolled to
+show that widget. This function sets the vertical alignment. See
+gtk_scrolled_window_get_vadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
+the adjustment and gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment() for setting
+the horizontal adjustment.
+
+The adjustments have to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate
+system as the allocation for immediate children of the container.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a GIcon
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the focus
+is moved among the descendents of @container
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -54399,24 +52515,50 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end">
+<function name="gtk_window_present_with_time">
<description>
-Moves forward to the next word end. (If @iter is currently on a
-word end, moves forward to the next one after that.) Word breaks
-are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
-language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
-algorithms).
+Presents a window to the user in response to a user interaction.
+If you need to present a window without a timestamp, use
+gtk_window_present(). See gtk_window_present() for details.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="timestamp">
+<parameter_description> the timestamp of the user interaction (typically a
+button or key press event) which triggered this call
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
-</return>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_list_store_reorder">
+<description>
+Reorders @store to follow the order indicated by @new_order. Note that
+this function only works with unsorted stores.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_order">
+<parameter_description> an array of integers mapping the new position of each child
+to its old position before the re-ordering,
+i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_serialize_formats">
@@ -54444,6 +52586,28 @@ formats.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_line">
+<description>
+Initializes @iter to the start of the given line.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="line_number">
+<parameter_description> line number counting from 0
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_get_visible">
<description>
Determines whether the widget is visible. Note that this doesn't
@@ -54486,18 +52650,6 @@ Encodes a palette as a string, useful for persistent storage.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_default_colormap">
-<description>
-Obtains the default colormap used to create widgets.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> default widget colormap
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_selection_clear_targets">
<description>
Remove all targets registered for the given selection for the
@@ -54517,19 +52669,18 @@ widget.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_preview_text">
<description>
-Triggers a new tooltip query on @display, in order to update the current
-visible tooltip, or to show/hide the current tooltip. This function is
-useful to call when, for example, the state of the widget changed by a
-key press.
-
-Since: 2.12
+Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="fsd">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> the text to display in the preview area
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -54615,63 +52766,22 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position() for details.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_title">
-<description>
-Returns the title of the widget.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the title of the column. This string should not be
-modified or freed.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_get_current_event_state">
+<function name="gtk_icon_size_get_name">
<description>
-If there is a current event and it has a state field, place
-that state field in @state and return %TRUE, otherwise return
-%FALSE.
-
+Gets the canonical name of the given icon size. The returned string
+is statically allocated and should not be freed.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="state">
-<parameter_description> a location to store the state of the current event
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSize.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if there was a current event and it had a state field
+<return> the name of the given icon size.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction">
-<description>
-Causes the entry's progress indicator to "fill in" the given
-fraction of the bar. The fraction should be between 0.0 and 1.0,
-inclusive.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fraction">
-<parameter_description> fraction of the task that's been completed
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_button_get_label">
<description>
Fetches the text from the label of the button, as set by
@@ -54724,6 +52834,27 @@ implementation and should be freed by the caller.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_statusbar_remove_all">
+<description>
+Forces the removal of all messages from a statusbar's
+stack with the exact @context_id.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="statusbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusBar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context_id">
+<parameter_description> a context identifier
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_mark_get_left_gravity">
<description>
Determines whether the mark has left gravity.
@@ -54740,26 +52871,77 @@ Determines whether the mark has left gravity.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_visited">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_expand">
<description>
-Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
-was last visited.
+Sets whether the group should be given extra space.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup which is a child of palette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expand">
+<parameter_description> whether the group should be given extra space
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
-the resource was last visited, or -1 on failure.
+<return></return>
+</function>
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_name">
+<description>
+Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask
+into a string parseable by gtk_accelerator_parse().
+For example, if you pass in #GDK_q and #GDK_CONTROL_MASK,
+this function returns "<Control>q".
+
+If you need to display accelerators in the user interface,
+see gtk_accelerator_get_label().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accelerator_key">
+<parameter_description> accelerator keyval
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accelerator_mods">
+<parameter_description> accelerator modifier mask
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly-allocated accelerator name
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_colormap">
+<description>
+Sets the colormap for the widget to the given value. Widget must not
+have been previously realized. This probably should only be used
+from an <function>init()</function> function (i.e. from the constructor
+for the widget).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a colormap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_set_urgency_hint">
<description>
Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment to draw
@@ -54781,25 +52963,19 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_not_found">
+<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new_with_label">
<description>
-Sets whether @chooser should display the recently used resources that
-it didn't find. This only applies to local resources.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem containing a label.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_not_found">
-<parameter_description> whether to show the local items we didn't find
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text of the menu item.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_set_icon_name">
@@ -54903,25 +53079,40 @@ of @widget's outermost ancestor.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_pixbuf">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_frame_dimensions">
<description>
-Creates a status icon displaying @pixbuf.
-
-The image will be scaled down to fit in the available
-space in the notification area, if necessary.
+(Note: this is a special-purpose function intended for the framebuffer
+port; see gtk_window_set_has_frame(). It will have no effect on the
+window border drawn by the window manager, which is the normal
+case when using the X Window system.)
-Since: 2.10
+For windows with frames (see gtk_window_set_has_frame()) this function
+can be used to change the size of the frame border.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow that has a frame
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="left">
+<parameter_description> The width of the left border
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="top">
+<parameter_description> The height of the top border
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="right">
+<parameter_description> The width of the right border
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bottom">
+<parameter_description> The height of the bottom border
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_drag_set_icon_pixmap">
@@ -55160,49 +53351,40 @@ format's mime-type.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_mount_operation_is_showing">
+<function name="gtk_color_button_new_with_color">
<description>
-Returns whether the #GtkMountOperation is currently displaying
-a window.
+Creates a new color button.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkColor to set the current color with.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @op is currently displaying a window
+<return> a new color button.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_wmclass">
+<function name="gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser">
<description>
-Don't use this function. It sets the X Window System "class" and
-"name" hints for a window. According to the ICCCM, you should
-always set these to the same value for all windows in an
-application, and GTK+ sets them to that value by default, so calling
-this function is sort of pointless. However, you may want to call
-gtk_window_set_role() on each window in your application, for the
-benefit of the session manager. Setting the role allows the window
-manager to restore window positions when loading a saved session.
-
+Installs a style property on a widget class.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="klass">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidgetClass
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wmclass_name">
-<parameter_description> window name hint
+<parameter name="pspec">
+<parameter_description> the #GParamSpec for the style property
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wmclass_class">
-<parameter_description> window class hint
+<parameter name="parser">
+<parameter_description> the parser for the style property
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -55227,27 +53409,23 @@ name of the previewed file, %FALSE otherwise.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_reorder">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_filename">
<description>
-Reorders @store to follow the order indicated by @new_order. Note that
-this function only works with unsorted stores.
+Retrieves the source filename, or %NULL if none is set. The
+filename is not a copy, and should not be modified or expected to
+persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_order">
-<parameter_description> an array of integers mapping the new position of each child
-to its old position before the re-ordering,
-i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> image filename. This string must not be modified
+or freed.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_get_tearoff_state">
@@ -55295,6 +53473,23 @@ Same as gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char(), but goes backward from @iter.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_colormap">
+<description>
+Gets the colormap that will be used to render @widget. No reference will
+be added to the returned colormap; it should not be unreferenced.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the colormap used by @widget
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get">
<description>
Gets the value of one or more cells in the row referenced by @iter.
@@ -55326,53 +53521,22 @@ If appropriate, the returned values have to be freed or unreferenced.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_orientation">
<description>
-Fills in @xalign and @yalign with the appropriate values of @cell.
+Gets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> location to fill in with the x alignment of the cell, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description> location to fill in with the y alignment of the cell, or %NULL
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_range_set_increments">
-<description>
-Sets the step and page sizes for the range.
-The step size is used when the user clicks the #GtkScrollbar
-arrows or moves #GtkScale via arrow keys. The page size
-is used for example when moving via Page Up or Page Down keys.
+<return> the page orientation
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="step">
-<parameter_description> step size
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> page size
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_viewport_set_vadjustment">
@@ -55393,57 +53557,25 @@ Sets the vertical adjustment of the viewport.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_frame_dimensions">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_pixbuf">
<description>
-(Note: this is a special-purpose function intended for the framebuffer
-port; see gtk_window_set_has_frame(). It will have no effect on the
-window border drawn by the window manager, which is the normal
-case when using the X Window system.)
-
-For windows with frames (see gtk_window_set_has_frame()) this function
-can be used to change the size of the frame border.
+Creates a status icon displaying @pixbuf.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow that has a frame
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="left">
-<parameter_description> The width of the left border
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="top">
-<parameter_description> The height of the top border
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="right">
-<parameter_description> The width of the right border
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bottom">
-<parameter_description> The height of the bottom border
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+The image will be scaled down to fit in the available
+space in the notification area, if necessary.
-<function name="gtk_ctree_move">
-<description>
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="new_parent">
-<parameter_description>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_sibling">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_info_bar_set_default_response">
@@ -55491,24 +53623,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_new_with_color">
-<description>
-Creates a new color button.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> A #GdkColor to set the current color with.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new color button.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size">
<description>
Sets the width of %GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_LEFT or %GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_RIGHT,
@@ -55537,24 +53651,55 @@ with #GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET, #GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_TEXT, or
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_get_focus_hadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_new_from_file">
<description>
-Retrieves the horizontal focus adjustment for the container. See
-gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment ().
+Reads the print settings from @file_name. Returns a new #GtkPrintSettings
+object with the restored settings, or %NULL if an error occurred. If the
+file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
+#GKeyFileError. See gtk_print_settings_to_file().
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="file_name">
+<parameter_description> the filename to read the settings from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the horizontal focus adjustment, or %NULL if
-none has been set.
+<return> the restored #GtkPrintSettings
+
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_move_iter_to_x">
+<description>
+Keeping the iterator on the same line of the layout, move it to the
+specified X coordinate. The lines of a wrapped paragraph are
+treated as distinct for this operation.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_queue_resize">
<description>
Flags the column, and the cell renderers added to this column, to have
@@ -55572,28 +53717,26 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_from_file">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_line_wrap_mode">
<description>
-Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
-had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them from a file
-on disk. Warns on failure if @err is %NULL.
+If line wrapping is on (see gtk_label_set_line_wrap()) this controls how
+the line wrapping is done. The default is %PANGO_WRAP_WORD which means
+wrap on word boundaries.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> location of icon file
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="err">
-<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="wrap_mode">
+<parameter_description> the line wrapping mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if setting the icon succeeded.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_new">
@@ -55621,6 +53764,26 @@ will cause the scrolled window to create them for you.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_arrow_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkArrow widget.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="arrow_type">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkArrowType.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkShadowType.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the new #GtkArrow widget.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_add_accelerator">
<description>
Installs an accelerator for this @widget in @accel_group that causes
@@ -55752,28 +53915,6 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_fixed_size">
-<description>
-Sets the renderer size to be explicit, independent of the properties set.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the cell renderer, or -1
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the cell renderer, or -1
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_image_get_pixbuf">
<description>
Gets the #GdkPixbuf being displayed by the #GtkImage.
@@ -55817,45 +53958,33 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_entry_clear">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_translator_credits">
<description>
-Clears a binding entry.
-
-Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_binding_entry_remove() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> binding set to clear an entry of
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> key value of binding to clear
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to clear
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Sets the translator credits string which is displayed in
+the translators tab of the secondary credits dialog.
-<function name="gtk_recent_filter_add_pattern">
-<description>
-Adds a rule that allows resources based on a pattern matching their
-display name.
+The intended use for this string is to display the translator
+of the language which is currently used in the user interface.
+Using gettext(), a simple way to achieve that is to mark the
+string for translation:
+|[
+gtk_about_dialog_set_translator_credits (about, _("translator-credits"));
+]|
+It is a good idea to use the customary msgid "translator-credits" for this
+purpose, since translators will already know the purpose of that msgid, and
+since #GtkAboutDialog will detect if "translator-credits" is untranslated
+and hide the tab.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pattern">
-<parameter_description> a file pattern
+<parameter name="translator_credits">
+<parameter_description> the translator credits
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -55879,31 +54008,6 @@ the actual width of the column on the screen, just what is requested.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_header_image">
-<description>
-Sets a header image for @page. This image is displayed in the header
-area of the assistant when @page is the current page.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> the new header image @page
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_manager_purge_items">
<description>
Purges every item from the recently used resources list.
@@ -55927,22 +54031,23 @@ recently used resources list.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_status">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_word_ends">
<description>
-Returns the status of the print operation.
-Also see gtk_print_operation_get_status_string().
+Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end() up to @count times.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of times to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the status of the print operation
-
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
</return>
</function>
@@ -55964,96 +54069,75 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_visible">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_is_adjusting">
<description>
-Returns whether the action itself is visible. Note that this doesn't
-necessarily mean effective visibility. See gtk_action_is_sensitive()
-for that.
+Gets the current state of the @colorsel.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the action itself is visible.
-
+<return> %TRUE if the user is currently dragging a color around, and %FALSE
+if the selection has stopped.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_spin_new">
+<function name="gtk_scale_get_digits">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCellRendererSpin.
+Gets the number of decimal places that are displayed in the value.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkCellRendererSpin
-
+<return> the number of decimal places that are displayed
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_wrap_license">
+<function name="gtk_entry_reset_im_context">
<description>
-Returns whether the license text in @about is
-automatically wrapped.
+Reset the input method context of the entry if needed.
-Since: 2.8
+This can be necessary in the case where modifying the buffer
+would confuse on-going input method behavior.
+
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the license text is wrapped
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_layout">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_wrap_license">
<description>
-Draws a layout on @window using the given parameters.
+Returns whether the license text in @about is
+automatically wrapped.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_text">
-<parameter_description> whether to use the text or foreground
-graphics context of @style
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> the layout to draw
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the license text is wrapped
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_scroll_to_mark">
@@ -56121,53 +54205,67 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_fullscreen">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_move_column_after">
<description>
-Asks to place @window in the fullscreen state. Note that you
-shouldn't assume the window is definitely full screen afterward,
-because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could unfullscreen it
-again, and not all window managers honor requests to fullscreen
-windows. But normally the window will end up fullscreen. Just
-don't write code that crashes if not.
+Moves @column to be after to @base_column. If @base_column is %NULL, then
+ column is placed in the first position.
-You can track the fullscreen state via the "window-state-event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be moved.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="base_column">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be moved relative to, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_range_get_value">
+<description>
+Gets the current value of the range.
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> current value of the range.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_tooltip_text">
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_icon_name">
<description>
-Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified
-position in @entry.
+See gtk_image_new_from_icon_name() for details.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> the icon position
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> an icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. Free the returned string
-with g_free() when done.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_ppd_name">
@@ -56189,18 +54287,20 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_trigger_tooltip_query">
+<function name="gtk_object_destroy">
<description>
-Triggers a tooltip query on the display where the toplevel of @widget
-is located. See gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query() for more
-information.
+Emits the #GtkObject::destroy signal notifying all reference holders that they should
+release the #GtkObject. See the overview documentation at the top of the
+page for more details.
-Since: 2.12
+The memory for the object itself won't be deleted until
+its reference count actually drops to 0; gtk_object_destroy() merely asks
+reference holders to release their references, it does not free the object.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="object">
+<parameter_description> the object to destroy.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -56445,62 +54545,60 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_expand">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_orientation">
<description>
-Returns whether @tool_item is allocated extra space.
-See gtk_tool_item_set_expand().
+Sets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageOrientation value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_vadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_invisible_new">
<description>
-Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in a container, so when a
-child of the container is focused, the adjustment is scrolled to
-show that widget. This function sets the vertical alignment. See
-gtk_scrolled_window_get_vadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
-the adjustment and gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment() for setting
-the horizontal adjustment.
+Creates a new #GtkInvisible.
-The adjustments have to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate
-system as the allocation for immediate children of the container.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the focus
-is moved among the descendents of @container
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkInvisible.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_invisible_new">
+<function name="gtk_test_slider_set_perc">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkInvisible.
+This function will adjust the slider position of all GtkRange
+based widgets, such as scrollbars or scales, it'll also adjust
+spin buttons. The adjustment value of these widgets is set to
+a value between the lower and upper limits, according to the
+ percentage argument.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> valid widget pointer.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="percentage">
+<parameter_description> value between 0 and 100.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkInvisible.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_visible_line_index">
@@ -56605,37 +54703,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_selected_rows">
-<description>
-Creates a list of path of all selected rows. Additionally, if you are
-planning on modifying the model after calling this function, you may
-want to convert the returned list into a list of #GtkTreeRowReference<!-- -->s.
-To do this, you can use gtk_tree_row_reference_new().
-
-To free the return value, use:
-|[
-g_list_foreach (list, (GFunc) gtk_tree_path_free, NULL);
-g_list_free (list);
-]|
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> A pointer to set to the #GtkTreeModel, or NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GList containing a #GtkTreePath for each selected row.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_plug_new">
<description>
Creates a new plug widget inside the #GtkSocket identified
@@ -56654,80 +54721,64 @@ can later be plugged into a #GtkSocket by gtk_socket_add_id().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_opacity">
+<function name="gtk_alignment_set">
<description>
-Fetches the requested opacity for this window. See
-gtk_window_set_opacity().
-
-Since: 2.12
+Sets the #GtkAlignment values.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="alignment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAlignment.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the requested opacity for this window.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_numbers">
-<description>
-Returns whether @chooser should display recently used resources
-prepended by a unique number.
-
-Deprecated: 2.12: use gtk_recent_chooser_menu_get_show_numbers() instead.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> the horizontal alignment of the child widget, from 0 (left) to 1
+(right).
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> the vertical alignment of the child widget, from 0 (top) to 1
+(bottom).
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xscale">
+<parameter_description> the amount that the child widget expands horizontally to fill up
+unused space, from 0 to 1.
+A value of 0 indicates that the child widget should never expand.
+A value of 1 indicates that the child widget will expand to fill all of the
+space allocated for the #GtkAlignment.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yscale">
+<parameter_description> the amount that the child widget expands vertically to fill up
+unused space, from 0 to 1. The values are similar to @xscale.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the recent chooser should show display numbers,
-%FALSE otherwise.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_insert_column_with_attributes">
+<function name="gtk_file_filter_get_needed">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn and inserts it into the @tree_view at
- position If @position is -1, then the newly created column is inserted at
-the end. The column is initialized with the attributes given. If @tree_view
-has "fixed_height" mode enabled, then the new column will have its sizing
-property set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
+Gets the fields that need to be filled in for the structure
+passed to gtk_file_filter_filter()
+This function will not typically be used by applications; it
+is intended principally for use in the implementation of
+#GtkFileChooser.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> The position to insert the new column in.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> The title to set the header to.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkCellRenderer.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> A %NULL-terminated list of attributes.
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The number of columns in @tree_view after insertion.
+<return> bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
+calling gtk_file_filter_filter()
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -56842,30 +54893,6 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_calendar_select_month">
-<description>
-Shifts the calendar to a different month.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="month">
-<parameter_description> a month number between 0 and 11.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="year">
-<parameter_description> the year the month is in.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, always
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_store_set_valuesv">
<description>
A variant of gtk_tree_store_set_valist() which takes
@@ -56972,48 +54999,22 @@ gtk_widget_set_direction().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_flat_box">
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_upper">
<description>
-Draws a flat box on @window with the given parameters.
+Retrieves the maximum value of the adjustment.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_flat_box() instead.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the box
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The current maximum value of the adjustment.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_spinner_new">
@@ -57048,49 +55049,23 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_init">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_use_drag_window">
<description>
-Call this function before using any other GTK+ functions in your GUI
-applications. It will initialize everything needed to operate the
-toolkit and parses some standard command line options. @argc and
- argv are adjusted accordingly so your own code will
-never see those standard arguments.
-
-Note that there are some alternative ways to initialize GTK+:
-if you are calling gtk_parse_args(), gtk_init_check(),
-gtk_init_with_args() or g_option_context_parse() with
-the option group returned by gtk_get_option_group(), you
-<emphasis>don't</emphasis> have to call gtk_init().
-
-<note><para>
-This function will terminate your program if it was unable to initialize
-the GUI for some reason. If you want your program to fall back to a
-textual interface you want to call gtk_init_check() instead.
-</para></note>
+Returns whether @tool_item has a drag window. See
+gtk_tool_item_set_use_drag_window().
-<note><para>
-Since 2.18, GTK+ calls <literal>signal (SIGPIPE, SIG_IGN)</literal>
-during initialization, to ignore SIGPIPE signals, since these are
-almost never wanted in graphical applications. If you do need to
-handle SIGPIPE for some reason, reset the handler after gtk_init(),
-but notice that other libraries (e.g. libdbus or gvfs) might do
-similar things.
-</para></note>
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argc</parameter> parameter of your
-main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argv</parameter> parameter of main().
-Any parameters understood by gtk_init() are stripped before return.
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @tool_item uses a drag window.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_targets_include_uri">
@@ -57203,30 +55178,6 @@ typically either you or gtk_dialog_run() will be monitoring the
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_alignment">
-<description>
-Sets the renderer's alignment within its available space.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> the x alignment of the cell renderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description> the y alignment of the cell renderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark">
<description>
Deletes @mark, so that it's no longer located anywhere in the
@@ -57459,26 +55410,6 @@ Removes a target from a target list.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_modify_font">
-<description>
-Sets the font to use for a widget. All other style values are left
-untouched. See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="font_desc">
-<parameter_description> the font description to use, or %NULL to undo
-the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_modify_font().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_action_group_set_sensitive">
<description>
Changes the sensitivity of @action_group
@@ -57638,6 +55569,29 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_progress_bar_set_show_text">
+<description>
+Sets whether the progressbar will show text superimposed
+over the bar. The shown text is either the value of
+the #GtkProgressBar::text property or, if that is %NULL,
+the #GtkProgressBar::fraction value, as a percentage.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="show_text">
+<parameter_description> whether to show superimposed text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_accel_map_lookup_entry">
<description>
Looks up the accelerator entry for @accel_path and fills in @key.
@@ -57657,45 +55611,45 @@ Looks up the accelerator entry for @accel_path and fills in @key.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_finishings">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_get_page_setup">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS.
+Obtains the #GtkPageSetup that determines the page
+dimensions of the #GtkPrintContext.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="finishings">
-<parameter_description> the finishings
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the page setup of @context
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_selection_get_filename">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_map_expanded_rows">
<description>
-This function returns the selected filename in the GLib file name
-encoding. To convert to UTF-8, call g_filename_to_utf8(). The
-returned string points to a statically allocated buffer and should
-be copied if you plan to keep it around.
-
-If no file is selected then the selected directory path is returned.
-
+Calls @func on all expanded rows.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filesel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSelection
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> A function to be called
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> User data to be passed to the function.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> currently-selected filename in the on-disk encoding.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_info_bar_get_action_area">
@@ -57716,6 +55670,31 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_label_select_region">
+<description>
+Selects a range of characters in the label, if the label is selectable.
+See gtk_label_set_selectable(). If the label is not selectable,
+this function has no effect. If @start_offset or
+ end_offset are -1, then the end of the label will be substituted.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start_offset">
+<parameter_description> start offset (in characters not bytes)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end_offset">
+<parameter_description> end offset (in characters not bytes)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive_at_cursor">
<description>
Calls gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive() at the cursor
@@ -57749,87 +55728,28 @@ result of gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert_element">
-<description>
-Inserts a new element in the toolbar at the given position.
-
-If @type == %GTK_TOOLBAR_CHILD_WIDGET, @widget is used as the new element.
-If @type == %GTK_TOOLBAR_CHILD_RADIOBUTTON, @widget is used to determine
-the radio group for the new element. In all other cases, @widget must
-be %NULL.
-
- callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> a value of type #GtkToolbarChildType that determines what @widget
-will be.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the element's label.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> used for context-sensitive help about this toolbar element.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that provides pictorial representation of the element's function.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> the function to be executed when the button is pressed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> any data you wish to pass to the callback.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the number of widgets to insert this element after.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new toolbar element as a #GtkWidget.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_word_ends">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset">
<description>
-Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end() up to @count times.
+Moves @iter within a line, to a new <emphasis>character</emphasis>
+(not byte) offset. The given character offset must be less than or
+equal to the number of characters in the line; if equal, @iter
+moves to the start of the next line. See
+gtk_text_iter_set_line_index() if you have a byte index rather than
+a character offset.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of times to move
+<parameter name="char_on_line">
+<parameter_description> a character offset relative to the start of @iter's current line
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new_with_model">
@@ -57897,87 +55817,82 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_select_all">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_unselect_file">
<description>
-Selects all the icons. @icon_view must has its selection mode set
-to #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE.
+Unselects the file referred to by @file. If the file is not in the current
+directory, does not exist, or is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="file">
+<parameter_description> a #GFile
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_new">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_visible">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkItemFactory.
-
-Beware that the returned object does not have a floating reference.
+Returns whether the action itself is visible. Note that this doesn't
+necessarily mean effective visibility. See gtk_action_is_sensitive()
+for that.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container_type">
-<parameter_description> the kind of menu to create; can be
-#GTK_TYPE_MENU_BAR, #GTK_TYPE_MENU or #GTK_TYPE_OPTION_MENU
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> the factory path of the new item factory, a string of the form
-<literal>"<name>"</literal>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup to which the accelerators for the
-menu items will be added, or %NULL to create a new one
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkItemFactory
+<return> %TRUE if the action itself is visible.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_add_drag_dest">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_show_progress">
<description>
-Sets @palette as drag source (see gtk_tool_palette_set_drag_source())
-and sets @widget as a drag destination for drags from @palette.
-See gtk_drag_dest_set().
+If @show_progress is %TRUE, the print operation will show a
+progress dialog during the print operation.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget which should be a drag destination for @palette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> the flags that specify what actions GTK+ should take for drops
-on that widget
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkToolPaletteDragTarget<!-- -->s which the widget
-should support
+<parameter name="show_progress">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to show a progress dialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="actions">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkDragAction<!-- -->s which the widget should suppport
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_copy">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkTreePath as a copy of @path.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A new #GtkTreePath.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_tabs">
@@ -58114,32 +56029,16 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_prepend_widget">
+<function name="gtk_vpaned_new">
<description>
-Adds a widget to the beginning of the given toolbar.
+Create a new #GtkVPaned
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget to add to the toolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> used for context-sensitive help about this toolbar element.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new #GtkVPaned
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_editable_delete_selection">
@@ -58183,11 +56082,10 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Places a visual marker on a particular day.
-
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="day">
@@ -58195,35 +56093,7 @@ Places a visual marker on a particular day.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, always
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_get_widget_by_action">
-<description>
-Obtains the widget which was constructed from the #GtkItemFactoryEntry
-with the given @action.
-
-If there are multiple items with the same action, the result is
-undefined.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> an action as specified in the @callback_action field
-of #GtkItemFactoryEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the widget which corresponds to the given action, or %NULL
-if no widget was found
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_set_visible">
@@ -58270,6 +56140,28 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_popup_for_device">
+<description>
+Pops up the menu or dropdown list of @combo_box, the popup window
+will be grabbed so only @device and its associated pointer/keyboard
+are the only #GdkDevice<!-- -->s able to send events to it.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_visible_line_index">
<description>
Returns the number of bytes from the start of the
@@ -58471,157 +56363,65 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_block_activate_from">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_drag_dest_row">
<description>
-Disables calls to the gtk_action_activate()
-function by signals on the given proxy widget. This is used to
-break notification loops for things like check or radio actions.
-
-This function is intended for use by action implementations.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-Deprecated: 2.16: activatables are now responsible for activating the
-action directly so this doesnt apply anymore.
+Gets information about the row that is highlighted for feedback.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> a proxy widget
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_resizable">
-<description>
-Returns %TRUE if the @tree_column can be resized by the end user.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the highlighted row, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if the @tree_column can be resized.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_model">
-<description>
-Returns the model the #GtkIconView is based on. Returns %NULL if the
-model is unset.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="pos">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is currently being used.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_fixed_set_has_window">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_unset_style">
<description>
-Sets whether a #GtkFixed widget is created with a separate
-#GdkWindow for @widget->window or not. (By default, it will be
-created with no separate #GdkWindow). This function must be called
-while the #GtkFixed is not realized, for instance, immediately after the
-window is created.
-
-This function was added to provide an easy migration path for
-older applications which may expect #GtkFixed to have a separate window.
-
-Deprecated: 2.20: Use gtk_widget_set_has_window() instead.
+Unsets a toolbar style set with gtk_toolbar_set_style(), so that
+user preferences will be used to determine the toolbar style.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fixed">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFixed
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_window">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if a separate window should be created
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_diamond">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_size_request">
<description>
-Draws a diamond in the given rectangle on @window using the given
-parameters.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_diamond() instead.
+Gets the size request that was explicitly set for the widget using
+gtk_widget_set_size_request(). A value of -1 stored in @width or
+ height indicates that that dimension has not been set explicitly
+and the natural requisition of the widget will be used intead. See
+gtk_widget_set_size_request(). To get the size a widget will
+actually use, call gtk_widget_size_request() instead of
+this function.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
+<parameter_description> return location for width, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_move_column_after">
-<description>
-Moves @column to be after to @base_column. If @base_column is %NULL, then
- column is placed in the first position.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be moved.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="base_column">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be moved relative to, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> return location for height, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -58673,24 +56473,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_hadjustment">
-<description>
-Gets the horizontal adjustment of the tool palette.
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the horizontal adjustment of @palette
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_is_text_available">
<description>
Test to see if there is text available to be pasted
@@ -58729,7 +56511,7 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> The funcion to call for each selected icon.
+<parameter_description> The function to call for each selected icon.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="data">
@@ -58740,24 +56522,6 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_action_get_show_numbers">
-<description>
-Returns the value set by gtk_recent_chooser_menu_set_show_numbers().
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentAction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if numbers should be shown.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_page_ranges">
<description>
Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_RANGES.
@@ -58842,28 +56606,23 @@ page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_show_text">
<description>
-See gtk_image_new_from_icon_name() for details.
+Gets the value of the #GtkProgressBar::show-text property.
+See gtk_progress_bar_set_show_text().
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> an icon size
+<parameter name="pbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if text is shown in the progress bar
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_select_file">
@@ -58918,54 +56677,23 @@ that expect a pre-sorted range.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_to_key_file">
-<description>
-This function adds the paper size from @size to @key_file.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to save the paper size to
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the group to add the settings to in @key_file
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_selection_clear">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_word_starts">
<description>
-The default handler for the #GtkWidget::selection-clear-event
-signal.
-
-Since: 2.2
+Calls gtk_text_iter_backward_word_start() up to @count times.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Instead of calling this function, chain up from
-your selection-clear-event handler. Calling this function
-from any other context is illegal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> the event
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of times to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the event was handled, otherwise false
-
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
</return>
</function>
@@ -58995,6 +56723,30 @@ page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_buildable_parser_finished">
+<description>
+Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
+<link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder UI definition</link>.
+Note that this will be called once for each time
+gtk_builder_add_from_file() or gtk_builder_add_from_string()
+is called on a builder.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buildable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuildable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_markup_column">
<description>
Sets the column with markup information for @icon_view to be
@@ -59018,28 +56770,18 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_widget">
+<function name="gtk_widget_trigger_tooltip_query">
<description>
-Adds a widget to the end of the given toolbar.
+Triggers a tooltip query on the display where the toplevel of @widget
+is located. See gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query() for more
+information.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget to add to the toolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> used for context-sensitive help about this toolbar element.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -59163,22 +56905,21 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_label">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_create_pango_context">
<description>
-Returns the label used by the tool button, or %NULL if the tool button
-doesn't have a label. or uses a the label from a stock item. The returned
-string is owned by GTK+, and must not be modified or freed.
+Creates a new #PangoContext that can be used with the
+#GtkPrintContext.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The label, or %NULL
+<return> a new Pango context for @context
</return>
</function>
@@ -59203,6 +56944,46 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_factory_remove_default">
+<description>
+Removes an icon factory from the list of default icon
+factories. Not normally used; you might use it for a library that
+can be unloaded or shut down.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="factory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory previously added with gtk_icon_factory_add_default()
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_focus_on_click">
+<description>
+Sets whether the combo box will grab focus when it is clicked with
+the mouse. Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places
+like toolbars where you don't want the keyboard focus removed from
+the main area of the application.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="combo">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="focus_on_click">
+<parameter_description> whether the combo box grabs focus when clicked
+with the mouse
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment">
<description>
Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in a container, so when a child
@@ -59247,6 +57028,25 @@ for it).
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_label_get_track_visited_links">
+<description>
+Returns whether the label is currently keeping track
+of clicked links.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if clicked links are remembered
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_name">
<description>
Sets the name of this tray icon.
@@ -59299,29 +57099,6 @@ around, you must add a refcount using g_object_ref().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_height">
-<description>
-Gets the paper height of the #GtkPaperSize, in
-units of @unit.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the paper height
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_get_frame_dimensions">
<description>
(Note: this is a special-purpose function intended for the
@@ -59383,6 +57160,20 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new">
+<description>
+Creates an empty status icon object.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_show_uri">
<description>
This is a convenience function for launching the default application
@@ -59426,37 +57217,6 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_modify_cursor">
-<description>
-Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the
-#GtkWidget:cursor-color and #GtkWidget:secondary-cursor-color
-style properties. All other style values are left untouched.
-See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="primary">
-<parameter_description> the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be
-allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
-of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="secondary">
-<parameter_description> the color to use for secondary cursor (does not need to be
-allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
-of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_sensitive">
<description>
Returns whether the icon appears sensitive or insensitive.
@@ -59479,84 +57239,66 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_activatable">
+<function name="gtk_widget_queue_resize">
<description>
-Sets whether the icon is activatable.
-
-Since: 2.16
+This function is only for use in widget implementations.
+Flags a widget to have its size renegotiated; should
+be called when a widget for some reason has a new size request.
+For example, when you change the text in a #GtkLabel, #GtkLabel
+queues a resize to ensure there's enough space for the new text.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="activatable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the icon should be activatable
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_remove_space">
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_move_before">
<description>
-Removes a space from the specified position.
+Moves @iter in @tree_store to the position before @position. @iter and
+ position should be in the same level. Note that this function only
+works with unsorted stores. If @position is %NULL, @iter will be
+moved to the end of the level.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the index of the space to remove.
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_paper_size">
-<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT,
-converted to a #GtkPaperSize.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the paper size
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_use_markup">
+<function name="gtk_image_get_storage_type">
<description>
-Returns whether the label's text is interpreted as marked up with
-the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup
-language</link>. See gtk_label_set_use_markup ().
+Gets the type of representation being used by the #GtkImage
+to store image data. If the #GtkImage has no image data,
+the return value will be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup.
+<return> image representation being used
</return>
</function>
@@ -59619,6 +57361,97 @@ Non-vararg creation function. Used primarily by language bindings.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_run">
+<description>
+Runs the print operation, by first letting the user modify
+print settings in the print dialog, and then print the document.
+
+Normally that this function does not return until the rendering of all
+pages is complete. You can connect to the
+#GtkPrintOperation::status-changed signal on @op to obtain some
+information about the progress of the print operation.
+Furthermore, it may use a recursive mainloop to show the print dialog.
+
+If you call gtk_print_operation_set_allow_async() or set the
+#GtkPrintOperation:allow-async property the operation will run
+asynchronously if this is supported on the platform. The
+#GtkPrintOperation::done signal will be emitted with the result of the
+operation when the it is done (i.e. when the dialog is canceled, or when
+the print succeeds or fails).
+|[
+if (settings != NULL)
+gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings (print, settings);
+
+if (page_setup != NULL)
+gtk_print_operation_set_default_page_setup (print, page_setup);
+
+g_signal_connect (print, "begin-print",
+G_CALLBACK (begin_print), &data);
+g_signal_connect (print, "draw-page",
+G_CALLBACK (draw_page), &data);
+
+res = gtk_print_operation_run (print,
+GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT_DIALOG,
+parent,
+&error);
+
+if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_ERROR)
+{
+error_dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (GTK_WINDOW (parent),
+GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
+GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
+GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
+"Error printing file:\n%s",
+error->message);
+g_signal_connect (error_dialog, "response",
+G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_destroy), NULL);
+gtk_widget_show (error_dialog);
+g_error_free (error);
+}
+else if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY)
+{
+if (settings != NULL)
+g_object_unref (settings);
+settings = g_object_ref (gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings (print));
+}
+]|
+
+Note that gtk_print_operation_run() can only be called once on a
+given #GtkPrintOperation.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action to start
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> Return location for errors, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the result of the print operation. A return value of
+%GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY indicates that the printing was
+completed successfully. In this case, it is a good idea to obtain
+the used print settings with gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings()
+and store them for reuse with the next print operation. A value of
+%GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_IN_PROGRESS means the operation is running
+asynchronously, and will emit the #GtkPrintOperation::done signal when
+done.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_notebook_popup_enable">
<description>
Enables the popup menu: if the user clicks with the right mouse button on
@@ -59705,6 +57538,29 @@ needs, use gtk_scale_set_digits() to correct it.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_add_filter">
+<description>
+Adds @filter to the list of #GtkRecentFilter objects held by @chooser.
+
+If no previous filter objects were defined, this function will call
+gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter().
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_column_type">
<description>
Returns the type of the column.
@@ -59725,6 +57581,40 @@ Returns the type of the column.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_container_propagate_expose">
+<description>
+When a container receives an expose event, it must send synthetic
+expose events to all children that don't have their own #GdkWindows.
+This function provides a convenient way of doing this. A container,
+when it receives an expose event, calls gtk_container_propagate_expose()
+once for each child, passing in the event the container received.
+
+gtk_container_propagate_expose() takes care of deciding whether
+an expose event needs to be sent to the child, intersecting
+the event's area with the child area, and sending the event.
+
+In most cases, a container can simply either simply inherit the
+#GtkWidget::expose implementation from #GtkContainer, or, do some drawing
+and then chain to the ::expose implementation from #GtkContainer.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a child of @container
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a expose event sent to container
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_list_icons">
<description>
Lists the icons in the current icon theme. Only a subset
@@ -59755,42 +57645,6 @@ with g_list_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_activatable_get_related_action">
-<description>
-Gets the related #GtkAction for @activatable.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="activatable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the related #GtkAction if one is set.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_toolbar_reconfigured">
-<description>
-Emits the signal #GtkToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured on @tool_item.
-#GtkToolbar and other #GtkToolShell implementations use this function
-to notify children, when some aspect of their configuration changes.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_create_drag_icon">
<description>
Creates a #GdkPixmap representation of the item at @path.
@@ -59835,81 +57689,145 @@ If the result is non-%NULL it must be freed with g_object_unref().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_mnemonics_visible">
<description>
-Gets the gicon of @action.
+Gets the value of the #GtkWindow:mnemonics-visible property.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The action's #GIcon if one is set.
+<return> %TRUE if mnemonics are supposed to be visible
+in this window.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_preview_text">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_activatable">
<description>
-Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
+Returns whether the icon is activatable.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fsd">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the text to display in the preview area
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the icon is activatable.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_tooltip_markup">
<description>
-Adds @clipboard to the list of clipboards in which the selection
-contents of @buffer are available. In most cases, @clipboard will be
-the #GtkClipboard of type %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY for a view of @buffer.
+Gets the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+</parameters>
+<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
+returned string with g_free() when done.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_accel_groups_activate">
+<description>
+Finds the first accelerator in any #GtkAccelGroup attached
+to @object that matches @accel_key and @accel_mods, and
+activates that accelerator.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="object">
+<parameter_description> the #GObject, usually a #GtkWindow, on which
+to activate the accelerator.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> accelerator keyval from a key event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> keyboard state mask from a key event
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if an accelerator was activated and handled this keypress
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_focus_on_map">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_action_groups">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_focus_on_map().
+Returns the list of action groups associated with @self.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if window should receive the input focus when
-mapped.
+<return> a #GList of
+action groups. The list is owned by GTK+
+and should not be modified.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_set">
+<description>
+Stores new data into a #GtkSelectionData object. Should
+<emphasis>only</emphasis> be called from a selection handler callback.
+Zero-terminates the stored data.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> the type of selection data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> format (number of bits in a unit)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> pointer to the data (will be copied)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="length">
+<parameter_description> length of the data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_builder_connect_signals">
<description>
This method is a simpler variation of gtk_builder_connect_signals_full().
@@ -59962,71 +57880,41 @@ stock id to select the stock item for the button.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_default_colormap">
-<description>
-Sets the default colormap to use when creating widgets.
-gtk_widget_push_colormap() is a better function to use if
-you only want to affect a few widgets, rather than all widgets.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_menu_label_text">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_state">
<description>
-Retrieves the text of the menu label for the page containing
- child
+Returns the widget's state. See gtk_widget_set_state().
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the child widget of a page of the notebook.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the text of the tab label, or %NULL if the
-widget does not have a menu label other than
-the default menu label, or the menu label widget
-is not a #GtkLabel. The string is owned by
-the widget and must not be freed.
+<return> the state of @widget.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_expand">
<description>
-If the text direction is wildcarded, this source can be used
-as the base image for an icon in any #GtkTextDirection.
-If the text direction is not wildcarded, then the
-text direction the icon source applies to should be set
-with gtk_icon_source_set_direction(), and the icon source
-will only be used with that text direction.
+Returns whether @tool_item is allocated extra space.
+See gtk_tool_item_set_expand().
-#GtkIconSet prefers non-wildcarded sources (exact matches) over
-wildcarded sources, and will use an exact match when possible.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to wildcard the text direction
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_tool_button_get_group">
@@ -60069,26 +57957,6 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_orientation">
-<description>
-Sets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageOrientation value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_page_setup_copy">
<description>
Copies a #GtkPageSetup.
@@ -60107,23 +57975,26 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_wrap">
+<function name="gtk_custom_paper_unix_dialog_new">
<description>
-Sets the flag that determines if a spin button value wraps around to the
-opposite limit when the upper or lower limit of the range is exceeded.
+Creates a new custom paper dialog.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the title of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wrap">
-<parameter_description> a flag indicating if wrapping behavior is performed.
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new #GtkCustomPaperUnixDialog
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_size_group_get_mode">
@@ -60181,21 +58052,21 @@ model is unset.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_tooltip_markup">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_max_width_chars">
<description>
-Gets the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon.
+Retrieves the desired maximum width of @label, in characters. See
+gtk_label_set_width_chars().
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
-returned string with g_free() when done.
+<return> the maximum width of the label in characters.
</return>
</function>
@@ -60274,30 +58145,6 @@ accelerators are added or removed from the associated widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_test_slider_set_perc">
-<description>
-This function will adjust the slider position of all GtkRange
-based widgets, such as scrollbars or scales, it'll also adjust
-spin buttons. The adjustment value of these widgets is set to
-a value between the lower and upper limits, according to the
- percentage argument.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> valid widget pointer.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="percentage">
-<parameter_description> value between 0 and 100.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_button_get_focus_on_click">
<description>
Returns whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
@@ -60344,7 +58191,7 @@ Retrieves the current text size group for the tool shell. Tool items must not
call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_text_size_group()
instead.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -60358,53 +58205,6 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip">
-<description>
-Sets the #GtkTooltips object to be used for @tool_item, the
-text to be displayed as tooltip on the item and the private text
-to be used. See gtk_tooltips_set_tip().
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip_text() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltips">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTooltips object to be used
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tip_text">
-<parameter_description> text to be used as tooltip text for @tool_item
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tip_private">
-<parameter_description> text to be used as private tooltip text
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_notebook_prev_page">
-<description>
-Switches to the previous page. Nothing happens if the current page
-is the first page.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_load_icon">
<description>
Looks up an icon in an icon theme, scales it to the given size
@@ -60524,46 +58324,40 @@ Determines whether the colorsel has an opacity control.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_ends">
+<function name="gtk_drag_begin">
<description>
-Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() @count times (or until
-gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() returns %FALSE). If @count is
-negative, moves backward instead of forward.
+Initiates a drag on the source side. The function
+only needs to be used when the application is
+starting drags itself, and is not needed when
+gtk_drag_source_set() is used.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the source widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of sentences to move
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> The targets (data formats) in which the
+source can provide the data.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_support_selection">
-<description>
-Sets whether selection is supported by #GtkPrintOperation.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="actions">
+<parameter_description> A bitmask of the allowed drag actions for this drag.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="support_selection">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to support selection
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> The button the user clicked to start the drag.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> The event that triggered the start of the drag.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the context for this drag.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_hadjustment">
@@ -60584,81 +58378,40 @@ Sets the #GtkAdjustment for the horizontal scrollbar.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_tree_coords">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_accept_focus">
<description>
-Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the
-tree (the full scrollable area of the tree).
+Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to receive
+the input focus. This function sets this hint.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wx">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate relative to the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wy">
-<parameter_description> Y coordinate relative to the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tx">
-<parameter_description> return location for tree X coordinate
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ty">
-<parameter_description> return location for tree Y coordinate
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to let this window receive input focus
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_insertion_cursor">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_widget_new">
<description>
-Draws a text caret on @drawable at @location. This is not a style function
-but merely a convenience function for drawing the standard cursor shape.
+Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget object. This is an embeddable widget
+used to access the recently used resources list.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="location">
-<parameter_description> location where to draw the cursor (@location->width is ignored)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_primary">
-<parameter_description> if the cursor should be the primary cursor color.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="direction">
-<parameter_description> whether the cursor is left-to-right or
-right-to-left. Should never be #GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="draw_arrow">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to draw a directional arrow on the
-cursor. Should be %FALSE unless the cursor is split.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item">
@@ -60709,22 +58462,15 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rubber_banding">
+<function name="gtk_editable_cut_clipboard">
<description>
-Enables or disables rubber banding in @tree_view. If the selection mode
-is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the user to select
-multiple rows by dragging the mouse.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Removes the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
+puts it on the clipboard.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="enable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable rubber banding
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -60902,6 +58648,28 @@ owned by GTK+ and must not be unreffed or modified.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_calendar_select_month">
+<description>
+Shifts the calendar to a different month.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="month">
+<parameter_description> a month number between 0 and 11.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="year">
+<parameter_description> the year the month is in.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_get_has_tooltip">
<description>
Returns the current value of the has-tooltip property. See
@@ -60945,6 +58713,40 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_dest_item_at_pos">
+<description>
+Determines the destination item for a given position.
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="drag_x">
+<parameter_description> the position to determine the destination item for
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="drag_y">
+<parameter_description> the position to determine the destination item for
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the item, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pos">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether there is an item at the given position.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_active_text">
<description>
Returns the currently active string in @combo_box or %NULL if none
@@ -61022,38 +58824,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_test_widget_send_key">
-<description>
-This function will generate keyboard press and release events in
-the middle of the first GdkWindow found that belongs to @widget.
-For %GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets like GtkButton, this will often be an
-input-only event window. For other widgets, this is usually widget->window.
-Certain caveats should be considered when using this function, in
-particular because the mouse pointer is warped to the key press
-location, see gdk_test_simulate_key() for details.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> Widget to generate a key press and release on.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> A Gdk keyboard value.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> Keyboard modifiers the event is setup with.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> wether all actions neccessary for the key event simulation were carried out successfully.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_rc_property_parse_enum">
<description>
A #GtkRcPropertyParser for use with gtk_settings_install_property_parser()
@@ -61119,30 +58889,6 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_get">
-<description>
-Gets the #GtkImage.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_image_get_image() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="val">
-<parameter_description> return location for a #GdkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkBitmap that indicates which parts of the image should be transparent.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_source_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkIconSource. A #GtkIconSource contains a #GdkPixbuf (or
@@ -61182,22 +58928,33 @@ direction, widget state, or icon size.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_new_with_buffer">
+<function name="gtk_size_request_get_height_for_width">
<description>
-Creates a new entry with the specified text buffer.
+Retrieves a widget's desired height if it would be given
+the specified @width.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> The buffer to use for the new #GtkEntry.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeRequest instance
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width which is available for allocation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="minimum_height">
+<parameter_description> location for storing the minimum height, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="natural_height">
+<parameter_description> location for storing the natural height, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkEntry
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_style">
@@ -61220,30 +58977,6 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_radio">
-<description>
-If @radio is %TRUE, the cell renderer renders a radio toggle
-(i.e. a toggle in a group of mutually-exclusive toggles).
-If %FALSE, it renders a check toggle (a standalone boolean option).
-This can be set globally for the cell renderer, or changed just
-before rendering each cell in the model (for #GtkTreeView, you set
-up a per-row setting using #GtkTreeViewColumn to associate model
-columns with cell renderer properties).
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="radio">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to make the toggle look like a radio button
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_adjustment_set_upper">
<description>
Sets the maximum value of the adjustment.
@@ -61272,23 +59005,20 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_proxies">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_justification">
<description>
-Returns the proxy widgets for an action.
-See also gtk_widget_get_action().
+Gets the default justification of paragraphs in @text_view.
+Tags in the buffer may override the default.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GSList of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+
-and must not be modified.
-
+<return> default justification
</return>
</function>
@@ -61313,6 +59043,59 @@ with g_slist_free(), and the filenames with g_free().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_get_length">
+<description>
+Retrieves the length in characters of the buffer.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The number of characters in the buffer.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_alignment_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkAlignment.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> the horizontal alignment of the child widget, from 0 (left) to 1
+(right).
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> the vertical alignment of the child widget, from 0 (top) to 1
+(bottom).
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xscale">
+<parameter_description> the amount that the child widget expands horizontally to fill up
+unused space, from 0 to 1.
+A value of 0 indicates that the child widget should never expand.
+A value of 1 indicates that the child widget will expand to fill all of the
+space allocated for the #GtkAlignment.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yscale">
+<parameter_description> the amount that the child widget expands vertically to fill up
+unused space, from 0 to 1. The values are similar to @xscale.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the new #GtkAlignment.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_drag_source_get_target_list">
<description>
Gets the list of targets this widget can provide for
@@ -61350,6 +59133,36 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_style_lookup_color">
+<description>
+Looks up @color_name in the style's logical color mappings,
+filling in @color and returning %TRUE if found, otherwise
+returning %FALSE. Do not cache the found mapping, because
+it depends on the #GtkStyle and might change when a theme
+switch occurs.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the logical color to look up
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkColor to fill in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the mapping was found.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_cursor_on_cell">
<description>
Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @path, and selects it. This is
@@ -61418,6 +59231,28 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_view_starts_display_line">
+<description>
+Determines whether @iter is at the start of a display line.
+See gtk_text_view_forward_display_line() for an explanation of
+display lines vs. paragraphs.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter begins a wrapped line
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_get_default_language">
<description>
Returns the #PangoLanguage for the default language currently in
@@ -61462,7 +59297,7 @@ Removes a widget from a #GtkSizeGroup.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="size_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGrup
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
@@ -61473,23 +59308,14 @@ Removes a widget from a #GtkSizeGroup.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_realized">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_update">
<description>
-Marks the widget as being realized.
-
-This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
-"realize" or "unrealize" implementation.
-
-Since: 2.20
+Manually force an update of the spin button.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="realized">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to mark the widget as realized
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -61747,6 +59573,34 @@ compare to <literal>event->window</literal> to confirm that the e
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_text">
+<description>
+Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format
+(with printf()-style).
+
+Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
+bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="message_dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="message_format">
+<parameter_description> printf()-style format string, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_nth_item">
<description>
Returns the @n<!-- -->'th item on @toolbar, or %NULL if the
@@ -61771,67 +59625,43 @@ isn't an @n<!-- -->'th item.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_item_position">
+<function name="gtk_layout_set_vadjustment">
<description>
-Sets the position of @item in the list of children of @group.
+Sets the vertical scroll adjustment for the layout.
+
+See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
-Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="item">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkToolItem to move to a new position, should
-be a child of @group.
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the new position of @item in @group, starting with 0.
-The position -1 means end of list.
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> new scroll adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_apply_button">
-<description>
-Obtains a button. The button doesn't have any function.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-Deprecated: 2.16: Don't use this function.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="fsd">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkWidget
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_layout_set_vadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_item_width">
<description>
-Sets the vertical scroll adjustment for the layout.
-
-See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
+Sets the ::item-width property which specifies the width
+to use for each item. If it is set to -1, the icon view will
+automatically determine a suitable item size.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> new scroll adjustment
+<parameter name="item_width">
+<parameter_description> the width for each item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -61871,35 +59701,23 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order_from_array">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_completion_prefix">
<description>
-Sets an alternative button order. If the
-#GtkSettings:gtk-alternative-button-order setting is set to %TRUE,
-the dialog buttons are reordered according to the order of the
-response ids in @new_order.
-
-See gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order() for more information.
-
-This function is for use by language bindings.
+Get the original text entered by the user that triggered
+the completion or %NULL if there's no completion ongoing.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_params">
-<parameter_description> the number of response ids in @new_order
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_order">
-<parameter_description> an array of response ids of @dialog's buttons
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the prefix for the current completion
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_calendar_set_display_options">
@@ -61979,19 +59797,31 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_is_valid">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_lines">
<description>
-Check if there are any invalid regions in a #GtkTextLayout's buffer
+Moves @count visible lines forward, if possible (if @count would move
+past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
+the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
+onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
+moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
+the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
+moves backward by 0 - @count lines.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of lines to move forward
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if any invalid regions were found
+<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -62065,25 +59895,6 @@ removed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_progress_fraction">
-<description>
-Returns the current fraction of the task that's been completed.
-See gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction().
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_bin_window_to_tree_coords">
<description>
Converts bin_window coordinates to coordinates for the
@@ -62141,27 +59952,20 @@ use by language bindings.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_current_uri">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_selection">
<description>
-Returns the URI for the currently active link in the label.
-The active link is the one under the mouse pointer or, in a
-selectable label, the link in which the text cursor is currently
-positioned.
-
-This function is intended for use in a #GtkLabel::activate-link handler
-or for use in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip handler.
+Retrieves the #GtkFontSelection widget embedded in the dialog.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the currently active URI. The string is owned by GTK+ and must
-not be freed or modified.
+<return> the embedded #GtkFontSelection
</return>
</function>
@@ -62365,25 +60169,32 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_delete_entry">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_ancestor">
<description>
-Deletes the menu item which was created from @entry by the given
-item factory.
+Gets the first ancestor of @widget with type @widget_type. For example,
+<literal>gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX)</literal> gets
+the first #GtkBox that's an ancestor of @widget. No reference will be
+added to the returned widget; it should not be unreferenced. See note
+about checking for a toplevel #GtkWindow in the docs for
+gtk_widget_get_toplevel().
+
+Note that unlike gtk_widget_is_ancestor(), gtk_widget_get_ancestor()
+considers @widget to be an ancestor of itself.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactoryEntry
+<parameter name="widget_type">
+<parameter_description> ancestor type
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the ancestor widget, or %NULL if not found
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_drag_target_item">
@@ -62456,99 +60267,85 @@ Windows may not be resized smaller than 1 by 1 pixels.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_active_iter">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_display_name">
<description>
-Sets the current active item to be the one referenced by @iter, or
-unsets the active item if @iter is %NULL.
-
- iter must correspond to a path of depth one, or be %NULL.
+Gets the human-readable name of the #GtkPaperSize.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the human-readable name of @size
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_calendar_set_detail_func">
+<function name="gtk_widget_grab_focus">
<description>
-Installs a function which provides Pango markup with detail information
-for each day. Examples for such details are holidays or appointments. That
-information is shown below each day when #GtkCalendar:show-details is set.
-A tooltip containing with full detail information is provided, if the entire
-text should not fit into the details area, or if #GtkCalendar:show-details
-is not set.
-
-The size of the details area can be restricted by setting the
-#GtkCalendar:detail-width-chars and #GtkCalendar:detail-height-rows
-properties.
+Causes @widget to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
+inside. @widget must be a focusable widget, such as a #GtkEntry;
+something like #GtkFrame won't work.
-Since: 2.14
+More precisely, it must have the %GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set. Use
+gtk_widget_set_can_focus() to modify that flag.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> a function providing details for each day.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @func invokations.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> a function for releasing @data.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_unselect_all">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_line_wrap">
<description>
-Unselects all the items inside @chooser.
+Toggles line wrapping within the #GtkLabel widget. %TRUE makes it break
+lines if text exceeds the widget's size. %FALSE lets the text get cut off
+by the edge of the widget if it exceeds the widget size.
-Since: 2.10
+Note that setting line wrapping to %TRUE does not make the label
+wrap at its parent container's width, because GTK+ widgets
+conceptually can't make their requisition depend on the parent
+container's size. For a label that wraps at a specific position,
+set the label's width using gtk_widget_set_size_request().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wrap">
+<parameter_description> the setting
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_move_iter_to_previous_line">
+<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic">
<description>
-Move the iterator to the beginning of the previous line. The lines
-of a wrapped paragraph are treated as distinct for this operation.
+Creates a new #GtkCheckMenuItem containing a label. The label
+will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
+in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> The text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
+mnemonic character
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkCheckMenuItem
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_remove">
@@ -62595,57 +60392,102 @@ or %NULL to unset a previously set custom theme
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_use_full_page">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_rebuild_menu">
<description>
-If @full_page is %TRUE, the transformation for the cairo context
-obtained from #GtkPrintContext puts the origin at the top left
-corner of the page (which may not be the top left corner of the
-sheet, depending on page orientation and the number of pages per
-sheet). Otherwise, the origin is at the top left corner of the
-imageable area (i.e. inside the margins).
+Calling this function signals to the toolbar that the
+overflow menu item for @tool_item has changed. If the
+overflow menu is visible when this function it called,
+the menu will be rebuilt.
-Since: 2.10
+The function must be called when the tool item changes what it
+will do in response to the #GtkToolItem::create-menu-proxy signal.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="full_page">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to set up the #GtkPrintContext for the full page
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_use_drag_window">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_right_margin">
<description>
-Returns whether @tool_item has a drag window. See
-gtk_tool_item_set_use_drag_window().
+Gets the default right margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @tool_item uses a drag window.
+<return> the default right margin
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_backend_load_modules">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_index">
<description>
+Same as gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset(), but works with a
+<emphasis>byte</emphasis> index. The given byte index must be at
+the start of a character, it can't be in the middle of a UTF-8
+encoded character.
+
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="byte_on_line">
+<parameter_description> a byte index relative to the start of @iter's current line
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_get_row_drag_data">
+<description>
+Obtains a @tree_model and @path from selection data of target type
+%GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW. Normally called from a drag_data_received handler.
+This function can only be used if @selection_data originates from the same
+process that's calling this function, because a pointer to the tree model
+is being passed around. If you aren't in the same process, then you'll
+get memory corruption. In the #GtkTreeDragDest drag_data_received handler,
+you can assume that selection data of type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW is
+in from the current process. The returned path must be freed with
+gtk_tree_path_free().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> row in @tree_model
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @selection_data had target type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW and
+is otherwise valid
</return>
</function>
@@ -62708,23 +60550,39 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_popup_data">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_double_buffered">
<description>
-Obtains the @popup_data which was passed to
-gtk_item_factory_popup_with_data(). This data is available until the menu
-is popped down again.
+Widgets are double buffered by default; you can use this function
+to turn off the buffering. "Double buffered" simply means that
+gdk_window_begin_paint_region() and gdk_window_end_paint() are called
+automatically around expose events sent to the
+widget. gdk_window_begin_paint() diverts all drawing to a widget's
+window to an offscreen buffer, and gdk_window_end_paint() draws the
+buffer to the screen. The result is that users see the window
+update in one smooth step, and don't see individual graphics
+primitives being rendered.
+
+In very simple terms, double buffered widgets don't flicker,
+so you would only use this function to turn off double buffering
+if you had special needs and really knew what you were doing.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+Note: if you turn off double-buffering, you have to handle
+expose events, since even the clearing to the background color or
+pixmap will not happen automatically (as it is done in
+gdk_window_begin_paint()).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="double_buffered">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to double-buffer a widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> @popup_data associated with @ifactory
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_text_column">
@@ -62785,22 +60643,6 @@ Copies the currently-selected text to a clipboard.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_sort_indicator">
-<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether the sort indicator arrow is displayed
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_modified">
<description>
Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
@@ -62906,24 +60748,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_get_icon_name">
-<description>
-Gets the name of the icon to use for the printer.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the icon name for @printer
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_rc_property_parse_border">
<description>
A #GtkRcPropertyParser for use with gtk_settings_install_property_parser()
@@ -62980,23 +60804,58 @@ widget is in the buffer.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_new_from_string">
+<function name="gtk_button_box_get_layout">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreePath initialized to @path. @path is expected to be a
-colon separated list of numbers. For example, the string "10:4:0" would
-create a path of depth 3 pointing to the 11th child of the root node, the 5th
-child of that 11th child, and the 1st child of that 5th child. If an invalid
-path string is passed in, %NULL is returned.
+Retrieves the method being used to arrange the buttons in a button box.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The string representation of a path.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButtonBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created #GtkTreePath, or %NULL
+<return> the method used to layout buttons in @widget.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_tabs">
+<description>
+Gets the default tabs for @text_view. Tags in the buffer may
+override the defaults. The returned array will be %NULL if
+"standard" (8-space) tabs are used. Free the return value
+with pango_tab_array_free().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> copy of default tab array, or %NULL if "standard"
+tabs are used; must be freed with pango_tab_array_free().
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_status">
+<description>
+Returns the status of the print operation.
+Also see gtk_print_operation_get_status_string().
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the status of the print operation
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -63052,51 +60911,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_resize_grip">
-<description>
-Draws a resize grip in the given rectangle on @window using the given
-parameters.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_resize_grip() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="edge">
-<parameter_description> the edge in which to draw the resize grip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_default_page_setup">
<description>
Makes @default_page_setup the default page setup for @op.
@@ -63138,37 +60952,27 @@ gtk_viewport_set_shadow_type().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_chars_in_line">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_current_uri">
<description>
-Returns the number of characters in the line containing @iter,
-including the paragraph delimiters.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> number of characters in the line
-</return>
-</function>
+Returns the URI for the currently active link in the label.
+The active link is the one under the mouse pointer or, in a
+selectable label, the link in which the text cursor is currently
+positioned.
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_n_pages">
-<description>
-Gets the number of pages in a notebook.
+This function is intended for use in a #GtkLabel::activate-link handler
+or for use in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip handler.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of pages in the notebook.
+<return> the currently active URI. The string is owned by GTK+ and must
+not be freed or modified.
</return>
</function>
@@ -63194,26 +60998,6 @@ is no next @iter, %FALSE is returned and @iter is set to be invalid.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_entry">
-<description>
-Returns the #GtkEntry which is currently in use as interactive search
-entry for @tree_view. In case the built-in entry is being used, %NULL
-will be returned.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the entry currently in use as search entry.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line">
<description>
Moves iterator @iter to the start of the line @line_number. If
@@ -63255,35 +61039,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_create_items">
-<description>
-Creates the menu items from the @entries.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> the length of @entries
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry<!-- -->s whose @callback members
-must by of type #GtkItemFactoryCallback1
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_data">
-<parameter_description> data passed to the callback functions of all entries
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_remove_filter">
<description>
Removes @filter from the list of filters that the user can select between.
@@ -63304,101 +61059,43 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_tag_get_priority">
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_get_max_length">
<description>
-Get the tag priority.
+Retrieves the maximum allowed length of the text in
+ buffer See gtk_entry_buffer_set_max_length().
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The tag's priority.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_window_iconify">
-<description>
-Asks to iconify (i.e. minimize) the specified @window. Note that
-you shouldn't assume the window is definitely iconified afterward,
-because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could deiconify it
-again, or there may not be a window manager in which case
-iconification isn't possible, etc. But normally the window will end
-up iconified. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
-
-It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
-in which case the window will be iconified before it ever appears
-onscreen.
-
-You can track iconification via the "window-state-event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
-
+<return> the maximum allowed number of characters
+in #GtkEntryBuffer, or 0 if there is no maximum.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_box_gap">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_blinking">
<description>
-Draws a box in @window using the given style and state and shadow type,
-leaving a gap in one side.
+Makes the status icon start or stop blinking.
+Note that blinking user interface elements may be problematic
+for some users, and thus may be turned off, in which case
+this setting has no effect.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_box_gap() instead.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_side">
-<parameter_description> side in which to leave the gap
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_x">
-<parameter_description> starting position of the gap
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_width">
-<parameter_description> width of the gap
+<parameter name="blinking">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to turn blinking on, %FALSE to turn it off
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -63515,22 +61212,18 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_select_function">
+<function name="gtk_border_free">
<description>
-Returns the current selection function.
-
-Since: 2.14
+Frees a #GtkBorder structure.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
+<parameter name="border_">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBorder.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The function.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_range_set_adjustment">
@@ -63700,7 +61393,7 @@ no font is selected. You must free this string with g_free().
<description>
Sets the current sort column to be @sort_column_id. The @sortable will
resort itself to reflect this change, after emitting a
-#GtkTreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal. @sortable may either be
+#GtkTreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal. @sort_column_id may either be
a regular column id, or one of the following special values:
<variablelist>
<varlistentry>
@@ -63778,12 +61471,6 @@ outside the widget. If returning %TRUE, widgets normally
call gtk_widget_grab_focus() to place the focus accordingly;
if returning %FALSE, they don't modify the current focus location.
-This function replaces gtk_container_focus() from GTK+ 1.2.
-It was necessary to check that the child was visible, sensitive,
-and focusable before calling gtk_container_focus().
-gtk_widget_child_focus() returns %FALSE if the widget is not
-currently in a focusable state, so there's no need for those checks.
-
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -63821,6 +61508,40 @@ as a local filename. Free with g_free()
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_add_with_viewport">
+<description>
+Used to add children without native scrolling capabilities. This
+is simply a convenience function; it is equivalent to adding the
+unscrollable child to a viewport, then adding the viewport to the
+scrolled window. If a child has native scrolling, use
+gtk_container_add() instead of this function.
+
+The viewport scrolls the child by moving its #GdkWindow, and takes
+the size of the child to be the size of its toplevel #GdkWindow.
+This will be very wrong for most widgets that support native scrolling;
+for example, if you add a widget such as #GtkTreeView with a viewport,
+the whole widget will scroll, including the column headings. Thus,
+widgets with native scrolling support should not be used with the
+#GtkViewport proxy.
+
+A widget supports scrolling natively if the
+set_scroll_adjustments_signal field in #GtkWidgetClass is non-zero,
+i.e. has been filled in with a valid signal identifier.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the widget you want to scroll
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_view_get_size_of_row">
<description>
Sets @requisition to the size needed by @cell_view to display
@@ -63888,20 +61609,24 @@ Returns %TRUE if the user can click on the header for the column.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_icons">
+<function name="gtk_toggle_tool_button_new_from_stock">
<description>
-Retrieves whether @chooser should show an icon near the resource.
+Creates a new #GtkToggleToolButton containing the image and text from a
+stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
+and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-Since: 2.10
+It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the icons should be displayed, %FALSE otherwise.
+<return> A new #GtkToggleToolButton
</return>
</function>
@@ -63991,48 +61716,6 @@ gtk_accel_group_from_accel_closure().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new_with_backend">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkFileChooserDialog with a specified backend. This is
-especially useful if you use gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only() to allow
-non-local files and you use a more expressive vfs, such as gnome-vfs,
-to load files.
-
-Since: 2.4
-Deprecated: 2.14: Use gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> Title of the dialog, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> Open or save mode for the dialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="backend">
-<parameter_description> The name of the specific filesystem backend to use.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_button_text">
-<parameter_description> stock ID or text to go in the first button, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> response ID for the first button, then additional (button, id) pairs, ending with %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkFileChooserDialog
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tooltip_set_icon">
<description>
Sets the icon of the tooltip (which is in front of the text) to be
@@ -64054,30 +61737,21 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_type_hint">
+<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_handle_position">
<description>
-By setting the type hint for the window, you allow the window
-manager to decorate and handle the window in a way which is
-suitable to the function of the window in your application.
-
-This function should be called before the window becomes visible.
-
-gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons() and other convenience functions in GTK+
-will sometimes call gtk_window_set_type_hint() on your behalf.
+Gets the handle position of the handle box. See
+gtk_handle_box_set_handle_position().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="hint">
-<parameter_description> the window type
+<parameter name="handle_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the current handle position.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_current_uri">
@@ -64106,26 +61780,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_alignment">
-<description>
-Sets the alignment of the title or custom widget inside the column header.
-The alignment determines its location inside the button -- 0.0 for left, 0.5
-for center, 1.0 for right.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> The alignment, which is between [0.0 and 1.0] inclusive.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_list_contexts">
<description>
Gets the list of contexts available within the current
@@ -64249,36 +61903,18 @@ returned string with g_free() when done.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_uposition">
+<function name="gtk_entry_unset_invisible_char">
<description>
-Sets the position of a widget. The funny "u" in the name comes from
-the "user position" hint specified by the X Window System, and
-exists for legacy reasons. This function doesn't work if a widget
-is inside a container; it's only really useful on #GtkWindow.
-
-Don't use this function to center dialogs over the main application
-window; most window managers will do the centering on your behalf
-if you call gtk_window_set_transient_for(), and it's really not
-possible to get the centering to work correctly in all cases from
-application code. But if you insist, use gtk_window_set_position()
-to set #GTK_WIN_POS_CENTER_ON_PARENT, don't do the centering
-manually.
+Unsets the invisible char previously set with
+gtk_entry_set_invisible_char(). So that the
+default invisible char is used again.
-Note that although @x and @y can be individually unset, the position
-is not honoured unless both @x and @y are set.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x position; -1 to unset x; -2 to leave x unchanged
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y position; -1 to unset y; -2 to leave y unchanged
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -64313,6 +61949,29 @@ handler for the signal applies @tag to the given range.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_device_events">
+<description>
+Returns the events mask for the widget corresponding to an specific device. These
+are the events that the widget will receive when @device operates on it.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> device event mask for @widget
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_bool">
<description>
Returns the boolean represented by the value
@@ -64445,39 +62104,47 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_line">
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup">
<description>
-Returns the line number containing the iterator. Lines in
-a #GtkTextBuffer are numbered beginning with 0 for the first
-line in the buffer.
+Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format (with
+printf()-style), which is marked up with the
+<link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
+
+Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
+bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
+Due to an oversight, this function does not escape special XML characters
+like gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup() does. Thus, if the arguments
+may contain special XML characters, you should use g_markup_printf_escaped()
+to escape it.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a line number
-</return>
-</function>
+<informalexample><programlisting>
+gchar *msg;
-<function name="gtk_style_ref">
-<description>
-Increase the reference count of @style.
+msg = g_markup_printf_escaped (message_format, ...);
+gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup (message_dialog, "%s", msg);
+g_free (msg);
+</programlisting></informalexample>
-Deprecated: 2.0: use g_object_ref() instead.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
+<parameter name="message_dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="message_format">
+<parameter_description> printf()-style markup string (see
+ <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>), or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> @style.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_output_bin">
@@ -64522,103 +62189,43 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_bin_window_to_widget_coords">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_widget">
<description>
-Converts bin_window coordinates (see gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window())
-to widget relative coordinates.
-
-Since: 2.12
+Sets the widget in the header to be @widget. If widget is %NULL, then the
+header button is set with a #GtkLabel set to the title of @tree_column.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bx">
-<parameter_description> bin_window X coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="by">
-<parameter_description> bin_window Y coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wx">
-<parameter_description> return location for widget X coordinate
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wy">
-<parameter_description> return location for widget Y coordinate
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> A child #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_new">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_direction">
<description>
-Creates an empty status icon object.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
-
-</return>
-</function>
+Sets the text direction this icon source is intended to be used
+with.
-<function name="gtk_paint_resize_grip">
-<description>
-Draws a resize grip in the given rectangle on @window using the given
-parameters.
+Setting the text direction on an icon source makes no difference
+if the text direction is wildcarded. Therefore, you should usually
+call gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded() to un-wildcard it
+in addition to calling this function.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="edge">
-<parameter_description> the edge in which to draw the resize grip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+<parameter name="direction">
+<parameter_description> text direction this source applies to
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -64675,43 +62282,6 @@ done in @tree_view.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_tree_to_widget_coords">
-<description>
-Converts tree coordinates (coordinates in full scrollable area of the tree)
-to bin_window coordinates.
-
-Deprecated: 2.12: Due to historial reasons the name of this function is
-incorrect. For converting bin_window coordinates to coordinates relative
-to bin_window, please see
-gtk_tree_view_convert_bin_window_to_widget_coords().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tx">
-<parameter_description> tree X coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ty">
-<parameter_description> tree Y coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wx">
-<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate relative to bin_window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wy">
-<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate relative to bin_window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_min_width">
<description>
Sets the minimum width of the @tree_column. If @min_width is -1, then the
@@ -64765,42 +62335,6 @@ Sets the way @child is packed into @box.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_editable_editing_done">
-<description>
-Emits the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_editable">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeEditable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_can_focus">
-<description>
-Specifies whether @widget can own the input focus. See
-gtk_widget_grab_focus() for actually setting the input focus on a
-widget.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="can_focus">
-<parameter_description> whether or not @widget can own the input focus.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_image_set_from_pixbuf">
<description>
See gtk_image_new_from_pixbuf() for details.
@@ -64892,29 +62426,30 @@ of gtk_widget_modify_fg().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_get_item">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_insert_column">
<description>
-Obtains the menu item which corresponds to @path.
-
-If the widget corresponding to @path is a menu item which opens a
-submenu, then the item is returned. If you are interested in the submenu,
-use gtk_item_factory_get_widget() instead.
+This inserts the @column into the @tree_view at @position. If @position is
+-1, then the column is inserted at the end. If @tree_view has
+"fixed_height" mode enabled, then @column must have its "sizing" property
+set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> the path to the menu item
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be inserted.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> The position to insert @column in.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the menu item for the given path, or %NULL if @path doesn't
-lead to a menu item
+<return> The number of columns in @tree_view after insertion.
</return>
</function>
@@ -64962,63 +62497,88 @@ image or mask; you still need to unref them if you own references.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_load">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_spinner_new">
<description>
-Parses a file previously saved with gtk_accel_map_save() for
-accelerator specifications, and propagates them accordingly.
+Returns a new cell renderer which will show a spinner to indicate
+activity.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_name">
-<parameter_description> a file containing accelerator specifications,
-in the GLib file name encoding
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkCellRenderer
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label">
+<function name="gtk_window_new">
<description>
-Sets whether the file chooser should display a stock label with the name of
-the file that is being previewed; the default is %TRUE. Applications that
-want to draw the whole preview area themselves should set this to %FALSE and
-display the name themselves in their preview widget.
+Creates a new #GtkWindow, which is a toplevel window that can
+contain other widgets. Nearly always, the type of the window should
+be #GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL. If you're implementing something like a
+popup menu from scratch (which is a bad idea, just use #GtkMenu),
+you might use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP. #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP is not for
+dialogs, though in some other toolkits dialogs are called "popups".
+In GTK+, #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP means a pop-up menu or pop-up tooltip.
+On X11, popup windows are not controlled by the <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>.
-See also: gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()
+If you simply want an undecorated window (no window borders), use
+gtk_window_set_decorated(), don't use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_label">
-<parameter_description> whether to display a stock label with the name of the previewed file
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> type of window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkWindow.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_visible_vertical">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy">
<description>
-Returns whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically.
-See gtk_tool_item_set_visible_vertical().
+You do not need to use this function. Creates a row reference based on
+ path This reference will keep pointing to the node pointed to by @path,
+so long as it exists. If @path isn't a valid path in @model, then %NULL is
+returned. However, unlike references created with
+gtk_tree_row_reference_new(), it does not listen to the model for changes.
+The creator of the row reference must do this explicitly using
+gtk_tree_row_reference_inserted(), gtk_tree_row_reference_deleted(),
+gtk_tree_row_reference_reordered().
+
+These functions must be called exactly once per proxy when the
+corresponding signal on the model is emitted. This single call
+updates all row references for that proxy. Since built-in GTK+
+objects like #GtkTreeView already use this mechanism internally,
+using them as the proxy object will produce unpredictable results.
+Further more, passing the same object as @model and @proxy
+doesn't work for reasons of internal implementation.
+
+This type of row reference is primarily meant by structures that need to
+carefully monitor exactly when a row reference updates itself, and is not
+generally needed by most applications.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> A proxy #GObject
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreePath to monitor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
-
+<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
@@ -65040,28 +62600,19 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_new_from_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_new_with_model">
<description>
-Creates a #GtkImage displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
-If the icon name isn't known, a "broken image" icon will be
-displayed instead. If the current icon theme is changed, the icon
-will be updated appropriately.
+Creates a new #GtkTreeModel, with @child_model as the child model.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a stock icon size
+<parameter name="child_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImage displaying the themed icon
-
+<return> A new #GtkTreeModel.
</return>
</function>
@@ -65104,26 +62655,27 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_color">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_item_column">
<description>
-Sets the current color to be @color. The first time this is called, it will
-also set the original color to be @color too.
+Gets the column in which the item @path is currently
+displayed. Column numbers start at 0.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_color_selection_set_current_color() instead.
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> an array of 4 doubles specifying the red, green, blue and opacity
-to set the current color to.
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTreePath of the item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The column in which the item is displayed
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_set_composite_name">
@@ -65221,42 +62773,83 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_embed_page_setup">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_position">
<description>
-Gets the value of #GtkPrintOperation::embed-page-setup property.
+Retrieves the iterator pointing to the character at buffer
+coordinates @x and @y. Buffer coordinates are coordinates for
+the entire buffer, not just the currently-displayed portion.
+If you have coordinates from an event, you have to convert
+those to buffer coordinates with
+gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords().
-Since: 2.18
+Note that this is different from gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_location(),
+which returns cursor locations, i.e. positions <emphasis>between</emphasis>
+characters.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="trailing">
+<parameter_description> if non-%NULL, location to store an integer indicating where
+in the grapheme the user clicked. It will either be
+zero, or the number of characters in the grapheme.
+0 represents the trailing edge of the grapheme.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x position, in buffer coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y position, in buffer coordinates
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether page setup selection combos are embedded
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_starts_sentence">
+<description>
+Determines whether @iter begins a sentence. Sentence boundaries are
+determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language
+(if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary
+algorithms).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter is at the start of a sentence.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_view_get_cell_renderers">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_embed_page_setup">
<description>
-Returns the cell renderers which have been added to @cell_view.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Gets the value of #GtkPrintOperation::embed-page-setup property.
-Deprecated: 2.18: use gtk_cell_layout_get_cells() instead.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellView
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the
-renderers has been newly allocated and should be freed with
-g_list_free() when no longer needed.
+<return> whether page setup selection combos are embedded
</return>
</function>
@@ -65318,6 +62911,23 @@ instance with gtk_socket_add_id().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_active">
+<description>
+Returns whether the cell renderer is active. See
+gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_active().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toggle">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_license">
<description>
Sets the license information to be displayed in the secondary
@@ -65376,25 +62986,15 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_delete_item">
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_get_default_mod_mask">
<description>
-Deletes the menu item which was created for @path by the given
-item factory.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+Gets the value set by gtk_accelerator_set_default_mod_mask().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a path
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the default accelerator modifier mask
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_icon_name">
@@ -65458,37 +63058,6 @@ the state using wrapper functions such as gtk_widget_set_sensitive().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_attach">
-<description>
-Attaches a style to a window; this process allocates the
-colors and creates the GC's for the style - it specializes
-it to a particular visual and colormap. The process may
-involve the creation of a new style if the style has already
-been attached to a window with a different style and colormap.
-
-Since this function may return a new object, you have to use it
-in the following way:
-<literal>style = gtk_style_attach (style, window)</literal>
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Either @style, or a newly-created #GtkStyle.
-If the style is newly created, the style parameter
-will be unref'ed, and the new style will have
-a reference count belonging to the caller.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_label">
<description>
Sets @label as the label used for the tool button. The "label" property
@@ -65533,22 +63102,36 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_wrap_width">
+<function name="gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path">
<description>
-Sets the wrap width of @combo_box to be @width. The wrap width is basically
-the preferred number of columns when you want the popup to be layed out
-in a table.
+Set the accelerator path on @menu_item, through which runtime changes of the
+menu item's accelerator caused by the user can be identified and saved to
+persistant storage (see gtk_accel_map_save() on this).
+To setup a default accelerator for this menu item, call
+gtk_accel_map_add_entry() with the same @accel_path.
+See also gtk_accel_map_add_entry() on the specifics of accelerator paths,
+and gtk_menu_set_accel_path() for a more convenient variant of this function.
-Since: 2.4
+This function is basically a convenience wrapper that handles calling
+gtk_widget_set_accel_path() with the appropriate accelerator group for
+the menu item.
+
+Note that you do need to set an accelerator on the parent menu with
+gtk_menu_set_accel_group() for this to work.
+
+Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
+pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
+g_intern_static_string().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkMenuItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> Preferred number of columns
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> accelerator path, corresponding to this menu item's
+functionality, or %NULL to unset the current path.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -65633,35 +63216,22 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_owner_set_for_display">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_headers_visible">
<description>
-Claim ownership of a given selection for a particular widget, or,
-if @widget is %NULL, release ownership of the selection.
-
-Since: 2.2
+Sets the visibility state of the headers.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the #Gdkdisplay where the selection is set
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> new selection owner (a #GdkWidget), or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> an interned atom representing the selection to claim.
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="time_">
-<parameter_description> timestamp with which to claim the selection
+<parameter name="headers_visible">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the headers are visible
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> TRUE if the operation succeeded
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_visible_range">
@@ -65712,6 +63282,39 @@ by one.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_tree_to_bin_window_coords">
+<description>
+Converts tree coordinates (coordinates in full scrollable area of the tree)
+to bin_window coordinates.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tx">
+<parameter_description> tree X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ty">
+<parameter_description> tree Y coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bx">
+<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate relative to bin_window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="by">
+<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate relative to bin_window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_accel_group_get_modifier_mask">
<description>
Gets a #GdkModifierType representing the mask for this
@@ -65740,7 +63343,7 @@ Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="size_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGrup
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -65750,24 +63353,18 @@ widgets. The list is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_printer_lpi">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_progress_new">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER_LPI.
+Creates a new #GtkCellRendererProgress.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="lpi">
-<parameter_description> the resolution in lpi (lines per inch)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new cell renderer
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_layout_add_attribute">
@@ -65802,24 +63399,25 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_wrap_width">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_allocation">
<description>
-Returns the wrap width which is used to determine the number of columns
-for the popup menu. If the wrap width is larger than 1, the combo box
-is in table mode.
+Sets the widget's allocation. This should not be used
+directly, but from within a widget's size_allocate method.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="allocation">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the wrap width.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_get_icon_name">
@@ -65840,24 +63438,6 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_option_menu_get_history">
-<description>
-Retrieves the index of the currently selected menu item. The menu
-items are numbered from top to bottom, starting with 0.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkComboBox instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="option_menu">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkOptionMenu
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> index of the selected menu item, or -1 if there are no menu items
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_expander_get_use_underline">
<description>
Returns whether an embedded underline in the expander label indicates a
@@ -65878,23 +63458,24 @@ indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_get_page_setup">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_finishings">
<description>
-Obtains the #GtkPageSetup that determines the page
-dimensions of the #GtkPrintContext.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="finishings">
+<parameter_description> the finishings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page setup of @context
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_group_get_sensitive">
@@ -65948,28 +63529,6 @@ has been set to the resulting flags value.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_map_expanded_rows">
-<description>
-Calls @func on all expanded rows.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> A function to be called
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> User data to be passed to the function.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_custom_tab_label">
<description>
Sets the label for the tab holding custom widgets.
@@ -66011,43 +63570,23 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_move_child">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new_text">
<description>
-Updates the position of a child, as for gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> child widget already added to the text view
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xpos">
-<parameter_description> new X position in window coordinates
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ypos">
-<parameter_description> new Y position in window coordinates
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Convenience function which constructs a new editable text combo box, which
+is a #GtkComboBoxEntry just displaying strings. If you use this function to
+create a text combo box, you should only manipulate its data source with
+the following convenience functions: gtk_combo_box_append_text(),
+gtk_combo_box_insert_text(), gtk_combo_box_prepend_text() and
+gtk_combo_box_remove_text().
-<function name="gtk_ctree_node_set_pixtext">
-<description>
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A new text #GtkComboBoxEntry.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_plug_construct">
@@ -66107,24 +63646,20 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_color">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_get_depth">
<description>
-Sets @color to be the current color in the GtkColorSelection widget.
+Returns the current depth of @path.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_color_selection_get_current_color() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> an array of 4 #gdouble to fill in with the current color.
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The depth of @path
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_dialog_get_action_area">
@@ -66145,26 +63680,6 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_append_menuitems">
-<description>
-Add menuitems for various available input methods to a menu;
-the menuitems, when selected, will switch the input method
-for the context and the global default input method.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="menushell">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuShell
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_info_bar_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkInfoBar object.
@@ -66179,31 +63694,6 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_select_region">
-<description>
-Selects a range of characters in the label, if the label is selectable.
-See gtk_label_set_selectable(). If the label is not selectable,
-this function has no effect. If @start_offset or
- end_offset are -1, then the end of the label will be substituted.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_offset">
-<parameter_description> start offset (in characters not bytes)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="end_offset">
-<parameter_description> end offset (in characters not bytes)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_image_get_gicon">
<description>
Gets the #GIcon and size being displayed by the #GtkImage.
@@ -66344,6 +63834,28 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_screen">
+<description>
+Sets the #GdkScreen where the @window is displayed; if
+the window is already mapped, it will be unmapped, and
+then remapped on the new screen.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_hsv_new">
<description>
Creates a new HSV color selector.
@@ -66412,30 +63924,65 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_present">
+<function name="gtk_init">
<description>
-Presents a window to the user. This may mean raising the window
-in the stacking order, deiconifying it, moving it to the current
-desktop, and/or giving it the keyboard focus, possibly dependent
-on the user's platform, window manager, and preferences.
+Call this function before using any other GTK+ functions in your GUI
+applications. It will initialize everything needed to operate the
+toolkit and parses some standard command line options. @argc and
+ argv are adjusted accordingly so your own code will
+never see those standard arguments.
-If @window is hidden, this function calls gtk_widget_show()
-as well.
+Note that there are some alternative ways to initialize GTK+:
+if you are calling gtk_parse_args(), gtk_init_check(),
+gtk_init_with_args() or g_option_context_parse() with
+the option group returned by gtk_get_option_group(), you
+<emphasis>don't</emphasis> have to call gtk_init().
-This function should be used when the user tries to open a window
-that's already open. Say for example the preferences dialog is
-currently open, and the user chooses Preferences from the menu
-a second time; use gtk_window_present() to move the already-open dialog
-where the user can see it.
+<note><para>
+This function will terminate your program if it was unable to initialize
+the GUI for some reason. If you want your program to fall back to a
+textual interface you want to call gtk_init_check() instead.
+</para></note>
-If you are calling this function in response to a user interaction,
-it is preferable to use gtk_window_present_with_time().
+<note><para>
+Since 2.18, GTK+ calls <literal>signal (SIGPIPE, SIG_IGN)</literal>
+during initialization, to ignore SIGPIPE signals, since these are
+almost never wanted in graphical applications. If you do need to
+handle SIGPIPE for some reason, reset the handler after gtk_init(),
+but notice that other libraries (e.g. libdbus or gvfs) might do
+similar things.
+</para></note>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="argc">
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argc</parameter> parameter of your
+main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="argv">
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argv</parameter> parameter of main().
+Any parameters understood by gtk_init() are stripped before return.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_model">
+<description>
+Sets the model for a #GtkTreeView. If the @tree_view already has a model
+set, it will remove it before setting the new model. If @model is %NULL,
+then it will unset the old model.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeNode.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> The model.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -66466,6 +64013,26 @@ return the property values, starting with the location for
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_item_activated">
+<description>
+Activates the item determined by @path.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath to be activated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTextView. If you don't call gtk_text_view_set_buffer()
@@ -66501,24 +64068,26 @@ used, or -1 if this is disabled.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_page_set">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_new_from_stock">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET.
+Creates a new #GtkToolButton containing the image and text from a
+stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
+and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-Since: 2.10
+It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSet value
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A new #GtkToolButton
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_run_page_setup_dialog_async">
@@ -66586,49 +64155,24 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_new">
+<function name="gtk_file_filter_add_mime_type">
<description>
-Creates a new icon theme object. Icon theme objects are used
-to lookup up an icon by name in a particular icon theme.
-Usually, you'll want to use gtk_icon_theme_get_default()
-or gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen() rather than creating
-a new icon theme object for scratch.
+Adds a rule allowing a given mime type to @filter.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> the newly created #GtkIconTheme object.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_new_with_backend">
-<description>
-Creates a new file-selecting button widget using @backend.
-
-Since: 2.6
-Deprecated: 2.14: Use gtk_file_chooser_button_new() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> the title of the browse dialog.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the open mode for the widget.
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkFileFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="backend">
-<parameter_description> the name of the #GtkFileSystem backend to use.
+<parameter name="mime_type">
+<parameter_description> name of a MIME type
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new button widget.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_text_new">
@@ -66649,59 +64193,56 @@ of the #GtkTreeView
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_row_separator_func">
+<function name="gtk_socket_new">
<description>
-Returns the current row separator function.
+Create a new empty #GtkSocket.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current row separator function.
-
+<return> the new #GtkSocket.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ctree_node_set_pixmap">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_quality">
<description>
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="quality">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintQuality value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_auto_startup_notification">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end">
<description>
-By default, after showing the first #GtkWindow, GTK+ calls
-gdk_notify_startup_complete(). Call this function to disable
-the automatic startup notification. You might do this if your
-first window is a splash screen, and you want to delay notification
-until after your real main window has been shown, for example.
-
-In that example, you would disable startup notification
-temporarily, show your splash screen, then re-enable it so that
-showing the main window would automatically result in notification.
+Moves forward to the next word end. (If @iter is currently on a
+word end, moves forward to the next one after that.) Word breaks
+are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
+language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
+algorithms).
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to automatically do startup notification
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_label_get_layout_offsets">
@@ -66733,50 +64274,50 @@ and from pixels using PANGO_PIXELS() or #PANGO_SCALE.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_settings">
+<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_set_accel_group">
<description>
-Sets the #GtkPrintSettings for the #GtkPrintUnixDialog. Typically,
-this is used to restore saved print settings from a previous print
-operation before the print dialog is shown.
+Specifies an @accel_group to add the menu items accelerator to
+(this only applies to stock items so a stock item must already
+be set, make sure to call gtk_image_menu_item_set_use_stock()
+and gtk_menu_item_set_label() with a valid stock item first).
-Since: 2.10
+If you want this menu item to have changeable accelerators then
+you shouldnt need this (see gtk_image_menu_item_new_from_stock()).
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+<parameter name="image_menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImageMenuItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings, or %NULL
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAccelGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_expand">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_visited">
<description>
-Sets whether the group should be given extra space.
+Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
+was last visited.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup which is a child of palette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> whether the group should be given extra space
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
+the resource was last visited, or -1 on failure.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_test_display_button_window">
@@ -66832,23 +64373,11 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_new">
+<function name="gtk_container_get_focus_hadjustment">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkPageSetup.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPageSetup.
-
-</return>
-</function>
+Retrieves the horizontal focus adjustment for the container. See
+gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment ().
-<function name="gtk_container_child_get">
-<description>
-Gets the values of one or more child properties for @child and @container.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -66856,69 +64385,61 @@ Gets the values of one or more child properties for @child and @container.
<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_prop_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the first property to get
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> return location for the first property, followed
-optionally by more name/return location pairs, followed by %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the horizontal focus adjustment, or %NULL if
+none has been set.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_new_from_file">
+<function name="gtk_size_request_get_height">
<description>
-Reads the print settings from @file_name. Returns a new #GtkPrintSettings
-object with the restored settings, or %NULL if an error occurred. If the
-file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
-#GKeyFileError. See gtk_print_settings_to_file().
+Retrieves a widget's initial minimum and natural height.
-Since: 2.12
+<note><para>This call is specific to width-for-height requests.</para></note>
+
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_name">
-<parameter_description> the filename to read the settings from
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeRequest instance
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
+<parameter name="minimum_height">
+<parameter_description> location to store the minimum height, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="natural_height">
+<parameter_description> location to store the natural height, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the restored #GtkPrintSettings
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_cursor">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_transient_for">
<description>
-Fills in @path and @focus_column with the current path and focus column. If
-the cursor isn't currently set, then * path will be %NULL. If no column
-currently has focus, then * focus_column will be %NULL.
+Dialog windows should be set transient for the main application
+window they were spawned from. This allows <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window managers</link> to e.g. keep the
+dialog on top of the main window, or center the dialog over the
+main window. gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons() and other convenience
+functions in GTK+ will sometimes call
+gtk_window_set_transient_for() on your behalf.
-The returned #GtkTreePath must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() when
-you are done with it.
+Passing %NULL for @parent unsets the current transient window.
+
+On Windows, this function puts the child window on top of the parent,
+much as the window manager would have done on X.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A pointer to be filled with the current cursor path, or %NULL
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="focus_column">
-<parameter_description> A pointer to be filled with the current focus column, or %NULL
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> parent window, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -67013,25 +64534,25 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_authors">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_settings">
<description>
-Sets the strings which are displayed in the authors tab
-of the secondary credits dialog.
+Gets a new #GtkPrintSettings object that represents the
+current values in the print dialog. Note that this creates a
+<emphasis>new object</emphasis>, and you need to unref it
+if don't want to keep it.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="authors">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkPrintSettings object with the values from @dialog
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_header_image">
@@ -67061,7 +64582,7 @@ if there's no header image for the page.
<description>
Creates a new #GtkSeparator with the given orientation.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -67088,6 +64609,24 @@ default.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_button_box_set_layout">
+<description>
+Changes the way buttons are arranged in their container.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButtonBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="layout_style">
+<parameter_description> the new layout style
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_drop_group">
<description>
Gets the group at position (x, y).
@@ -67259,27 +64798,6 @@ coordinates to coordinates for one of the windows in the text view.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_unselect_file">
-<description>
-Unselects the file referred to by @file. If the file is not in the current
-directory, does not exist, or is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="file">
-<parameter_description> a #GFile
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_get_name">
<description>
Retrieves the name of a widget. See gtk_widget_set_name() for the
@@ -67317,19 +64835,20 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_current_alpha">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_title">
<description>
-Returns the current alpha value.
+Returns the title of the widget.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an integer between 0 and 65535.
+<return> the title of the column. This string should not be
+modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -67351,22 +64870,22 @@ longer needed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_new">
+<function name="gtk_range_get_slider_size_fixed">
<description>
-Creates a new recent manager object. Recent manager objects are used to
-handle the list of recently used resources. A #GtkRecentManager object
-monitors the recently used resources list, and emits the "changed" signal
-each time something inside the list changes.
+This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
-#GtkRecentManager objects are expensive: be sure to create them only when
-needed. You should use gtk_recent_manager_get_default() instead.
+See gtk_range_set_slider_size_fixed().
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkRecentManager object.
+<return> whether the range's slider has a fixed size.
</return>
</function>
@@ -67472,77 +64991,78 @@ Sets the position in which the current value is displayed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_new_with_range">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_columns">
<description>
-This is a convenience constructor that allows creation of a numeric
-#GtkSpinButton without manually creating an adjustment. The value is
-initially set to the minimum value and a page increment of 10 * @step
-is the default. The precision of the spin button is equivalent to the
-precision of @step.
-
-Note that the way in which the precision is derived works best if @step
-is a power of ten. If the resulting precision is not suitable for your
-needs, use gtk_spin_button_set_digits() to correct it.
+Sets the ::columns property which determines in how
+many columns the icons are arranged. If @columns is
+-1, the number of columns will be chosen automatically
+to fill the available area.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="min">
-<parameter_description> Minimum allowable value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max">
-<parameter_description> Maximum allowable value
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="step">
-<parameter_description> Increment added or subtracted by spinning the widget
+<parameter name="columns">
+<parameter_description> the number of columns
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The new spin button as a #GtkWidget.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_columns">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_activatable">
<description>
-Sets the ::columns property which determines in how
-many columns the icons are arranged. If @columns is
--1, the number of columns will be chosen automatically
-to fill the available area.
+Sets whether the icon is activatable.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="columns">
-<parameter_description> the number of columns
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the icon should be activatable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_queue_resize">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_backward_display_line_start">
<description>
-This function is only for use in widget implementations.
-Flags a widget to have its size renegotiated; should
-be called when a widget for some reason has a new size request.
-For example, when you change the text in a #GtkLabel, #GtkLabel
-queues a resize to ensure there's enough space for the new text.
+Moves the given @iter backward to the next display line start.
+A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
+separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
+Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
+wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
+same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
+they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
+views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_fixed_height_mode">
@@ -67622,20 +65142,45 @@ Returns the parent container of @widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_unref">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_state_wildcarded">
<description>
-Decrease the reference count of @style.
+Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_state_wildcarded().
-Deprecated: 2.0: use g_object_unref() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if this icon source is a base for any widget state variant
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_menu_label_text">
+<description>
+Retrieves the text of the menu label for the page containing
+ child
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the child widget of a page of the notebook.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the text of the tab label, or %NULL if the
+widget does not have a menu label other than
+the default menu label, or the menu label widget
+is not a #GtkLabel. The string is owned by
+the widget and must not be freed.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_destroy_with_parent">
@@ -67655,26 +65200,23 @@ gtk_window_set_destroy_with_parent ().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_custom_paper_unix_dialog_new">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_wrap">
<description>
-Creates a new custom paper dialog.
-
-Since: 2.18
+Sets the flag that determines if a spin button value wraps around to the
+opposite limit when the upper or lower limit of the range is exceeded.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> the title of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter name="wrap">
+<parameter_description> a flag indicating if wrapping behavior is performed.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkCustomPaperUnixDialog
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_border_copy">
@@ -67797,74 +65339,93 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_widget_new">
+<function name="gtk_draw_insertion_cursor">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget object. This is an embeddable widget
-used to access the recently used resources list.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget
-
-</return>
-</function>
+Draws a text caret on @drawable at @location. This is not a style function
+but merely a convenience function for drawing the standard cursor shape.
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_increments">
-<description>
-Sets the step and page increments for spin_button. This affects how
-quickly the value changes when the spin button's arrows are activated.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="step">
-<parameter_description> increment applied for a button 1 press.
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> increment applied for a button 2 press.
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="location">
+<parameter_description> location where to draw the cursor (@location->width is ignored)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="is_primary">
+<parameter_description> if the cursor should be the primary cursor color.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="direction">
+<parameter_description> whether the cursor is left-to-right or
+right-to-left. Should never be #GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="draw_arrow">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to draw a directional arrow on the
+cursor. Should be %FALSE unless the cursor is split.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_dest_item_at_pos">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_preedit_string">
<description>
-Determines the destination item for a given position.
-
-Since: 2.8
+Set the preedit string and attributes. The preedit string is a
+string showing text that is currently being edited and not
+yet committed into the buffer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="drag_x">
-<parameter_description> the position to determine the destination item for
+<parameter name="preedit_string">
+<parameter_description> a string to display at the insertion point
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="drag_y">
-<parameter_description> the position to determine the destination item for
+<parameter name="preedit_attrs">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoAttrList of attributes that apply to @preedit_string
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the item, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="cursor_pos">
+<parameter_description> position of cursor within preedit string in chars
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pos">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_relief_style">
+<description>
+Returns the relief style of buttons on @toolbar. See
+gtk_button_set_relief().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether there is an item at the given position.
+<return> The relief style of buttons on @toolbar.
</return>
</function>
@@ -68011,20 +65572,40 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_copy">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_add_drag_dest">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreePath as a copy of @path.
+Sets @palette as drag source (see gtk_tool_palette_set_drag_source())
+and sets @widget as a drag destination for drags from @palette.
+See gtk_drag_dest_set().
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget which should be a drag destination for @palette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> the flags that specify what actions GTK+ should take for drops
+on that widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkToolPaletteDragTarget<!-- -->s which the widget
+should support
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="actions">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDragAction<!-- -->s which the widget should suppport
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkTreePath.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_collate">
@@ -68045,52 +65626,24 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert_item">
+<function name="gtk_icon_info_new_for_pixbuf">
<description>
-Inserts a new item into the toolbar. You must specify the position in the
-toolbar where it will be inserted.
-
- callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
+Creates a #GtkIconInfo for a #GdkPixbuf.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> give your toolbar button a label.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> a string that appears when the user holds the mouse over this item.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> use with #GtkTipsQuery.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> the function to be executed when the button is pressed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to any data you wish to be passed to the callback.
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the number of widgets to insert this item after.
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> the pixbuf to wrap in a #GtkIconInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new toolbar item as a #GtkWidget.
+<return> a #GtkIconInfo
</return>
</function>
@@ -68222,48 +65775,23 @@ page size, it is clamped between @min and @max - page-size.)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_layout_reorder">
-<description>
-Re-inserts @cell at @position. Note that @cell has already to be packed
-into @cell_layout for this to function properly.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_layout">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer to reorder.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> New position to insert @cell at.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_tabs">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_new_from_string">
<description>
-Gets the default tabs for @text_view. Tags in the buffer may
-override the defaults. The returned array will be %NULL if
-"standard" (8-space) tabs are used. Free the return value
-with pango_tab_array_free().
+Creates a new #GtkTreePath initialized to @path. @path is expected to be a
+colon separated list of numbers. For example, the string "10:4:0" would
+create a path of depth 3 pointing to the 11th child of the root node, the 5th
+child of that 11th child, and the 1st child of that 5th child. If an invalid
+path string is passed in, %NULL is returned.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The string representation of a path.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> copy of default tab array, or %NULL if "standard"
-tabs are used; must be freed with pango_tab_array_free().
+<return> A newly-created #GtkTreePath, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
@@ -68388,38 +65916,6 @@ Emits a #GtkTreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal on @sortable.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_get_for_screen">
-<description>
-Gets the recent manager object associated with @screen; if this
-function has not previously been called for the given screen,
-a new recent manager object will be created and associated with
-the screen. Recent manager objects are fairly expensive to create,
-so using this function is usually a better choice than calling
-gtk_recent_manager_new() and setting the screen yourself; by using
-this function a single recent manager object will be shared between
-users.
-
-Deprecated: 2.12: This function has been deprecated and should
-not be used in newly written code. Calling this function is
-equivalent to calling gtk_recent_manager_get_default().
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A unique #GtkRecentManager associated with the given
-screen. This recent manager is associated to the with the screen
-and can be used as long as the screen is open. Do not ref or
-unref it.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_state">
<description>
Obtains the widget state this icon source applies to. The return
@@ -68438,24 +65934,24 @@ wildcarded.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_direction">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_commit">
<description>
-Sets the text direction this icon source is intended to be used
-with.
+Erases the visited page history so the back button is not
+shown on the current page, and removes the cancel button
+from subsequent pages.
-Setting the text direction on an icon source makes no difference
-if the text direction is wildcarded. Therefore, you should usually
-call gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded() to un-wildcard it
-in addition to calling this function.
+Use this when the information provided up to the current
+page is hereafter deemed permanent and cannot be modified
+or undone. For example, showing a progress page to track
+a long-running, unreversible operation after the user has
+clicked apply on a confirmation page.
+
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="direction">
-<parameter_description> text direction this source applies to
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -68518,23 +66014,6 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_hadjustment">
-<description>
-Gets the #GtkAdjustment currently being used for the horizontal aspect.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkAdjustment object, or %NULL if none is currently being
-used.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_columns_autosize">
<description>
Resizes all columns to their optimal width. Only works after the
@@ -68716,24 +66195,6 @@ column 2.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_complete">
-<description>
-Requests a completion operation, or in other words a refiltering of the
-current list with completions, using the current key. The completion list
-view will be updated accordingly.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_action_connect_accelerator">
<description>
Installs the accelerator for @action if @action has an
@@ -69156,19 +66617,19 @@ representing a node in a tree. This value should not be freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_width">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_adjustment">
<description>
-Returns the current size of @tree_column in pixels.
+Get the adjustment associated with a #GtkSpinButton
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The current width of @tree_column.
+<return> the #GtkAdjustment of @spin_button
</return>
</function>
@@ -69195,27 +66656,6 @@ any focus widget for the toplevel window.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_set_hadjustment">
-<description>
-Sets the horizontal scroll adjustment for the layout.
-
-See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> new scroll adjustment
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_menu_shell_get_take_focus">
<description>
Returns %TRUE if the menu shell will take the keyboard focus on popup.
@@ -69234,46 +66674,43 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_reordered">
+<function name="gtk_action_create_menu_item">
<description>
-Lets a set of row reference created by gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy()
-know that the model emitted the "rows_reordered" signal.
+Creates a menu item widget that proxies for the given action.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> A #GObject
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The parent path of the reordered signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The iter pointing to the parent of the reordered
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_order">
-<parameter_description> The new order of rows
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a menu item connected to the action.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_adjustment">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_ends">
<description>
-Get the adjustment associated with a #GtkSpinButton
+Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() @count times (or until
+gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() returns %FALSE). If @count is
+negative, moves backward instead of forward.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of sentences to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkAdjustment of @spin_button
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
</return>
</function>
diff --git a/gtk/src/gtk_methods.defs b/gtk/src/gtk_methods.defs
index 1d797d6..f2460e4 100644
--- a/gtk/src/gtk_methods.defs
+++ b/gtk/src/gtk_methods.defs
@@ -5062,6 +5062,12 @@
(return-type "GtkPositionType")
)
+(define-method get_event_window
+ (of-object "GtkButton")
+ (c-name "gtk_button_get_event_window")
+ (return-type "GdkWindow*")
+)
+
;; From gtkcalendar.h
@@ -13989,30 +13995,6 @@
)
)
-(define-method query_tab_label_packing
- (of-object "GtkNotebook")
- (c-name "gtk_notebook_query_tab_label_packing")
- (return-type "none")
- (parameters
- '("GtkWidget*" "child")
- '("gboolean*" "expand")
- '("gboolean*" "fill")
- '("GtkPackType*" "pack_type")
- )
-)
-
-(define-method set_tab_label_packing
- (of-object "GtkNotebook")
- (c-name "gtk_notebook_set_tab_label_packing")
- (return-type "none")
- (parameters
- '("GtkWidget*" "child")
- '("gboolean" "expand")
- '("gboolean" "fill")
- '("GtkPackType" "pack_type")
- )
-)
-
(define-method reorder_child
(of-object "GtkNotebook")
(c-name "gtk_notebook_reorder_child")
@@ -19949,6 +19931,16 @@
(return-type "gboolean")
)
+(define-method get_size
+ (of-object "GtkTable")
+ (c-name "gtk_table_get_size")
+ (return-type "none")
+ (parameters
+ '("guint*" "rows")
+ '("guint*" "columns")
+ )
+)
+
;; From gtktearoffmenuitem.h
@@ -29526,6 +29518,12 @@
)
)
+(define-method get_current_grab
+ (of-object "GtkWindowGroup")
+ (c-name "gtk_window_group_get_current_grab")
+ (return-type "GtkWidget*")
+)
+
;; From gtkpagesetupunixdialog.h
diff --git a/gtk/src/table.hg b/gtk/src/table.hg
index fe9e83a..6f7d98f 100644
--- a/gtk/src/table.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/table.hg
@@ -166,6 +166,8 @@ public:
_WRAP_METHOD(void set_homogeneous(bool homogeneous = true), gtk_table_set_homogeneous)
_WRAP_METHOD(bool get_homogeneous() const, gtk_table_get_homogeneous)
+
+ _WRAP_METHOD(void get_size(guint& rows, guint& columns) const, gtk_table_get_size)
typedef Table_Helpers::TableList TableList;
[
Date Prev][
Date Next] [
Thread Prev][
Thread Next]
[
Thread Index]
[
Date Index]
[
Author Index]
